Software Package Data Exchange® (SPDX™)

This section is where you can contribute to the development of the specification. To learn how to participate and get signed up for an account and the mailing list, click on the Getting Started link below.

Getting Started with Participation

First:

  • You need an account in order to edit the wiki pages. If you haven't created an account on FOSSBazaar or spdx.org yet, please sign up for one now. If you already have a FOSSBazaar account, you can use it login here.
  • There are three separate SPDX teams (Technical, Business and Legal) each of which has its own meetings and mailing list. There is also a regular General Meeting and mailing list, the main purposes of which is to report out on team activities. Here you can subscribe to the SPDX mailing list which is a good way for anyone with casual interest to participate and be notified of general meetings. To participate on the teams or get on the team mailing lists, go to their respective sections under the Participation tab.
  • A good starting point for understanding the spec is the SPDX whitepaper. This 3 minute webinar provides a very concise introduction.
  • Another good resource is the mailing list archive.

Wiki

Here are some instructions for using the SPDX wiki. Every user who is logged into spdx.org can modify wiki pages. At the top of a page, you'll see an "Edit" option. You can then edit the page using the HTML editor. When you save the page, make sure to put in a message in "Log message" briefly explaining the change you've made. Then click on "Save" at the bottom of the page to save or on "Preview" or "Preview changes" to preview before saving.

If a page has been edited more than once, you'll see a "Revisions" link at the top of the page (next to "Edit"). Clicking on this link will allow you to see in detail which changes have been made to the page.

If you want to create a new page, click on "Add child page".

If you want to add a visible comment,  please start the comment by indicating the source by your initials, bolded, surrounded by angle brackets.  Then put the comment itself in italics.  For example: <kes> this is a comment or a question?.  The purpose of this is to make sure its clear that this is not part of the official text of the standard at this point, and provides localized context for the discussion.

General Meeting

  • The SPDX General Meeting is held every other Thursday at 11am eastern US time. 
  • Here you can subscribe to the SPDX mailing list for notice of General Meetings.
  • If you have any questions you can contact Kate Stewart (stewart@linux.com) and Phil Odence (podence@blackducksoftware.com).
  • Minutes of General Meetings are posted here.

2012/04/19 General Meeting Minutes

Attendance: 12
Previous minutes not reviewed
     

Legal Team Report - Adam

  • Discussing proposal for license list submissions. Goals
    • evaluated proposal from business team; would like to makes it easier / faster and take advantage of community
    • will circulate proposal soon
  • Discussion of issues on headers & notices led to broader discussion 
    • plan to review vision, direction, refine charter
    • need to clarify problems we want to solve since we can't solve every problem
    • prioritizing problems is a cross-functional concern; plan to discuss more broadly
  • Starting to develop legal use cases

Technical Team Report - Kate

  • 2.0 Spec
    • Working through use cases; have extended deadline for capturing use cases
  • 1.1 Still in progress
    • additional comment fields proposed: license level and file level
    • as soon as ready, will announce for review and close 2 weeks later
    • rough timeframe: end of May

Business Team Report - Scott

  • Jack & Scott have planned formal hand-off with Kim
  • Call in #s will change; check the webite
  • Primary focus wil be follow-up on SPDX forum brainstorming on ways to encourage adoption 


Cross Functional Issues – Kirsten

  • Kirsten & Pierre will work with Steve and Martin to create plan for migrating to new web pages


Attendees

  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Kevin Fleming
  • Pierre LaPonte, nexB
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Michael Herzog, nexB
  • Scott Lamons, HP
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Chuck Gandreau, Protecode
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Mark Gisi, Windriver
  • Jack Manbeck, TI

2012/05/03 General Meeting Minutes

 Attendance: 11

Meeting lead by Kate Stewart
     

Attendees

Chuck - Protecode

Michael Herzog - NexB

Pierre La Point NextB

Tom Incorvia - MIcrofocus

Kate Stewart - Canonical

Martin M - HP

Scott -

Mark Gisi - Windriver

Jilyane Lovejoy - Openlogic

Adam Cohn - Cisco

Steve Cropper - Cisco

---

Technical - Kate

• sorting out the usecases/groupings for last 2 meetings

• SPEC 1.1 being readied for wider review.  

? Roadmap for 2.0? timing is question,  dependency on how

   quickly we can gel on targets.   hoping for Q4.  

? need to tie in to business activities with structure to

   capture, and forward looking activities.

Legal Team - Jilayne  

• revised license addition process posted for review

• feedback received,  URLs to be added.

• reality of situation,  encouraging other to check out.

• Getting more documentation/explanation of vision/goals of subgroup.

(see meeting minutes)

• People working on drafts of what legal work group is in charge of.

License list.

• Sense of to do list,  what is still outstanding.

• Movement on OSI outstanding issues,  clarification.  

• License notices - lots of discussion, but no net change.

• Nothing further on templatizing front.

Business Team - Michael

• general topic,  product planning and roadmap for SPDX

• combining concepts - validating, compliance, root attribution

information.

• Product Roadmap - 2.0,  some vision of what it should be,  review of

business team next week.

• Charter - is data exchange, how it is evolving...  framework.  

• Distinguishing between changes to SPEC and changes to software to

support SPEC.   Foster adoption, help folks comply, SPEC and

implementation in software are different.  Java community process...

• SPEC and licensing for implementation.  Subset of issues change SPEC,

and enable others.

• Framework for discussing different ideas... revision to future plan.

Proposing a simple product management to planning.   Constituencies,

coallescing.  Purpose of version in business discussion.

• Current, Next, Future - approach.   Product management function.

Difference between SPEC and related issues around implementing.

• Wanting to expand out the charter -

Steve/Pierre - Web

• pierre, martin, steve did survey - 30% of content in place,  70%

missing

• link on the front page of new site

• assignments,  checked against all of the pages,  pages, content added

and missing.

• requested Steve rebroadcast assignment page,  mail out to everyone

else.

• Re-attach instruction of .pdf of instructions.

• End of May will be switch over...

• Business team,  looking at reallocating page with Kim's name was

beside.   Finish up.  

• Status on assignments,  guidelines to being done.

Martin - Web migration

• Wiki ideas, infrastructure is redundant, web site is maintained by

Martin,  want to find better ways

• Good discussion with Ed Warnicke,  moving to proper wiki, going to

hosted sites.  Move WIKI and make site easier.

• Martin working on plan to do this.   Discuss with others after

preliminary sketch - June/July time frame.

• Cost: really low,  hosting instances cheap, couple $$ per month?

Steve Cropper - SPDX WEBEX site setup option.  Hostids to team members.

Genearal agreement that this is a good direction to investigate, but

Linux system must work with it, or its a non starter. (Steve will get

together with Ed, and investigate if Linux problems can be solved).  

Concern expressed desire to have calls recorded for convenience of those

in other timezones, and help with meeting minute writers.  

Phil: Can the phone recording option be turned on in future, and

the summaries be made available via the web, as interim until WEBEX

like capabilities can be make available with all participants, still

able to participate.

2012/05/17 General Meeting Minutes

Attendance: 9
May 3 minutes approved
     

Legal Team Report - Jilayne

  • Working on explicitly defining the team's mission.
    • Current Draft (feel free to provide feedback to team/Jilayne): 

      "The SPDX Legal Team supports the SPDX working groups by providing recommendations to the SPDX working groups regarding licensing issues for the specification itself; providing input that will result in increased legal certainty of the licensing attributes of open source projects; maintain the SPDX License List; and to promote the SPDX specification to the legal community at-large."

  • Similarly working on defining purpose of the License List.
    • Current draft (also open for feedback):

      "The SPDX License List is a list of commonly found open source software licenses for the purposes of being able to easily and efficiently identify such licenses in an SPDX document. The SPDX License List includes a standardized short identifier and full name for each license, as well as other basic information. By providing a short identifier, SPDX creators (as well as others beyond SPDX) can efficiently refer to a license without having to redundantly reproduce the full license. The SPDX website (spdx.org) maintains the full text of each license on the SPDX License List. In keeping with the overall goal of the SPDX project, no interpretation of the licenses has been made and the SPDX Licenses List endeavors to only provide a factual list of licenses and short identifiers that can be consistently relied upon by users of the list."

  • Reviewed and updated longer term to do list
  • Posted process for adding licenses to License List in Specification section of current website.

Business Team Report - Scott/Jack

  • Mission/Vision Discussion
    • To support the Tech Team's work in sorting through 2.0, the team is raising a conversation that will go cross team, revisiting mission/vision/strategy/etc.
    • Want to ensure that we are all in sync and that make sure that our vision remains aligned with what we are trying to do.
    • Expect to share initial thoughts more broadly across teams next week.

Technical Team Report - Kate

  • 2.0 work
    • Continue to work on use cases. Have put into logical groupings.
    • Need help in getting use cases fleshed out. 
    • IMPORTANT: If you want to be sure a use case gets attention, make sure the template is fleshed out.
    • http://www.spdx.org/wiki/spdx-20-use-cases 
  • 1.1 work
    • Working out last kinks. 
    • Should be out and available in weeks
    • Available in Tech Team section (in .doc format) for comment


Cross Functional Issues – Phil

  • Website Update
    • As per May 3 memo, need all content updated by May 31.
    • Content remains a bit sparse. Please make sure you are working on any parts for which you are responsible for.
    • Pierre (will assist from Phil, Steve, Kirsten) will make sure individuals are assigned, aware of their responsibilities, and on track


Attendees

  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Pierre LaPonte, nexB
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Michael Herzog, nexB
  • Scott Lamons, HP
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Brandan Robinson, Cisco
  • Jack Manbeck, TI
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic

License Field Discussion

There have been multiple discussions in different working groups about the nomenclature, meaning and intent of the package license fields. To ensure we are all on the right page, we want ot have some wiki-based discussion about the fields with perhaps some examples and use cases tha that we can capture for documentation, FAQs, etc. We may need to go thru this same exercise at the file level, but let's start here. 

Below is extracted (though for simplicity, not 100% complete) text from the June 5 rev of the spec (http://www.spdx.org/wiki/spdx/specification). Please make comments or ask questions and identify yourself.

4.9 Declared License

4.9.1 Purpose: This field lists the licenses that have been declared by the authors of the package. Any license information that does not originate from the package authors, e.g. license information from a third party repository, should not be included in this field...

4.9.2 Intent: This is simply the license identified in text in the actual package source code files. This field is not intended to capture license information obtained from an external source, such as the package website. Such information can be included in 4.7 Concluded License. This field may have multiple declared licenses, if multiple licenses are declared at the package level...

4.7 Concluded License

4.7.1 Purpose: TThis field contains the license the creator has concluded as governing the package or alternative values, if the governing license cannot be determined...

4.7.2 Intent: Here, the intent is to have the reviewer analyze the license information in package, and other objective information, e.g., COPYING.txt file etc., together with the results from any scanning tools, to arrive at a reasonably objective conclusion as to what license governs the package.

So, what do you think? 

Is the distinction clear between the two fields?

Are both useful?

Can you provide examples of where they are useful?

Do you have an example that raises issues?

 

Master Schedule

Milestones for Teams & Events

NOTE: This events including in the Master Schedule are only those that have milestone implications. A more complete list of events can be found here.

 

Month

Tech

Biz

Legal

Events

Jan

 

 

Review Terms of Use for SPDX.com

 

Feb

 

-Feb 3 - Beta Intro Call for Potential Beta Sites -Finalize list of beta participants

 

 

Mar

Complete Release Candidate for Beta.

Preliminary tooling in place.

-Train Beta Sites

License Repo in Place for Beta

 

Apr

 

 

4/7-78 Present at FSFE Legal Network in Amsterdam - Rockett

4/6-8 Tech and Biz Team Meetings at Collab Summit, San Francisco

May

 

-Start Beta Testing

 

5/16-17 - Mark Radcliffe to discuss SPDX at OSBC, SF

Jun

 

-Complete Beta Testing

 

 

Jul

-Finalize spec for 1.0 Final

-Final tooling

-Final user content in place

-Launch plan in place

 

 

Aug

 

-Launch 1.0 Final

 

8/17-19 Launch at LinuxCon NA - Vancouver

Sep

 

 

 

 

Oct

 

 

 

 

Nov

 

 

 

 

Dec

 

 

 

 


Past Minutes

2010/08/11 Minutes

Scuse the lousy formatting. I'm working on it. Phil

 

Minutes - 2010/08/11 LinuxCon2010 Boston SPDX BOF

 

Current status:

         - need to focus on goals for next 3 months

         - SPDX.org rollout,  shadows fossbazaar.org for data.

         - mail list transfering to spdx@fossbazaar.org with

          self subscription to mail list now possible, and

          public archives.

         - package-facts@fossbazaar.org now depreciated,

          mail list there will remain private, per original

          commitment.

 

 

 

Web site overview:

         - site design is still evolving, participation welcome.

         - log in to comment on wiki etc.

         - anyone can blog on site, and postings on topic welcome.

         - presentation material available on site for outreach support.

         - AI: Phil/Martin - update on participation page where to join

              (suggestion was to put link in text, not just at top,

               consider "I want to use the spec, vs. I want to contribute

               to the spec).

         - AI: Kate to transfer document (.pdf) back to WIKI.

         - AI: Phil update standard presentation with LinuxCon2010 input

         - AI: Kate clean up the sharing analysis to what is accurate

         - AI: Kate publish the current version number of the specification

             in brackets behind reference.

 

 

- License Discussion:

         - Look at Fedora's approach as a single page.

          Example license text - canonical form.   

          Good from tooling perspective.  Suck info off the pages.   

          HTML at low technical level is easy.  RDF?

         - see fedoraproject.org/wiki/License- licenses table.

         - Used License Text - uses tag to identify in page

          Fedora provide notes, and canonical text.

         - For SPDX problem is where store templated version?

Minutes - 2010/08/11 LinuxCon2010 Boston SPDX BOF

 

Current status:

         - need to focus on goals for next 3 months

         - SPDX.org rollout,  shadows fossbazaar.org for data.

         - mail list transfering to spdx@fossbazaar.org with

          self subscription to mail list now possible, and

          public archives.

         - package-facts@fossbazaar.org now depreciated,

          mail list there will remain private, per original

          commitment.

 

 

 

Web site overview:

         - site design is still evolving, participation welcome.

         - log in to comment on wiki etc.

         - anyone can blog on site, and postings on topic welcome.

         - presentation material available on site for outreach support.

         - AI: Phil/Martin - update on participation page where to join

              (suggestion was to put link in text, not just at top,

               consider "I want to use the spec, vs. I want to contribute

               to the spec).

         - AI: Kate to transfer document (.pdf) back to WIKI.

         - AI: Phil update standard presentation with LinuxCon2010 input

         - AI: Kate clean up the sharing analysis to what is accurate

         - AI: Kate publish the current version number of the specification

             in brackets behind reference.

 

 

- License Discussion:

         - Look at Fedora's approach as a single page.

          Example license text - canonical form.   

          Good from tooling perspective.  Suck info off the pages.   

          HTML at low technical level is easy.  RDF?

         - see fedoraproject.org/wiki/License- licenses table.

         - Used License Text - uses tag to identify in page

          Fedora provide notes, and canonical text.

         - For SPDX problem is where store templated version?

          Suggestion is to use come up with standardized naming

          of the sections, and embed the text of the licence

          "template" version, so it shows up on the "official"

          license page. (example to consider, verify that BSD

          hasn't been modified and do it with a template).

         - Fields to put on each "web license WIKI page"

          - short form name

          - long form name

          - link to formal license

          - notes on license

          - full license text

          - template version

         - Note: need to figure out and document how to add a license

          (ie. When you add a license - 1) create separate page;  

         raw template text, user visible text - here's out how

         embed this text.  etc.)

         - AI: Tom to define a proposal for user front page.

         Decide section names to correspond to spec

         - AI: Group: discuss further following questions:

                  - what does it mean to be "on the list" for a license.

                  - what is it going to take to add and maintain a license.

                  - Consider when english isn't spoken language?

                   (what can be translated, what can't, work into template)

 

- roll out - operational aspects

         - what do we want to get accomplished?

         - divy out and how get accomplished?

         - Target to have spec at 1.0 in 2010Q4

         - What are building blocks needed?

          Consider: documenting tooling;  training;  how to use.....

         - Strong feeling one shot to get this right, want

          free and comercial tool support available for supply chain.

         - AI:  Kim & John to work on operationalize plan.  

          (including a date can tell supply chain people?    

          GOAL is understand a date to have industry

          changing/financially impacting.   Tie to next LinuxCon??)

          of the sections, and embed the text of the licence

          "template" version, so it shows up on the "official"

          license page. (example to consider, verify that BSD

          hasn't been modified and do it with a template).

         - Fields to put on each "web license WIKI page"

          - short form name

          - long form name

          - link to formal license

          - notes on license

          - full license text

          - template version

         - Note: need to figure out and document how to add a license

          (ie. When you add a license - 1) create separate page;  

         raw template text, user visible text - here's out how

         embed this text.  etc.)

         - AI: Tom to define a proposal for user front page.

         Decide section names to correspond to spec

         - AI: Group: discuss further following questions:

                  - what does it mean to be "on the list" for a license.

                  - what is it going to take to add and maintain a license.

                  - Consider when english isn't spoken language?

                   (what can be translated, what can't, work into template)

 

- roll out - operational aspects

         - what do we want to get accomplished?

         - divy out and how get accomplished?

         - Target to have spec at 1.0 in 2010Q4

         - What are building blocks needed?

          Consider: documenting tooling;  training;  how to use.....

         - Strong feeling one shot to get this right, want

          free and comercial tool support available for supply chain.

         - AI:  Kim & John to work on operationalize plan.  

          (including a date can tell supply chain people?    

          GOAL is understand a date to have industry

          changing/financially impacting.   Tie to next LinuxCon??)

 

 

 

2010/08/26 Minutes

 

ADMINISTRATIVE

Agenda

  • Attendance - 18
  • Approval of minutes from BoF session – Approved.
  • New Logistics and Expanding Group
  • Outreach and evangelism:
    • Common Messaging/Presentation – Phil O
    • Industry Venues – Phil R
      • LinuxCon Debrief- Phil O
    • Website – Martin M

Logistics

PhilO discussed need for evolving logistics with the group getting larger and including new folks. We're doing away with the "Who just joined?" approach to attendance and will mainly depend on log-ins to Webshare to record attendance. In addition everyone is encouraged to state their name when speaking. There also some discussion (actually it came up towards the end of the meeting) about providing minutes via a link rather than an attached Word doc.

 

 

  

Common Messaging/Presentation

PhilO is updating the presentation to reflect Kate's LinuxCon presentation content.

 

Industry Venues

PhilO reported on LinuxCon. Jim Zemlin's keynote was all about the new Open Compliance Program, and SPDX was prominently featured. SPDX got some good PR out of it and one article said it was the key to the bigger program. Phil Koltun delivered a more detailed session on the OCP and Kate had one on SPDX. Both were well attended. Finally, we had a Birds of a Feature session.

 

Website

 

Kudos to Martin for helping PhilO get the new spdx.org launched in time for LinuxCon. There was some discussion about making it more obvious how one joins both the group and the mailing list; it's better to be redundant in order to be more welcoming. There was also a discussion about getting examples up to date and getting the Wiki going again. We finally got into a discussion about hosting code for tools. Possibilities were: SourceForge, GitHub.

 

 

Rollout

PhilO mentioned the JohnE and KimW have been working on a rollout plan, expanding on both out technical efforts and outreach/evangelism efforts. More at the next meeting.

 

  

ACTION ITEMS

  • PhilO/Martin - Update on participation page where to join (suggestion was to put link in text, not just at top, consider "I want to use the spec, vs. I want to contribute to the spec" in navigation section.
  • Kate- Transfer document (.pdf) back to WIKI.
  • PhilO- Update standard presentation with LinuxCon2010 input
  • Kate- Clean up the sharing analysis to what is accurate.
  • Kate- Publish the current version number of the specification in brackets behind reference
  • Kim/PhilO- Add and element of 'What's in this for me?" to presentation
  • JeffL (w/Bill/Gary- Update zlib based on new specification
  • All- Look for new examples to add to site.
  • PhilK- Explore possibility of LF hosting source for SPDX tools.
  • Gary- Explore other possible hosting options
  • PhilO- Start making minutes available via link.
  • BillS- Start up RDF sub-group. Solicite members.

 

TECHNICAL

Agenda

 

Mock Up

Spot was not in attendance, but we reviewed the mock-up. There was fair agreement that its close to what we are looking for (if not "Spot" on)

 

 

Short Form Licenses

Our implicit path had tied a fixed license list of licenses to the spec rev, but JohnE put forth an impassioned argument as to why they should be decoupled: Essentially we'll want the license list to change with more frequency than the spec (months vs. years). A new license can't mean a new spec rev. There was much discussion about how to manage the license list. 

There was fair agreement just as there is a "playground" for working on the spec and a release process to the current rev, there should be a similar arrangement for licenses (though decoupled) and certainly there should be legal review.

There was not complete agreement about the intended scope of the list, but there was agreement that there needed so be some nomination process and that anyone wishing to add a license must be willing to take on the associated work. BobG is willing to be a contributor. A topic of future discussion is how we will come down on the initial V1.0 list of licenses. These issues in contemplated in the rollout framework that we'll be putting forth.

 

RDF

We reviewed the intent of using RDF and BillS described what's been done with DOAP as a model. Essentially, we're exploring RDF as a reasonable balance between the needs of people being able to view and create SPDX docs, and machines to be able to consume and produce the format.

There was agreement that there is lots of work to be done in this area: defining the syntax, defining web repository of license info, documenting usage, etc. We decided that we need a sub-team to take this on. BillS will coordinate and PeterW, Gary and Kate will participate, as well as others who are interested.

 

 

 

ATTENDANCE

  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Bob Gobeille, FOSSology.org, HP
  • Ann Thornton, Freescale
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Jeff Luszcz, Palamida
  • Richard Fontana, Red Hat
  • Mark Gisi, Wind River
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • John Ellis, Motorola
  • David Wolfe, Freescale
  • Tom Incorvia, Micro Focus
  • Kim Weins, Open Logic
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  • Jack Manbeck, TI
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Philip Odence, Black Duck Software

 

2010/09/09 Minutes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ADMINISTRATIVE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Agenda

 

  • Attendance - 19
  • Approval of minutes - Pending til next meeting
  • Outreach and evangelism:
    • Common Messaging/Presentation – PhilO
    • Industry Venues – PhilR
    • Website – PhilO/MartinM
  • Rollout- KimW

Common Messaging/Presentation

PhilO reported that he'd updated the presentation. He's added a slide describing to people why they should participate; he and Kim will update in the context of her OWF presentation.

Industry Venues

PhilO reviewed process for new participatns

Website

PhilO walked through changes implemented to make how to participate more obvious. There are pointers to where to sign up and get on the mailing list from every major tab.

Rollout

Kim described the motivations for, approach to and elements of the rollout that will require work. There's a fair amount to be done, but it is now well framed. There will likely be a different thread of meetings on rollout issues (vs. spec completion) starting after a face to face meeting in mid-November. Some of the areas that need work would benefit from skills from outside the current group, so please think about others in your organization that might help.

 

Issue Tracking

We agreed that we should implement an issue tracking system for spec issues. We can use Linux Foundations Bugzilla. Peter Williams agreed to drive and administer with help from Marshall.

 

 

ACTION ITEMS

  • PhilO/Martin - Update on participation page where to join (suggestion was to put link in text, not just at top, consider "I want to use the spec, vs. I want to contribute to the spec" in navigation section. DONE
  • Kate- Transfer document (.pdf) back to WIKI. IN PROCESS
  • PhilO- Update standard presentation with LinuxCon2010 input DONE
  • Kate- Clean up the sharing analysis to what is accurate.  IN PROCESS
  • Kate- Publish the current version number of the specification in brackets behind reference DONE
  • Kim/PhilO- Add and element of 'What's in this for me?" to presentation  DONE
  • JeffL (w/Bill/Gary- Update zlib based on new specification  IN PROCESS
  • All- Look for new examples to add to site. IN PROCESS
  • PhilK- Explore possibility of LF hosting source for SPDX tools.  DONE. 
  • Gary- Explore other possible hosting options. DONE. 
  • PhilO- Start making minutes available via link. DONE
  • BillS- Start up RDF sub-group. Solicite members.  DONE

New

 

  • KimW- Sent rollout slides to mailing list
  • RDF Group- Work out syntax for 5.6/5.7
  • Bill S- Add Ed W to the RDF group
  • Kate- Track and (when Wiki is back up) implement changes described in Spec section below.
  • PeterW- Implement issue tracking system.

 

 

TECHNICAL

 

Agenda

  • Spec current status and open areas- Kate
  • RDF Focus Group update - Bill
  • Tools update - Gary
  • Issue Tracking

License Discussion

As there has been a lot of discussion of licenses on the mailing list (decoupling from spec, etc.), we decided to have a separate session dedicated to that discussion. Kate will be hosting on Thurs, Sept 16 at 12:00 EDT (one hour later than our normal.) Invitation and agenda to be sent out early next week.

Specification - Current Draft 20100806

No changes have been implemented since the beta release as we are working through some formatting issues getting the .pdf back into Wiki form.

Additional Fields: 5.6/5.7 We picked up on the discussion from the maillist of adding 5.6/5.7 fields to the file section which would designate the name and URL of the package from which a file is known to come. There was agreement that we should go ahead with this in concept and that the RDF group would work out the syntax.

Revisit 3.3 To deal with the recursive problem (wanting to include the SPDX file in a package but also wanting it to include a SHA-1 for the package) there has been a proposal based off of the SHA-1s of all the other files in the package. Kate is looking for others interested in this, to brainstorm with as to algorithms to generate this new package level checksum.   We got into a discussion of "unique identifier" vs. "validator" and it became clear our nomenclature needs to be cleaned up to indicate that this is a validator and not an identifier. Someone proposed "Package Check Sum" as the name of the field and there was agreement. Kate will clean up the language requested more discussion on the maillist of the technical approach.

Appendices- The RDF group identified the need for an ontology and an XML schema appendix.   Place holders for these will be added to the WIKI.


 

 

RDF Group

There was a good kickoff meeting last Thursday. Most of the discussion was about approaches and concerns. Both an ontology and a schema are to be the targeted outputs from this subgroup.  Bill has since found a collaborative ontology site that will be useful in the development. 

 

 

Tools & Infrastructure

Linux Foundation has agreed to make the source code revision infrastructure (git based) available to SPDX tools.   There will be a meeting next week between Gary, Ibrahim, Kate to discuss the logistics in more details.   The first project will be Gary's Pretty Printer (which has components that can be reused in other projects).

Request was made on the list for an issue tracker.  Current mechanism is a WIKI, but it was felt something more formal would give us better history.    After group discussion and the willingness of Peter to volunteer to adminster it (thanks Peter!),  we will be looking at setting up a bugzilla system.   Options on where it can be hosted (linux foundation?), will be investigated by Kate.   Goal would be that this could be used for the SPDX tools as well. 

 

ATTENDANCE

  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Daniel Germain, U of Victoria
  • Marshall Clow, Qualcomm
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Ed Warnicke, Cisco
  • Ann Thornton, Freescale
  • Alan Stern, Cisco
  • Phil Robb, HP
  • Tom Incorvia, Micro Focus
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Mark Gisi, Wind River
  • Jeff Luszcz, Palamida
  • Pierre Lapointe, NexB
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Philip Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Eric Weidner, OpenLogic
  • Dave McLoughlin, OpenLogic

 

2010/09/23 Minutes

 

DRAFT

ADMINISTRATIVE

Agenda 

  • Attendance - 17
  • Approval of minutes: Approved Aug 26 and Sept 9
  • Outreach and evangelism:
    • Common Messaging/Presentation – PhilO
    • Industry Venues – PhilR
    • Website – PhilO/MartinM
  • Roll Out Update - KimW/JohnE (volunteer needs, face to face plan)
  • Legal update from LF Member Counsel call- Rockett

Common Messaging/Presentation

PhilO once again expressed openness to any feedback on the standards slides we should all be using to describe SPDX

Industry Venues

PhilR lead a discussion about future events we should be getting on the list. He will be updating. All are encouraged to crowdsource this list.

Website

Website is still developing and PhilO is open to feedback.

Rollout

PhilO summarized the need for a roll out plan. Kim emphasized that we are looking for volunteers from the group and our respective organizations. A face to face meeting will be scheduled for Nov 16/17, with location to be determined based on who is coming.

Legal Update

Rockett summarized a call with Linux Foundation legal group, the Member Counsel. (Kim, Kate, JohnE and PhilO also participated.) The Member Council has been aware of standardization efforts for a couple of year and this call was to provide status. A number of the participants were new to the MC, so it was important to get them up to speed. They encouraged us to provide them with an example.

ACTION ITEMS

  • Kate- Transfer document (.pdf) back to WIKI. IN PROCESS; FORMATTING IS A BEAST
  • Kim (formerly Kate)- Clean up the sharing analysis to what is accurate.  IN PROCESS
  • JeffL (w/Bill/Gary- Update zlib based on new specification  IN PROCESS
  • KimW- Sent rollout slides to mailing list DONE
  • RDF Group- Work out syntax for 5.6/5.7  IN PROCESS ON RECOMMENDATION
  • Bill S- Add Ed W to the RDF group DONE
  • Kate- Track and (when Wiki is back up) implement changes described in Spec section below. WAITING FOR WIKI
  • PeterW- Implement issue tracking system.  TO BE DISCUSSED.

New 

  • Phil R- Update Industry Events.
  • Kate- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and corresponding spreadsheet (or spreadsheet-like) format.

TECHNICAL

Agenda

  • Spec update- Kate
  • RDF work group update - Bill
  • Tools repository - Gary/Kate/Bill
  • Licenses: special working session on Friday at 12 CDT

Spec

Formatting difficulties have slowed getting the spec back in the Wiki. That's in process. Kate will add 5.6/5.7.

RDF

Work group is in process defining the ontology. Using knodle site: http://knoodl.com/ui/groups/SPDX/vocab/SPDX(dev-only);jsessionid=16BABC384D81ECF9EC6DC52C93977C3E   

Participating are Bill, Kate, Gary, Peter, Jeff, Ed, Kyle (from Canonical), Pierre. Bruno and Marshall have been monitoring as well. We discussed using DOAP (description of a project) as a way to extend SPDX capability. 

Tools Repository

LF is willing to host Bugzilla (as well as code). No one in the group saw any problem with going ahead. Kate, Bill and Peter are open to input for defining the hierarchy.

License Discussion

We discussed the call (Friday, Sept 24) dedicated to the big picture license discussion. Decoupling versioning from spec versioning, process for including new licenses, list for version 1, etc.

ATTENDANCE

  •   Jack Manbeck, Texas Instruments
  •   Michael Herzog, nexB
  •   Soeren Rabenstein, ASUS
  •   Philippe Ombredanne, nexB Inc.
  •   Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  •   Phil Robb, Hewlett Packard
  •   Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  •   Philip Odence, Black Duck Software
  •   Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  •   Janet Campbell, Eclipse Foundation
  •   Pierre Lapointe, nexB
  •   Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  •   Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  •   Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  •   Mark Gisi, Wind River
  •   Ann Thornton, Freescale
  •   Kate Stewart, Canonical

2010/10/14 Minutes

 

DRAFT

MINUTES

* Approval of minutes from Sept 23
* Outreach and evangelism:
- Industry Venues – PhilR -  no update
- Website – MartinM - no update
* Roll Out Update - KimW
          - Have seen some volunteers, more needed
- Provided summary of Open World Forum talk - good feedback and interest.

* Legal Update - Rockett
- no update

* Licensing Subgroup Update - Kate/KimW
- meeting held on 9/24 with good input and discussions
- we'll be adopting the 1 page per license proposal that Callaway put forward.
- discussion on what should be in initial version of spec, vs. web site.

* RDF Subgroup Update - BillS
- Peter has been working on prototype that lets us encode the specification within the RDF,  approach looks promising.
- working through external vocabularies to see if concept match, and we can leverage.

* Linux Foundation Code Repository - Kate
- got account info from Peter, Gary & Bill - need to forward on to Linux Foundation.



ACTION ITEMS

* Kate- Transfer document (.pdf) back to WIKI. - in porgress
* Kim- Clean up the sharing analysis to what is accurate. - Dave will help out
* JeffL (w/Bill/Gary) - Update zlib based on new specification - Dave is looking at as one of Open Logic examples.
* RDF Group- Work out syntax for 5.6/5.7 - pending
* Kate- Track and implement changes described in Spec from maillist. - pending WIKI updates
* PeterW- Implement issue tracking system with Linux Foundation infrastructure.  - pending Kate communication
* Phil R- Update Industry Events. - pending
* Kate- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and corresponding spreadsheet (or spreadsheet-like) format. - pending.

ATTENDANCE

  •   Tom Incorvia - MicroFocus
  •   Michael Herzog, nexB
  •   Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  •   Janet Campbell, Eclipse Foundation
  •   Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  •   Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  •   Ann Thompson, Freescale
  •   Dave M., Open Logic
  •   Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  •   Kate Stewart, Canonical

2010/10/21 Minutes

DRAFT

Agenda 

  • Attendance - 14
  • Approval of minutes:  9/23 were approved on 10/14;   10/14 still need to be entered and reviewed.
  • Outreach and evangelism:
    • Common Messaging/Presentation – PhilO
      • no update
    • Industry Venues – PhilR
      • no update
    • Website – MartinM
      • website has been running smoothly for while, no missing feature requests recently 
      • SPDX listed in spam databases - working to get spdx removed. 
      • BillS: any issue with posting HTML page?  look to getting subdirectory should be ok
      • ( AI: Bill S to send Martin some examples. )
  •  Legal Update - Rockett
    •   SPDX file contents license - working on draft with Bradley, under creative commons - make sure last person editing absolves the previous person.  Ideal goal is to work with Creative Commons open source license author.
    • Trademark use policy - Karen & Rockett to work on it.  To be reviewed with SPDX work group,  prior to wider publishing (AI: Rockett to mail out trademark policy draft to SPDX list)
    • Trademark processing in progress - looking for response back early November  (AI: Rockett to query status)
    • Second dedicated LF meeting is still to be scheduled,  SPDX cliff notes version needed for (see action item for Kate below), Rockett to announce date.
    • Some concern to make sure that SPDX is cast at appropriate light with Linux Foundation, and is not oversold.
     
  •  Roll Out Update - KimW
    •  no changes on roll out - face to face date still pending
    •  key is how many people can participate, will be discussed tomorrow, and Kim to mail out to wider group the plans.  (AI: Kim to announce F2F plans after discussion)
  •  Licensing Subgroup Update - Jilayne
    • spreadsheet sent out with first list.
    • guidelines created as went along - looking for review and feedback from group.
    • questions came up as looking at it - to be discussed in next licensing meeting.
    • next licensing meeting now scheduled for 11/12 at this time - (AI: Kim to set up invite.)
    • (AI all: please review 6 months mail and contrast against spreadsheet.)
    • Some discussion on headers and decision made to keep the syntax of the text to be language neutral was made.  (ie. C style comments,  Java style, etc. ignored )
    •  For now we'll keep working in spreadsheet, with goal of auto translating it over to the html pages when stabilizes.  (see action for Martin/Bill to look at html pages written directly to WIKI)
  • RDF Subgroup Update - Peter
    • concensus of how code RDF semantics into spec still in discussion.
    • group is at work on adding additional capabilities to licensing part.
    • 5.6/5.7 issue - one proposal adds 5.6 & 5.7 additional properties (name and URL of project file belongs to) - alternate proposal links to DOAP project that encodes the name and URL.   (AI: Peter will write up formal proposal between  the two proposal, and mail out to list. )
    • (AI: All - Next meeting will be voting on it explicitly, those that can't attend, are urged to post feedback/vote to list.)
  • Spec Update - Kate
    •  3.3 - changing field from SHA of tarball to XOR of file level SHAs.  (AI: Kate to write up formal proposal for change of field and mail out to the list.
    • (AI: All - please review and if there are technical flaws open discussion on list, if no flaws figured out,  next meeting will vote on it changing).
    • 5.6/5.7 - discussion of mail list threads - clarification of proposals? (see comments under RDF)
    • no other spec field issues known pending at this time.   Any new suggestions/requests/comments,  please post to list, and add entry into appropriate point in WIKI.
    • (AI: Kate add back to SPEC page in WIKI - prefered syntax for adding comments into SPEC)

 

ACTION ITEMS

  • Kate- Transfer document (.pdf) back to WIKI. DONE
  • Dave - Clean up the WIKI to only have analysis visible that reflects current spec.  IN PROCESS
  • Dave/JeffL - Update zlib based on new specification  IN PROCESS
  • Peter - Mail out competing proposals for 5.6/5.7  IN PROCESS
  • Kate- Track and (when Wiki is back up) implement changes described in Spec section below. DONE (see above)
  • PeterW- Implement issue tracking system.  BLOCKED ON KATE
  • Kate - submit ids to Linux Foundation so infrastructure setup can proceed - pending.
  • Kate- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and corresponding spreadsheet (or spreadsheet-like) format. peinding
  • Kim - list of questions from Open World Forum to form start of FAQ  - pending - will send mail to list with questions remembered,  request Phillipe O, add comments.
  • Phil R - Update Industry Events.
  • Kim/Martin - slides from OWF made available.  Now posted on open world - matin to post to SPDX or link. - DONE
  • Kate - 10/14 minutes to be added to WIKI for review. - IN PROCESS

New  - See notes in above minutes.

NEXT MEETING

  • 2010/01/04 at same time.

 

ATTENDANCE

  •   Tom Incorvia - MicroFocus
  •   Michael Herzog, nexB
  •   Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  •   Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  •   Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  •   Janet Campbell, Eclipse Foundation
  •   Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  •   Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  •   Eric W., Open Logic
  •   Dave M. Open Logic
  •   Jilayne Lovejoy, Open Logic
  •   Martin Michlmyer, HP
  •   Kate Stewart, Canonical
  •   Mark Gisi, Wind River

2010/11/04 Minutes

Minutes

  • Attendance - 13
  • Approval of minutes:  10/14 and 10/21 minutes approved
  • Outreach and evangelism:
    • Common Messaging/Presentation – PhilO
      • no update
    • Industry Venues – PhilR
      • no update
    • Website – MartinM
      • Rearranged so that spec under Specification tab can not be edited with the working version being under Participation
      • Dealt with some legacy spam reputation issues with spdx.org.
  •  Roll Out Update - KimW/JohnE
    • Face to Face pushed out into Dec/Jan
    • Need more volunteers before scheduling
    • Beta program is most urgent item; John is back in action and focusing on that.
  •  Legal Update - Rockett
    • No update.
  • Linux Plumbers report live from Cambridge
    • Well received licensing presentation from Mark Gisi and Sven Dummer included good plug for SPDX
    • Interest from Yahoo! in participation
    • BoF discussion on creating SPDX report for the kernal.

 

Action Items

Note: Drafting related action items are embedded in the Wiki. http://www.spdx.org/wiki/spdx/specification

• Dave - Clean up the WIKI to only have analysis visible that reflects current spec.  ON HOLD FOR MARTIN TO PROVIDE PRIVS; SHOULD BE UNDERWAY

• Dave/JeffL - Update zlib based on new specification  DONE, BUT AWAITING FEEDBACK

• Peter - Mail out competing proposals for 5.6/5.7  DONE

• PeterW- Implement issue tracking system.  BLOCKED ON KATE

• Kate - submit ids to Linux Foundation so infrastructure setup can proceed - PENDING

• Kate- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and corresponding spreadsheet (or spreadsheet-like) format. PENDING

• Kim - list of questions from Open World Forum to form start of FAQ  - pending - will send mail to list with questions remembered,  request Phillipe O, add comments. DONE

• Phil R - Update Industry Events. IN PROCESS

• Kate - 10/14 minutes to be added to WIKI for review. - DONE

• Bill S - Send Martin some examples of issue posting HTML. DONE

• Rockett- Mail out trademark policy draft to SPDX list. WAITING FOR SIGNOFF BY LF

• Rockett- Query status of trademark application TBD

• Kim- Update of plans for Face to Face  DONE

• Kim- Send out invite for next licensing meeting. DONE. WILL INCLUDE FOLKS FROM DEBIAN.

• All- Review 6 months mail and contrast against licensing group spreadsheet. FOR NEXT LICENSE GRP MEETING

• All- If you can't attend meeting, post feedback/vote to list on 5.6/5.7 proposals. FOR TECH AGENDA NXT MTG.

• Kate- Write up formal proposal on SHA field change and mail to list. IN PROCESS

• All- Review SHA field change proposal for technical flaws; if so, discuss on list. FOR TECH AGENDA NXT MEETING

• Kate- Add back to SPEC page in WIKI preferred syntax for adding comments. TBD

 

NEXT MEETING

  • 2010/11/18 at same time. NOTE EURO/US TIME DIFF WILL BE BACK TO NORMAL.

 

ATTENDANCE

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck
  • Tom Incorvia - MicroFocus
  • Esteban Rockett, MotorolA
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Dave M. Open Logic
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, Open Logic
  • Martin Michlmyer, HP
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Ann Thompson, Freescale
  • Gary  O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Phil Robb, HP
  • John Ellis, Motorola
  • Marshall Clow, Qualcomm

 

2010/11/18 Minutes

Minutes

  • Attendance - 14
  • Approval of minutes:  11/4 minutes approved
  • Outreach and evangelism:
    • Common Messaging/Presentation – PhilO
      • no update
    • Industry Venues – PhilR
      • no update
    • Website – MartinM
      • Enhanced as per Organizational Structure discussion below.
  •  Roll Out Update - KimW/JohnE
    • In lieu of Face to Face will start bi-weekly virtually meetings as "Business Team"
    • Critical that we get betas going in Q1. Looking for friendlies and ideally pairs of companies who exchange software in a supply chain. Anyone interested should talk to John E
  •  Legal Update - Rockett
    • No update.
  • SPDX Group Organizational Structure- PhilO
    • Organization has been organically developing into 3 distinct, thought interdependent workstreams
      • Technical, Business and Legal
    • We are evolving the organization into three teams to reflect this.
    • Each team will have it's own place on spdx.org, mailing list, and meetings
    • This meeting will continue as the General Meeting, run by Phil, to coordinate workstreams.
    • Details in attached slides


  • Git Repo - Pete W
    • Peter has set up the Git repository such that
      • It embeds the RDF ontology
      • Can export to HTML or .pdf
      • Handles process for proposing/approving changes
  • RDF - BillS
    • Weekly meeting with Kate, Peter, Gary, Bill.
    • Recommended one of two alternatives for handling file information.
    • Group approved artifactOf proposal
    • Note: This involves referencing a DOAP file, but does not require all fields in complete DOAP file
  • Licensing Team- KimW
    • GPL "or later" issue
    • Group agreed that "or later" licenses need to be handled as separate items in license list.
    • Next item on licensing agenda is to develop a strategy for handling exceptions
    • This work will migrate to the Legal Team

Action Items

Note: Drafting related action items are embedded in the Wiki. http://www.spdx.org/wiki/spdx/specification

• Dave - Clean up the WIKI to only have analysis visible that reflects current spec. DONE

• Dave/JeffL - Update zlib based on new specification  DONE, BUT AWAITING FEEDBACK FROM GARY

• PeterW- Implement issue tracking system.  BLOCKED ON KATE

• Kate - submit ids to Linux Foundation so infrastructure setup can proceed - PENDING

• Kate- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and corresponding spreadsheet (or spreadsheet-like) format. PENDING

• Phil R - Update Industry Events. DONE

• Rockett- Mail out trademark policy draft to SPDX list. DONE. 

• Rockett- Query status of trademark application DONE. APPLICATION IS IN AN WAITING FOR ASSIGNMENT OF A TM EXAMINER

• All- Review 6 months mail and contrast against licensing group spreadsheet. FOR NEXT LICENSE GRP MEETING

• All- If you can't attend meeting, post feedback/vote to list on 5.6/5.7 proposals. DONE

• Kate- Write up formal proposal on SHA field change and mail to list. IN PROCESS

• All- Review SHA field change proposal for technical flaws; if so, discuss on list. FOR TECH AGENDA NXT MEETING

• Kate- Add back to SPEC page in WIKI preferred syntax for adding comments. TO BE DONE

• Michael H- Write up and share position on "reporting" vs. "interpreting."

• PhilO- Get legal team input on Michael's position.

 

NEXT MEETING

  • 2010/12/2 at same time. 

 

ATTENDANCE

  •   Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  •   Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  •   Marshall Clow, Qualcomm
  •   John Ellis, Motorola
  •   Eric Weidner - OpenLogic
  •   Tom Incorvia, MicroFocus
  •   Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  •   Michael Herzog, nexB
  •   Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  •   Martin Michlmayr, HP
  •   Kate Stewart, Canonical
  •   Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  •   Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  •   Philip Odence, Black Duck Software

2010/12/02 General Meeting Minutes

Administrative

  • Attendance - 14
  • Minutes from 18 Nov meeting approved

Technical Team Report

  • Working through RDF issues to make sure consistent with tagged version.
  • Proposals floating around on the technical mailing list.
  • Regular meetings on Tuesdays.
  • Need more folks to migrate to technical mailing list.

Business Team Report

  • Regular meetings are on the schedule. Same day/time as General Meeting on alternate weeks.
  • Kim has posted slides overviewing roll out issues with initial ideas. 
  • A working draft wiki for FAQs has been started. Looking for as much input at possible. 

Legal Team Report

  • Regular meetings will be the day before General Meeting. 
  • First scheduled for 15 Dec (and will be longer than normal).
  • Invitations going out to general SPDX list, Linux Found Member Counsel list, and Project Harmony
  • Items for first meeting:
    • Handing off work from License Team
    • Addressing any questions from LF Member Counsel
    • Setting going-forward agenda for Team
  • License Team meeting for 3 Dec is still on.

Cross Functional Issues

  • Agenda for this meeting seems to work fine. Meeting schedule may go to 30 mins.
  • Need folks to migrate to respective mailing lists. 
    • Current lists, Technical- 8, Business- 6, Legal- 7

Action Items

  • Kate- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and spreadsheet. PENDING
  • Kate- Add back to Spec page in wiki preferred syntax for adding comments. PENDING
  • MichaelH- Write up and share postion on "reporting" vs. "interpreting. NO UPDATE
  • PhilO- Get input on MH position from Legal Team and get resolution.
  • GaryO- Post regular meeting times on Tech Team page.
  • Rockett- Post regular meeting times on Legal Team page.
  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists.

Attendees

  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  • Tom Incorvia, MicroFocus
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Dave McLoughlin, OpenLogic
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Ann Thornton, Freescale
  • John Ellis, Motorola
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola

2010/12/16 General Meeting Minutes

 

Administrative

  • Attendance - 12
  • Minutes from 2 Dec meeting approved

Technical Team Report

  • Still going back and forth on grammar and syntax, resolving RDF and tag value
  • Various proposals will be circulating
  • Next priority is defining a license template

Business Team Report

  • Beta program starting up. Aiming to start late Q1 and wrap in late Q2
  • Some tooling needs to be in place prior to make it easier to generate syntactically correct RDF as well as to create human readable format. Gary's 'pretty printer' is a good starting point
  • Ideally seeking pairs of supply chain partners for beta. Motorola and HP are interested. Maybe Fedora.
  • Ping KimW if interested or with ideas

Legal Team Report

  • Kicked of regular meetings.
  • First Meeting: successfully bridging from licensing sub-team to new Legal Team. Good discussion about handling GPL3 exceptions. Also about rev'ing license list. And what is "required" for valid SPDX
  • Much discussion about license list. Conclusion as that we should add a field to SPDX that specifies the version of the license list used to generate the file. The version number for the list will be date based.  

Cross Functional Issues

  • Collaboration Summit. April 6-8, San Francisco
    • Will be a compliance track on Thursday morning, the 7th including SPDX presentation
    • Tech Team will meet Thursday afternoon; Business Team, Friday morning
    • Legal Team may meet at Euro event or may try a teleconference
  • Need folks to migrate to respective mailing lists. 
    • Current lists, Technical- 10 (up 2), Business- 7 (up 1), Legal- 12 (up 5)

Action Items

  • Kate/Kim- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and spreadsheet. PENDING
  • Kate- Add back to Spec page in wiki preferred syntax for adding comments. DONE
  • MichaelH/Rockett- Write up and share postion on "reporting" vs. "interpreting. PENDING
  • GaryO- Post regular meeting times on Tech Team page. DONE
  • Rockett- Post regular meeting times on Legal Team page. PENDING
  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. DONE, BUT LET'S KEEP UPDATING 

Attendees

  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Michael Herzog, nexB
  • Pierre Lapointe, nexB

 

2011-08-11 General Meeting Minutes

Attendance: 16+

NOTE: I believe many folks joined whose names I did not capture. Let me know if your name is not here, and I'll be happy to add it.

   
Technical Team Report - Kate

  • New draft of spec posted as of 8/10; no field changes, just editorial
  • Open issue on data license; need agreement between spec and RDF
  • Deadline for feedback by early am 8/15
  • Tools updated
  • New example available

Business Team Report - Kim

  • GA
    • Press release shaping up; Kim reviewed list of names to be included
    • JimZ will mention in Keynote, Phil O. & Esteban R. have speaking slot
    • BOF session not yet on website; Thursday, 8/18 at 5:15 pm
    • SPDX booth staffing in progress; John Ellis working schedule; 1 pg handout will be available
  • SPDX Website update
    • Don't believe we'll be ready to cutover from sandbox to live site in time for launch
    • Kim will update Home page on live site in prep for launch
    • Kate will ensure spec is up to date on live site
  • FAQs
    • Asked all volunteers to get their contributions in by end of day Tuesday

Legal Team Report - Rockett

  • Circulated draft of revised trademark & compliance statements
    • Deep discussion on this topic resulted in additional proposed changes
    • "Policing" policy concerns raised; recommendation is to follow LF policy of community notification
    • Concerns about requiring attribution/compliance statement inside SPDX file requiring change to spec
    • Decided that no attribution statement will be included in SPDX file at this time; we will revisit post 1.0 GA
    • Rockett has the action item to send final wording to Kate
  • Data license discussion
    • Some team members concerned that use of PDDL, even with language about side-agreement re confidentially may affect adoption of spec by those who are working with packages that contain proprietary code
    • Other team members believe that allowing data licenses other than PDDL will affect adoption by open source community
    • Noted that Karen Copenhaver discussed this use with the author of PDDL and we have agreement that this use is compliant with intent of license; current wording provided by Karen C. after review with author
    • Decided that v1.0 will stipulate PDDL as only license for data

Open Action Items

  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. ONGOING
  • Kim -- share Biz Team proposed process for adding licenses to SPDX list more broadly
  • Michael H. -- Posting BOM info

Attendees

  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Kamak Hassin, Protecode
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Peter Williams, Open Logic
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Adam , Cisco
  • Mark Gisi, Wind River
  • Branden Robinson, Cisco
  • Jack Manbeck, TI
  • Steve Cropper, Cisco

2011/02/10 General Meeting Minutes

 

2011/2/10 General Meeting Minutes

Administrative

  • Attendance - 13
  • Minutes from 27 Jan meeting approved

Technical Team Report

  • Gary/Peter created punchlist of key issues that need to be addressed before beta.
    • Finalize RDF/XML
    • Clean up Grammer
    • Mesh spreadsheet license list, on-line list and RDF
  • Kate drafted spreadsheet view of SPDX file which Gary is using as basis for translation tools. Will circulate.
  • Seem to be on schedule genearlly

Business Team Report

  • Beta program
    • Good briefing meeting with 4 candidates. Following up wth two more.
    • Need coordinator volunteers
  • Starting to address need for end user content developed (doc, training, etc.).
  • Next issue in the queue is defining the process to add a license to the standard list.

Legal Team Report

  • Section 5.3 revision is mostly settled. Some final tweaking of field names was the last issue.
  • Karen and Rockett are updating LF Member Counsel with the message "it's time" to pay attention and weigh in.
  • In process of making recommendations for default license for SPDX data in a file and for SPDX tool licensing.

Cross Functional Issues

  • Tech and Biz teams will meet face to face at Linux Collab Summit (Tech pm 4/7, Biz am 4/8)
  • Agreed that SPDX general list should not be for extended discussions, which should be directed to respective team lists.

Action Items

  • Kate/Kim- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and spreadsheet. PENDING
  • MichaelH/Rockett- Write up and share postion on "reporting" vs. "interpreting. PENDING
  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. DONE, BUT LET'S KEEP UPDATING
  • Kim/Kate- Provide PhilK with paragraph descriptions of Collab Summit sessions by 2/17

 

Attendees

  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Michael Herzog, nexB
  • Pierre Lapointe, nexB
  • Mark Gisi, Wind River
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Karen Copenhaver, Linux Foundation

 

2011/02/24 General Meeting Minutes

 
Administrative Agenda

    Attendance: 9
    Minutes from http://www.spdx.org/wiki/2011210-general-meeting-minutes - approved


Technical Team Report - Kate

Mid March is now target for spreadsheet in draft form, with spec that correlates to spreadsheet.  

  • license spreadsheet - hooking up with legal team (Jilayne, Rockett, Soren - needs work)
  • templatizing of license and headers - will go with copy of main text directly as backup position, will work with legal team to get guidelines for automated translation to templatized version. 


Business Team Report - Kim

  • current focus on nailing down beta sites.  3- trading partner groups committed, handful of other on investigation list
  • will have beta coordinator assigned to each trading group;  for facilitation and working with beta partner,  need technical and support help to work through beta coords.  ( content for FAQ, etc. )  
  • Will need to do technical training?- Kristen will work on tools
    • AI tech team:  drafts of spreadsheet, and spec by March 17th.  
    • AI tech team: Need Technical Training volunteers
  • Face to face meeting at Collab will focus on see where things are with Beta;  talk about roll out - 4 months away.    
  • AI: Kim to document - coodinator volunteers associated with beta sites listed.   


Legal Team Report - Rockett

  • meeting schedule has shifted meeting from 2/23 to 3/2.  Resume normal bi-weekly on on 3/9.
  • finalized section 5.3 - how ones concludes the license.   Last revision from the call documented in Legal team minutes
  • license template would like to move from having to copy text as default for templatized version of license
  • license list candidates -  please let Jilayne know if there's input before next Wednesday
  • Linux Foundation Legal Counsels meeting went smoothly,  no issues raised.
  • Jilayne and Rockett - attending European Legal Conference, on panels;   looking for input from prior presentations, and will Kate/Kim prior to meeting.

 


Other

  • IFOSSLR article came out  
  • RDF format,  no one is opposed to its inclusion.  Also desire to keep XML as readable as possible, maybe look at HTML 5 as a varient of output.   Need to contact Scott Lehman at HP,  FOSSology.   



Cross Functional Issues – Kate (for Phil)

  •     Collaboration Summit  - Phil Kolton, Phil Odence, Kate Stewart, ??
    • Tech meeting Thursday afternoon
    • Business meeting Friday, 
    • 1/2 day track on legal related issues Thursday morning
    • anyone needing invite, please work with Phil Kolton,  who else planning to attend?
  •     European Legal Conf - Scott Peterson, Rockett, Jilyane, Karen C. 
    • who else there,  make sense for separate meeting?
  •     OSBC - May
    • Kim reported Mark Radcliff will talk there,  may mention SPDX as part of this.
  •     OSCON - anything about SPDX?   maybe look at targetting? 
    • AI:  Business team to follow up?
  •     CFP for Linux Foundation - LinuxCon north america  - getting ready for launch.
    • AI: need to get proposals put together


Action Items

Most of the action items belong with the Teams. So, in addition to statusing, we will dispatch them to the respective teams and will not continue to track in this meeting. Action items for this meeting will be cross functional.

• Kate/Kim- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and spreadsheet. PENDING

  • Beta collateral - March 17th.   


• MichaelH/Rockett- Write up and share postion on "reporting" vs. "interpreting. PENDING

  • converged on section 5.3;   so can declare it done,  will make sure that revised 5.3 can resolve with Michael offline.


• MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. DONE, BUT LET'S KEEP UPDATING

  •   Business 11 -> 15;   Legal 17->21  ;  Tech 16->20


• Kim/Kate- Provide PhilK with paragraph descriptions of Collab Summit sessions by 2/17  

  •    DONE


New Actions:

We need to capture a list of who will be at face to face meeting - each of the work groups to

  • AI:  create signup on WIKI,  adverstise in subgroups, and on these minutes/list.

 

Attendees

  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP

 

2011/03/11 General Meeting Minutes

Administrative Agenda

    Attendance: 11
    Minutes from http://www.spdx.org/wiki/2011224-general-meeting-minutes - acceptance deferred

Technical Team Report - Kate

Still working through RDF issues/model and spreadsheet to resolve naming, and with a focus on:

  • licensing substructure; team plans to post a proposal for general review
  • templatizing of license and headers to support legal team; guidelines are available on the legal team wiki

Business Team Report 

Kim was traveling. No update from Business Team at this time. 

Legal Team Report - Rockett

  • license templatizing: 75% of the way through on proposal for normalization of non-significant variants. Goal is to have proposal ready by March 23rd. 
  • granular discussion of metadata is on-going. No conclusions yet. Karen and Rockett will make a proposal; date for proposal TBD.
  • Concluded: any tools coming out of the SPDX project will be licensed under Apache 2.0 and SPDX will recommend Apache 2.0 for 3rd party FOSS tools for this project. Gary will update the tools he's writing to use the Apache 2.0 license.  

Cross Functional Issues – Kate (for Phil)

  •     Collaboration Summit  - Phil Kolton, Phil Odence, Kate Stewart, ??
    • Agenda has been posted: http://events.linuxfoundation.org/events/collaboration-summit/schedule
      • Tech meeting Thursday afternoon
      • Business meeting Friday, 
      • 1/2 day track on legal related issues Thursday morning
    • anyone planning to attend should request an invite via the Linux Collaboration web site. (see link above)
    • Phil O. will set up wiki page to help us track those planning to attend
  •     European Legal Conf - Scott Peterson, Rockett, Jilyane, Karen C. 
    • legal team is planning a panel presentation with spdx description and open session for questions
    • Karen suggested it would be helpful to have beta participants in audience
    • Karen also recommended that the description include broader context about why the SPDX standard is needed  and its goals
    • Consider conference to be a mini-launch of SPDX spec. Karen will work with Kim to get press release announcing beta
  •     CFP for Linux Foundation - LinuxCon north america  - getting ready for launch.
    • Phil Koulton to provide deadline info for call for papers

Action Items

Most of the action items belong with the Teams. So, in addition to statusing, we will dispatch them to the respective teams and will not continue to track in this meeting. Action items for this meeting will be cross functional.

• Kate/Kim- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and spreadsheet. PENDING

  • Beta collateral - March 17th.   

• MichaelH/Rockett- Write up and share postion on "reporting" vs. "interpreting. CLOSED

  • converged on section 5.3;   Update available in legal team minutes

• MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. DONE, BUT LET'S KEEP UPDATING

  •   Business 11 -> 15;   Legal 17->21  ;  Tech 16->20

Phil O. - Capture a list of who will be at face to face meeting - PENDING

  • create signup on WIKI for LinuxCollabSummit attendees,  adverstise in subgroups, and on these minutes/list.

Attendees

  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Jillayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Karen Copenhaver, LF/Choate
  • Michael Herzog, NexB

 

2011/03/24 General Meeting Minutes

 

Administrative Agenda

    Attendance: 15
    Minutes accepted http://www.spdx.org/wiki/20110224-general-meeting-minutes

 http://www.spdx.org/wiki/20110311-general-meeting-minutes

Technical Team Report - Kate

After a great deal of effort, the team has converged on a consistent set of field names which will by synch'ed with all forms of spec shortly.

There are still a couple of areas of open issues which are dependent on the Legal Team, most having to do with who created the SPDX file.

Kate will be starting up a wiki page with an agenda for the upcoming Face to Face; participants should feel free to provide input.

Business Team Report - Phil

Beta training materials are not complete, but are in motion and should be fine for beta.

In the last meeting there was a lot of discussion about a process for requesting/evaluating/adding new licenses to the standard list. See last Business Team meeting's minutes for details.

Legal Team Report - Rockett

SPDX Tool/Template Licensing- Done, we'll be using Apache 2.0

Metadata Licensing

  • Stil active discussion delving in aspects of:
    • Confidentiality
    • Trace ability and change logging
    • Copyright
  • Rockett and Kate are having an offline discussion to pull it all together.

Templatizing (defining what insubstantial variants are OK for a match to a standard license)

  • Proposal being reviewed within Legal Team
  • Ready for presentation to other teams in the next 1-2 months

 

Cross Functional Issues – Phil

 Collaboration Summit 

Discussion about how to handle "Newbee" question that come in on lists 

  • Asking Business Team to take on providing guidelines to other teams and general 
  • General feeling that we need a process to
    • Respond in 24 hours
    • Provide answers that are consistent with "party line" but at the same time helpful
    • Ensure that good questions / answers get captured in FAQ

Action Items

Most of the action items belong with the Teams. So, in addition to statusing, we will dispatch them to the respective teams and will not continue to track in this meeting. Action items for this meeting will be cross functional.

• Kate- Beta collateral: Examples in XML and spreadsheet form. PENDING 

• MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. ONGOING

  •  
    • spdx: 98
    • spdz-biz: 17
    • spdx-legal: 23
    • spdx-tech: 21

Phil O. - Capture a list of who will be at face to face meeting - DONE

Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Jillayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Karen Copenhaver, LF/Choate
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Pierre Lapointe, NexB
  • Kamal Hassin, Protecode
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, Open Logic
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software

 

2011/04/21 General Meeting Minutes

SPDX General Meeting minutes from 4/21/2011

Attendance: 10

Minutes accepted 

http://www.spdx.org/wiki/20110324-general-meeting-minutes

Technical Team Report - Kate

Team is recovering from specification review held at the Linux Collaboration Summit face-to-face meeting.

An initial revised draft (PDF) incorporating first round of feedback, dated 20110411, is posted here: http://spdx.org/wiki/spdx/specification

Team is working through discrepancies and adding examples for RDF

It's still possible to have the tools complete (alpha quality) by the end of April, or within one week of beta spec being finalized.

Requested feedback from legal team on web page location (URI) for special terms such as UNDETERMINED.

  • Previously specified: the URI for these terms points to entries on on the spdx.org/licenses web page
  • New proposal: the URL for these terms points to appropriate Terms page on the spdx.org web page. Reasoning: These special terms are used for data fields for License, Copyright, and Project download/homepage URIs. Since the terms are not specific to licenses, it seems more appropriate to post the definitions for these terms on a terminology web page rather than the spdx.org/licenses web page.

Business Team Report - Kim

Coordinators have been identified for the 3 beta pairs. Kick off calls planned for early May (likely 2nd week).

Training materials in progress and will be finalized once beta spec is final.

Three new discussion/action threads were identified at the Linux Collaboration Summit face-to-face

  • connect with yocto project and possibly other build tools for potential integration
  • outreach to additional open source communities
  • review/update SPDX website for ease-of-use by newly members, beta participants and casual users

Legal Team Report - Rockett

2 active discussions continue: metadata licensing and how to handle id'ing author/reviewer

Metadata Licensing: Stil active discussion delving in aspects of:

  • Confidentiality
    • when exchanged between two parties
    • when made public (how to avoid copyright issues)

How to handle id'ing authors/reviewers 

  • There is value in this data
  •  Pedigree data creates concerns 
  • Making author/reviewing anonymous creates trust issues

Related: Trying to determine beta approach for audit / revision history

  • Change log has been proposed but there are timing and complexity questions
  • Working to put together straw man
  • Team considers this is not required for beta but would like input from beta participants
  • This becomes more important as supply chain expands beyond two

 

Action Items

Most of the action items belong with the Teams. So, in addition to statusing, we will dispatch them to the respective teams and will not continue to track in this meeting. Action items for this meeting will be cross functional.

  • Kate- Beta collateral: Examples in XML and spreadsheet form. PENDING 
  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. ONGOING
  • spdx: 98
  • spdz-biz: 17
  • spdx-legal: 23
  • spdx-tech: 21

Attendees

  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Jillayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Kamal Hassin, Protecode
  • Peter Wiliams, OpenLogic
  • Richard Faulk, Black Duck

2011/05/05 General Meeting Minutes

Administrative Agenda

    Attendance: 15
    Minutes accepted 

Technical Team Report - Bill

Good Progress

One specific blocking item/for spec and tools. The issue is has to do with set of terms to describe situation where a concluded license is not named. Team had been working with terms such as: None, No Assertion, Not Analyzed, Blank. They are working on a final proposal but are leaning towards two values one indcating that there has been a conclusion that there is no license and one indicating that there is no conclusion one way or the other.

Team is asking for some ratification from the legal team, but proceeding on the two value path.

 

Business Team Report - Kim

Beta kickoffs are scheduled.

Final field names are getting merged into the training and tool docs by Kim and Kirsten resepctively. 

 

Legal Team Report - Rockett

Metadata licensing issue still under discussion

Team is reviewing the need for including change tracking of SPDX docs in the spec. This will not hold up the beta. There was a discussion about how major a requirement this would be, i.e. would it necessarily hold up V1.0 past LinuxCon in August. The general sense from members of the Tech Team (which has been contemplating the issue) was that it would not by itself.

 

Cross Functional Issues – Phil

Website: A workign group of Kirsten, Pierre and Steve have been reviewing the website for usability. They are recommending the "three big buttons" approach to the home page for folks who are:

  • New to SPDX and want to get up to speed
  • Familar and looking for official information on the spec and how to use
  • Interested in participating in development of the spec

Their other major recommendation was to have drop down menus to give more visibility into the various sections of the website from the home page.

There was lots of spirited discussion and opinions, but general agreement on the direction.

The team will be developing and circulating mockups for subsequent feedback.


Action Items

• MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. ONGOING

    • spdx: 98
    • spdz-biz: 17
    • spdx-legal: 23
    • spdx-tech: 21

Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Jillayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Pierre Lapointe, NexB
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, Open Logic
  • Peter Williams, Open Logic
  • Mark Gisi, Wind River
  • Steve Cropper, Cisco

2011/05/19 General Meeting Minutes

 

Administrative Agenda

    Attendance: 14
    Minutes accepted 

Technical Team Report - Kate

New version up with RDF vocabulary appendix. Please review

Tools are keeping up. Only one known oustanding issue at this point.

 

Legal Team Report - Rockett

License State Discussion

  • Centers on states for undetermined Discovered licenses: "None" and "No Assertion"
  • Several calls
  • All seem to be aligned

Going through latest spec versionLicensing of Metadata

  • Concluded that an existing license is a little too long but OK for purpose
  • Will circle back once more but will likely approve

 

Business Team Report

Abreviated as Kim was unavailable

 

Cross Functional Issues – Phil

Brief statuse on website. Team is working on a story board

OSBC report- No formal presentation, but mentioned on a panel with very positive reception


Action Items

  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. ONGOING

New

  • Kirsten- Notify Kim of need to clean up business section of website.
  • MartinM- Get master list of website pages to Kate
  • Legal/Biz Teams- Review and update Master Schedule

Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Pierre Lapointe, NexB
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  • Scott Lamons, HP
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Victoria Mah, Cisco
  • Brandon Robinson, Cisco

2011/06/02 General Meeting Minutes

Attendance: 13
Minutes for 20110519 approved
    
Technical Team Report - Gary

  • Tools: have received good feedback; addressed a few technical issues; available for beta use
  • Spec: final polishing has been largely completed; waiting for one more review from legal which is expected by Friday am PT

Business Team Report - Kim

  • 3 beta teams are working; target for beta completion & feedback is end of June; request that all teams work toward this date
    • HP/WindRiver & OL/Antelink are in progress
    • Kickoff for Motorola/TI still to be scheduled, but there's been activity. Rockett will work with Gary to get kickoff scheduled
  • Website refresh subteam has been created. Details on this working group can be found here:
  • GA launch process is next big thing to focus on
    • Planned for LinuxCon in Vancouver
    • Phil O. has a speaking slot
    • Goal include press release and mention in keynote

Legal Team Report - Rockett

  • Last scrub on 5/16 spec in progress. Final comments due by Friday am PT time, 6/3
  • Recommend Open Data Commons PDDL license for SPDX MetaData (http://www.opendatacommons.org/licenses/pddl/); will send link to broader group for final sign-off
  • License templatizing is the next big focus
  • Also noted that we'll need a process for adding licenses to SPDX list very soon; Kim says Biz Team has a proposal for a process and she'll plan to share more broadly

Cross Functional Issues – Discussion

  • Website update- Steve
    • Sandbox for testing new website structure in place
    • Team plans to create storyboards for 3-4 personas using mind map tools
    • wiki pages for working grou now available http://spdx.org/wiki/website-refresh
  • Questions/recommendations for presenting data for binaries and archives such as jar files -- Kim
    • There's been recent email about how to represent data for binaries that are combinations of OSS, 3rd party, and proprietary code in SPDX documents
    • Issue has also come up for OL/Antelink beta partners; OL/Antelink have decided to use compound licensing for jar files when needed; should we recommend the same approach for binaries?
    • There was a lively discussion on this topic with input from Steve Cropper, Kim Weins, Michael Herzog, Kate Stewart
    • Main conclusion: Recommendations for how to handle these use cases need to be added to the draft FAQ
      • Draft FAQ is available here: http://spdx.org/wiki/draft-spdx-faq
      • FAQ should address questions about proprietary and 3rd party as well as OSS licenses
      • Kim added a number of topics to the FAQ; need volunteers to provide additional info on these topics
    • A side issue regarding how best to connect package and SPDX document was also discussed
    • The topic of package hierarchy also came up
      • Michael H. noted that the SPDX team made a conscious choice not to tackle this for v1 of the specification
      • v1 spec is intended to address lower level or sub-assembly items and a BOM is not yet represented in the spec
      • Recommended that a section on items specifically deferred be added to the FAQ so that new users have visibility into these decisions
      • Michael also volunteered to pull together info on well traveled routes for BOMs that we might want to leverage   


Open Action Items

  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. ONGOING
  • Kim -- share Biz Team proposed process for adding licenses to SPDX list more broadly
  • Michael H. -- provide info on existing BOM standards that should be useful for future consideration
  • Legal/Biz Teams- Review and update Master Schedule
  • ?? -- volunteers needed to review and update the FAQ: http://spdx.org/wiki/draft-spdx-faq

Closed Action Items

  • Kirsten- Notify Kim of need to clean up business section of website.
  • MartinM- Get master list of website pages to Kate

Attendees

  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Kamal Hassin, Protecode
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Jillayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Brandon Robinson, Cisco
  • Steve Cropper, Cisco
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus

2011/06/16 General Meeting Minutes

Attendance: 11
Minutes for 20110602 approved
    
Technical Team Report - Kate

  • Tools: Updating tools as needed
  • Spec: Working minor changes to June 5 version of the spec
  • Spec: Have had interesting discussions with Cisco about mapping SPDX to their current process. Expect that new fields and possibly new models will come out of this discussion
  • Beta feedback: Looking for place to collect/present feedback. Would like to be sure we capture feedback even for items we've resolved. Kim plans to create wiki page.

Business Team Report - Kim

  • Beta program:
    • HP/WindRiver & OL/Antelink continue to make progress
    • Motorola/TI progress is not yet clear
    • There's been some confusion over license fields at package level. A wiki discussion on this topic can be found here: http://spdx.org/wiki/license-field-discussion
  • GA Launch:
    • Continue to work to get ready for launch at LinuxCon NA in mid-August

Legal Team Report - In absentia

  • All legal team members are at a separate face-to-face meeting and unable to attend this meeting

Cross Functional Issues – Discussion

  • Website update- Kirsten
    • Working on mind-maps for proposed flow; plan to present more generally in next few weeks
    • Logistical question from Kim: should we remove or archive older content?
      • Both options are available; deleting won't create orphaned pages
      • Will likely decide on case-by-case basis
  • Package License fields - Postponed until next meeting since legal team not present this week

Open Action Items

  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. ONGOING
  • Kim -- share Biz Team proposed process for adding licenses to SPDX list more broadly
  • Michael H. -- provide info on existing BOM standards that should be useful for future consideration
  • Legal/Biz Teams- Review and update Master Schedule
  • ?? -- volunteers needed to review and update the FAQ: http://spdx.org/wiki/draft-spdx-faq

Attendees

  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Brandon Robinson, Cisco
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Juergen Weigert, SuSE

2011/1/13 General Meeting Minutes

Administrative

  • Attendance - 13
  • Minutes from 16 Dec meeting approved

Technical Team Report

  • New Infrastructure is up and running
    • Bugzilla is in place. (use will be broad including tracking issues with documentation and the website for example) All are encouraged to set up accounts.
    • GIT repository- Gary's pretty printer and the RDF version are up already. 
  • DEP-5 proposal is in draft state. if we want to sync with them in any way, the time is right. They are open, for example to using the same license short names. We'll assess current gaps and then decide how to proceed.
  • The spdx-tech mailing list is very active; interested parties are encouraged to join.
  • Started on the grammar for the tag version to facilitate the comprehension of it for the RDF/tag form translation.

Business Team Report

  • Beta program
    • Progressing
    • 5 organizations are interested. (WindRiver/HP have agreed to work together)
    • Kickoff meeting with participants Feb3 during the normal Biz Team.
  • Next big issue to deal with is getting end user content developed (doc, training, etc.).

Legal Team Report

  • Task of developing a process for adding new licenses to the license list has been handed off to Biz Team.
  • Rockett/Jilayne and Soren working on the license template scheme.
  • Team has been discussing how the spec will influence the way in which the content of SPDX docs is licensed. Team is leaning towards MIT/BSD. 

Cross Functional Issues

  • Much discussion on the issue of subjectivity v. objectivity with respect to file licenses.
  • Example- License A text in header, but author of SPDX doc believes actually License B.
  • Several in the discussion were adamant that the stated license in the file needed to be specified.
  • Others felt it was important to include the license author's believed correct license.
  • Group came to broad agreement on the idea of including fields for both and a comments field to explain discrepancies.
  • Discussion to be continued in ad hoc Legal Team meeting tomorrow.

Action Items

  • Kate/Kim- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and spreadsheet. PENDING
  • MichaelH/Rockett- Write up and share postion on "reporting" vs. "interpreting. PENDING
  • Rockett- Post regular meeting times on Legal Team page.  DONE
  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. DONE, BUT LET'S KEEP UPDATING
  • Jilayne- Add column to license list showing DEP-5 short names for comparison.
  •  

Attendees

  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Michael Herzog, nexB
  • Pierre Lapointe, nexB
  • Mark Gisi, Wind River
  • Jack Manbeck, TI
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus

 

2011/1/27 General Meeting Minutes

 

Administrative

  • Attendance - 9
  • Minutes from 13 Jan meeting approved

Technical Team Report

  • Met Tuesday with Kate joining from Australia
  • Most of the discussion was about new license fields in file section of spec

Business Team Report

  • Questions for Tech Team on how the schedule looks. Generally good for end of Q1 completion of what's required for beta, albeit Kate was not here to weigh in.
  • Beta program
    • Kickoff meeting with participants Feb3 during the normal Biz Team. Feel free to participate or invite anyone interested.
    • There will be subsequent meetings with partner pairs
    • Should be ready to go in April

Legal Team Report (From PhilO/Jilayne in Rockett's absence)

  • Recent focus has been on new fields for file licenses:
    • Concluded License- Based on author's analysis
    • License Information in File- Just what's in the file
    • Also a field for explanation of basis for conclusion
  • We will change a handful of license short names for consistency with DEP-5 list

Cross Functional Issues

  • PhilO explained new Master Schedule under General Meeting

Action Items

  • Kate/Kim- Draft example for LF Member Counsel; include XML and spreadsheet. PENDING
  • MichaelH/Rockett- Write up and share postion on "reporting" vs. "interpreting. PENDING
  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. DONE, BUT LET'S KEEP UPDATING
  • Jilayne- Add column to license list showing Deb5 short names for comparison. DONE
  •  

Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Mark Gisi, Wind River
  • Guillaume Rousseau, Antelink
  • Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software

 

2011/12/1 General Meeting Minutes

Attendance: 7

     
Technical Team Report - Kate

  • Bugzilla, the final piece of downed infrastracture up, so we are finally fully functional
  • Tech team has been meeting regularly thru the outtage. 
  • Minutes have been distributed through the mailing list and will be posted
  • Shortly a new draft will be available, either "1.1" or "1.0.1"
  • EdW is still working on a proposal for handling hierarchy which will be the basis for SPDX 2.0.
  • There have been some good recent contributions to the SPDX tools including a new verification tool

Business Team Report - Michael Herzog (in Kim's absence)

  • Most of the recent discussion has been on our infrastructure plan in the wake of the outtage.
  • No update on new website.

Legal Team Report - Jilayne (in Rockett's absence)

  • Data license issue
    • Seems to be resolved to everyone's satisfaction.
    • Rockett drafted a pre-amble to the CC0 license and got support from Eben Moglen.
  • Next Steps
    • Templatizing work is resuming in the next Legal Team call.
    • Jilayne is resuming some clean-up on the license list

Cross Functional Issues – Phil

  • Infrastructure
    • Discussed the LF's infrastructure issue. Phil's opinion is that the new infrastructure meets our needs
    • In the next couple weeks there will be a meeting with folks from the Linux Foundation in which they will present an overview what's been done, the idea being to make us comfortable.
    • We don't want to group to be overly large, but if anyone is interested in participating, email Phil.

Open Action Items

Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Michael Herzog, nexB
  • Pierre Lapointe, nexB
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Brandon Robinson, Cisco

2011/12/15 General Meeting Minutes

Attendance: 12

Dec1 Minutes Approved

     
Technical Team Report - Kate

  • Hierarchy is the focus; trade off is backward compatibility
  • Aiming for August 2.0 with hierarchy being the big change.
  • 1.1 targeted for Q1
    • CC0 License and preamble
    • Updated verification algorithm
    • Bug fixes
  • Cleanup in process on current website

Business Team Report - Kim

  • New Website
    • Sandbox is ready for updating as of next Monday
    • Need voluteers for migrating/adding content to some sections (see SPDX.org for sections that need help); contact Kim
    • Pierre will send out instructions by Monday
  • Kim updating list of conferences for next year; looking for presenters to keep spreading the SPDX word
  • Anticipating Face to Face Meetings at:
    • Collaboration Summit, April 3-5 in San Francisco
    • LinuxCon NA, Aug 29-31, San Diego

Legal Team Report - Adam/Jilayne (in Rockett's absence)

  • License preamble is ready to run by anyone who was uncomfortable (like Fedora folks)
  • Still open for tweaks
  • Templatizing will commence after the first of the year

Cross Functional Issues – Phil

Open Action Items

Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Michael Herzog, nexB
  • Pierre Lapointe, nexB
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Brandon Robinson, Cisco
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Mark Gisi, Wind River
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Tom Incorvia, MicroFocus
  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software

2011/6/30 General Meeting Minutes

 

Attendance: 12
Minutes for 20110616 approved
     
Technical Team Report - Kate

  • Tools- some issues have arisen in beta, but are being rapidly resolved
  • New spec and tool versions due next week
  • FAQs need work- all pls review

Business Team Report - Kim

  • Extended biz meeting on July 7 to focus on beta fb and website. All invited
    • Aim is to ID only showstopper items
  • GA Launch:
    • Stake in ground for mid-August
    • Press release- to include endorsements
    • Phil has speaking slot, JimZ should mention in Keynote, Table/Booth of some sort

Legal Team Report - Rockett

  • Maximizing adoption is the filter for all decisions
  • Key current issue: Creator/Reviewer fields
    • Some Member Counsel are concerned about having files wrongly attributed to companies
    • Team is working to understand and address concerns
    • But don't want to casually drop fields that may be valuable to others
  • Question about rules for resolving- Concensus is ideal

Cross Functional Issues – Discussion

  • Approach to convergence on V1.0
    • Still open legal/biz issues. 
    • Driving for resolution by end of July
    • Identify showstoppers in beta meeting and ID owners to sheppard resolution of each
    • Clean up spec and finaliz by 8/12, prior to 8/17 launch 
  • Website
    • Shifted from mockups to mindmap
    • To be presented at meeting on 7th
    • Volunteers needed for sandbox
  • BOM formats MichaelH
    • Real BOMs can be very complex with unlimited depth and width
    • Hierarchy is key
    • There are two well-known existing models
      • ERP BOM data model
      • PDX - Product Data Exchange
    • We don't need to deal with today, but need to consider in the future
    • Michael posting

Open Action Items

  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. ONGOING
  • Kim -- share Biz Team proposed process for adding licenses to SPDX list more broadly
  • Michael H. -- Posting BOM info
  • Kim- Creating FAQ strucdture and handing out pieces for review, cleanup, additions

Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Brandon Robinson, Cisco
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Pierre LaPonte, nexB
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Michael Herzog, nexB

 

2011/7/13 General Meeting Minutes

Attendance: 10
Minutes for 20110630 approved
     
Technical Team Report - Kate

  • Added field for version of package
  • Legal team is working on fields for data licensing
  • Working thru bug list; looks like no big issues
  • Tools on track

Business Team Report - Kim

  • GA Launch:
    • Press release- to include endorsements
    • Phil has speaking slot, JimZ should mention in Keynote, 1 pg handout, table

Legal Team Report - Rockett

  • Working on clearing Creator/Reviewer field issue
  • Templatizing has taken back seat; may only provide general guidelines for v1.0 release.
  • Adding some explanation to the concluded license field

Cross Functional Issues – Discussion

  • LinuxCon
    • Attendance- PhilO, Kate, PhilK, Daniel, Pierre, Kim, Rockett will all attend. 
    • We'll have a table which we will man during breaks with above folks
  • Website
    • Pierre/Steve working in Sandbox
    • On track for launch
    • Will open to SPDX list prior to

Open Action Items

  • MartinM- Report back on # of people on respective mailing lists. ONGOING
  • Kim -- share Biz Team proposed process for adding licenses to SPDX list more broadly
  • Michael H. -- Posting BOM info
  • Kim- Creating FAQ strucdture and handing out pieces for review, cleanup, additions

Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Pierre LaPonte, nexB
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Michael Herzog, nexB
  • Bill Schineller, Black Duck Software
  • Daniel German, U. of Victoria
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation

2012/01/12 General Meeting Minutes

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Michael Herzog
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Mark Gisi
  • Brandon Robinson
  • Steve Cropper

Legal Update from Jilayne

  • Talked about Legal To-Do's
  • Legal team is working on templatizing -- they have a  draft of guidelines.  There are some outstanding issues
  • Need to get going on the license approval process.  Biz team is owning the process but legal will be participants as well.
  • Jilayne and Adam finalized the last edits on the preamble for the data license.  Kim to send to community people for feedback
  • Mark Gisi has updated "rationale doc" that explains why we selected data license.  That doc is not yet on website, but Mark to upload

Tech Team Update from Gary

  • Work of tech team is focused on the 1.1 spec.
  • They did a review of the draft 1.1 spec and there were a few follow up items.
  • Plan is to resolve those issues and update the RDF and the tools by the end of Q1.
  • 3 new tools are available that
    • Convert between SPDX Tag and RDF format (both ways)
    • Convert from SPDX to HTML
  • 1.1 Features are:
    • Updated data license to CC0
    • Fix typos
    • Fix the verification codes
    • Add tracking of suppliers
  • Tech team is also starting on the hierarchical/embedded design for 2.0.

 Biz team update from Kim

  • Website conversion is almost ready to start
    • Web team had a meeting earlier in the week to review the work that is done
    • Steve Cropper to schedule a web training for next week to show people how to convert content
  • Discussed EclipseCon
    • Protecode is taking the lead to organize a BOF
  • Discussed Software Supply Chain Summit idea
    • The idea is to have an in person 1 day meeting in Bay Area
    • Target date is Fri April 6, right after Collab Summit
    • Invite people from companies in the software supply chain -- including non-SPDX participants
    • SPDX people could also invite supplychain partners
    • We want to start to socialize and spread SPDX
    • Agenda would need to be developed, but contect would include SPDX Basics, End User talks, License info, tools as well as discussions
    • Steve Cropper said Cisco may be willing to host.  HP may as well.
    • Kim to follow up with LF and let them know.

2012/01/26 SPDX General Meeting Minutes

Attendance: 9
Minutes for 2011/12/15 approved
     
Technical Team Report - Gary

  • Much focus on defining approach for 2.0 spec.
  • Two key elements: Hierarchy and time element (revisions, supply chain, approvals)
  • Progress forward, but some concern that we are not converging rapidly enough
  • Key discussion about backwards compatibility and how important it is for 2.0.

Business Team Report - Kim

  • New website has been recent focus.
    • There was a training meeting and an email went to voluteers for content migration.
    • Web team is implementing the new menu structure and will then green light volunteers to move content.
    • That will take two weeks, followed by cleanup.
  • License List addition process
    • Dusted off notes from previous discussion and concluded it looked pretty good.
    • Kim working with legal team to review
    • Then we need to publish and implement
  • Community outreach re: data license
    • Kim reaching out to Gentoo, Fedora, Eclipse
    • Thumbs up from Gentoo; waiting on Fedora and Eclipse
    • Adding Gentoo licenses to license list
  • SPDX outreach meeting
    • Silicon Valley, April 6; plans in motion

Legal Team Report - Jilayne

  • Preample to data license complete and will be published.
  • License List
    • License "Templatizing" is taking a new approach; better described as "license list matching guidelines."
    • Good progress; lots of concensus
    • Discussion about best form or forms in which to publish (CSV, Excel, HTML)

Cross Functional Issues – Phil

  • Heads up- Potential for need for modest SPDX funding from participating companies in the future. Probably a when, not if. 

Open Action Items

  • Phil- If it looks like 2.0 may have backward compatibility issues, call broad meeting for community input.

Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Pierre LaPonte, nexB
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Jack Manbeck, TI
  • Steve Cropper, Cisco
  • Chuck Gaudreau, Protecode

2012/02/09 General Meeting Minutes

 

Attendance: 10
Minutes for 2011/1/26 approved
     
Technical Team Report - Gary

  • 2.0 Spec
    • Great progress on hierarchy issue.
    • Gaining agreement on importance of backward compatibility. Goal is 100%, but some openness to exceptions (which would have to be run by Biz Team and General Meeting)
    • Still concern about tightness of schedule (for August completion) but progress is accelerating.
  • 1.1 is very close. Gate is validating the verification algorithm.

Business Team Report - Kim

  • Website conversion is underway. Aiming for end of month to flip switch.
  • End User Event - April 6 in San Jose (after Collab Summit)
    • Cisco hosting.
    • Aiming for 50-60 people.
    • Idea is to bring in new supply chain partners.
    • Educational agenda.
    • 9-2 or 3pm

Legal Team Report - Jilayne

  • License List Guidelines
    • Guidelines for matching now posted on the web.
    • Discussion going on about whether copyright is part of the license.
    • Down to 9-10 issues.
  • License List Format
    • Question is in what form is the "golden" list.
    • Excel limiations on characters in field trucate license text for some licenses.
    • Possible solution is include, not text of license, but link to text, in spreadasheet.

Cross Functional Issues – Phil

  • Website Management and Hosting
    • Martin M leading team.
    • Need to define requirements first, solution second.
  • Collab Summit
    • Straw pole indicatd 10-15 participants from companies represented in this meeting.


Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Pierre LaPonte, nexB
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Steve Cropper, Cisco
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Mark Gisi, WindRiver
  • Michael Herzog, nexB

 

2012/02/23 General Meeting Minutes

Attendance: 10
Minutes for 2011/2/9 approved
     
Technical Team Report - Kate

  • 2.0 Spec
    • 3 proposals on the table under debate
    • Schedule is in flux
    • Team understands backward compaitibility issue.
  • 1.1 Spec
    • Needs feedback.
    • Still verifying the new verification algorithm.

Business Team Report - Kim

  • Website content is moving, albeit a little behind schedule. Still believes we will flip switch this Q.
  • End User Event - April 6, 9-3 in San Jose (after Collab Summit)
  • Collab Summit
    • Looks like we will have a keynote and a presentation in the Legal sessions on Wednesday
    • Kim working on lining up rooms for a tech meeting.

Legal Team Report - Jilayne

  • License List
    • Pulled text our of golden spreadsheet due to truncation issue and replaced with links to txt files.
    • All posted on spdx.org including latest matching guidelines
    • Jilayne recruiting volunteers to check txt files (where there have been some translation errors)
  • Forum
    • Had some discussion about Forum. Concern that in the past tech legal discussions in public forums scared some people off, so team will act accordingly.

Cross Functional Issues – Phil


Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Mark Gisi, WindRiver
  • Brandon Robinson, Cisco
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Freddy Munoz, Antelink
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus

2012/03/08 General Meeting Minutes

Attendance: 10
Minutes for 2011/2/23 approved
     
Technical Team Report - Kate

  • 2.0 Spec
    • Focusing in 2 proposals for signing, then revisiting how to handle hierarchy
    • Hoping to reach final resolution at Collaboration Summit
  • 1.1 Should be final before Collaboration Summit

Business Team Report - Phil (written input from Kim)

  • Website conversion goes slow.
  • SPDX participation in Collaboration Summit is on track.
  • Forum is firming up as well

Legal Team Report - Jilayne

  • Behind on updating Legal Section of new website
  • License Text review needs volunteers (Phil volunteered...how about you?)
  • License List
    • MPL 2.0 is up
    • Issues with "or later" to be reviewed.
    • Planning to hammer out several issues with tech team at Collaboration Summit
    • David Wheeler from a DC think tank wants to push government adoption of the License List
      • Needs a way to specially designate "US Govenment Works"
      • Team needs to resolve if/how we will handle with License List

Cross Functional Issues – Phil

  • Martin reports slow progress in charting out the future of the website.


Attendees

  • Phil Odence, Black Duck Software
  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Pierre LaPonte, nexB
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Martin Michlmayr, HP
  • Steve Cropper, Cisco
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Michael Herzog, nexB
  • Scott Lamons, HP

Technical Team

This is the working area for the technical team. This team has primary responsibility for drafting the specification and developing documentation, templates, samples and tools.

You can sign up for the mailing list here.

You can register concerns, comment or issues with the spec in our issue tracking system. To see a list of all outstanding issues see our issues list

A repository containing the source for tools can be found at http://git.spdx.org/.

The technical team meets weekly on Tuesdays at 19:00 GMT (11:00AM Pacific Time, 1:00 PM Central, 2:00 PM Eastern Time).

(note the time change, starting with 8/30/2011)

 

Toll-free dial-in number (U.S. and Canada): (877) 435-0230

International dial-in number: (253) 336-6732

Conference code: 7833942033.

URL: http://blackducksoftware.na6.acrobat.com/spdxrdf/

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The Technical team is contributing to the draft FAQ, which you can find here: Draft SPDX use FAQ

Working Version of SPDX Specification

This the working version of the SPDX specification.

The license list used by SPDX is available too, as are the RDF references.

 

Field Names

Added bug id's to version #14 for all P1 bugs, so now version 15 is current.

Version 14 is updated to be current with the draft spec as of the start of the face to face meeting.

Areas of spreadsheet still under discussion are:

?.? spds:Tool (class) - when is this proposed to be used?

? web page for standard licenses

Proposals

Adopted proposals

Rejected proposals

Drafts

2012 Feb 1 - Merged Model Proposal

Below is a class diagram merging Ed Warnicke's proposed SPDX Element model with the 1.0 model.  Definately a work in progress.  Most of the class definitions can be found in the 1.0 spec in the RDF appendix (model) or in Ed's proposal (http://spdx.org/wiki/rough-proposal-hierarchy-signing-and-supply-chain-friendliness-spdx-20).

The goals of this proposal are to:

- Support the use cases for the 1.0 spec

- Support the supply chain use cases

- Support the "hierarchical" or embedded package use cases

- Provide a more abstract model which can simplify the application of SPDX to some of the more complex use cases

This proposal extends the existing proposals by adding an SPDX Element Relationship which describes the type of relationship from one SPDX element to another.

 See the attached document for the mapping between the SPDX 1.0 properties and this proposal.

See the attached document for a proposal on creating RDF references to other Licensable documents which can be verified through checksums.

 

 

 

 Class Diagram

2012-Mar-11 SPDX File Aggregation

Status

Draft

Issue

In order to facilitate the delivery of multiple SPDX Data Files (and possiblye SPDX Data Signature Files ) we need some standard way of grouping them together for simple transport and delivery.

Proposal

Modify the spec to state that

  1. Archive Format: When multiple SPDX Data Files need to be delivered together as a group, they should be archived in a Zip file format.  
  2. Data & Signature File Grouping: When it is desirable to deliver one or more SPDX Data Files together with one or more related SPDX Data Signature files, the naming convention of Proposal-2012-Mar-6 Detached Signed SPDX Files should be followed.
  3. File Naming Convention: SPDX Archive files should be named <filename>.spdx.zip.    

Examples

Example 1

$ unzip -l example.spdx.zip 
Archive:  example.spdx.zip
  Length     Date   Time    Name
 --------    ----   ----    ----
        0  03-11-12 20:18   example.spdx
        0  03-11-12 20:18   example.spdx.sign
 --------                   -------
        0                   2 files
Example 2
 
$ unzip -l example2.spdx.zip 
Archive:  example2.spdx.zip
  Length     Date   Time    Name
 --------    ----   ----    ----
        0  03-11-12 20:18   example.spdx
        0  03-11-12 20:18   example.spdx.sign
        0  03-11-12 20:21   example2.spdx
        0  03-11-12 20:21   example2.spdx.sign
 --------                   -------
        0                   4 files
Compatibility

Resulting <filename>.spdx.zip files will not be backward compatible with SPDX 1.0 tooling. However, the SPDX Data Files they contain can be, and can be easily extracted by ubiquitously available tools and libaries are virtually every platform and in virtually every programming language.

 

2012-Mar-20: Licenses associated with licensor

Status

Draft

Issue

Bug 1000

To correctly fulfill the terms of some licenses you must know who the licensor is. Currently SPDX has no way to represent this in the situation where there are multiple licenses.

Proposal

Modify the spec in the following ways

  • Introduce a LicenseDeclaration entity type. Any number of instances of this type of entity would be allowing in an SPDX dataset.

  • A LicenseDeclaration entity would have zero or more licensor properties whose values are Agents.

  • A LicenseDeclaration entity would have exactly one licensing property whose values is a AnyLicenseInfo.

  • A LicenseDeclaration entity would have zero or more declarer properties whose values are Agents.

  • Allow the value of the licenseConcluded property to be a LicenseDeclaration in addition to the currently allowed AnyLicenseInfo.

Proposal 2011-12-20: SPDX analysis history tracking

Status

Proposed

Issue

Currently there is no way track relationships between SPDX datasets.

For example, PostgreSQL project is most licensed under an MIT like license but has some code in the contrib directory which is GPL. If i want a PostgreSQL without any GPL obligations i can simply build it without the contrib directory. I can start with publicly available SPDX dataset for PostgreSQL, remove all files in the contrib directory from the dataset and save it as the SPDX dataset for my PostgreSQL w/o GPL project.

If i do this there is no way for someone else to know that my SPDX data is derived from the public PostgreSQL SPDX data. If any issues are found in the public SPDX data they might effect my SPDX data also. Or if someone found problems in my SPDX data it would be useful to track that issue back to the original source and fix it there.

Proposal

Add an optional property to SpdxDocument which would specify another SpdxDocument from which it was derived. The isVersionOf property in the Dublin Core vocabulary is widely used and has the correct semantics.

Example (Turtle RDF)


  <http://example.com/spdx/postgresql-sans-contrib-9.1.2> a :SpdxDocument; 
    dc:isVersionOf <http://postgresql.org/spdx/9.1.2>; :describesPackage ... .

Example (Tag)

 IsVersionOf: http://postgresql.org/spdx/9.1.2 

The addition of this property would allow the history a particular SPDX dataset to be determined by following the isVersionOf properties of each SpdxDocument. Differences between any two SpdxDocuments could be determined by comparing the two dataset.

Compatibility

This change is fully backwards compatible for consumers that ignore properties they do not understand.

Proposal 2012-Mar-05: Inline signed SPDX files

Status

Draft

Issue

Currently there is no way to be sure that an SPDX file has not been modified by a third party after it was produced. See also, issue 980.

Proposal

Modify the spec to state that allow SPDX producers may  cryptographically sign SPDX files using the PGP clear text signature format. This format embeds a clear text version of the file to be signed inside of a text based wrapper which contains the cryptographic signature. SPDX consumers must accept signed SPDX files, but would not be required to authenticate any signatures. SPDX producers would have the option of signing SPDX files but would not be required to do so.

Example

SPDX file
SPDXVersion: SPDX-1.0
DataLicense: PDDL-1.0
Creator: Person: Peter Williams
Signed SPDX file
-----BEGIN PGP SIGNED MESSAGE-----
Hash: SHA1

SPDXVersion: SPDX-1.0
DataLicense: PDDL-1.0
Creator: Person: Peter Williams
-----BEGIN PGP SIGNATURE-----
Version: GnuPG v1.4.11 (Darwin)

iQEcBAEBAgAGBQJPVZO9AAoJENTSLvN5TFz940UH/j2/dys3uK6VTqnNBi/yQQxQ
sp/+wBhJThQ4qzph2Zy4pmpjX4u9iwuaIvkOigYp/XR8sdJExQSSSxLxgkfPokRG
4dN8YRZyQ3fTVuCz5DPas9B4NCcZTn77nB8Gas4wzyli7Pqu3YKfq81sfIyxnC+G
/LIMidJ6JD9mvcLmgsbz5zDwmEFnafXcgocK0d9Fbhvx6MKPK7dFxdQ9oN1lV9Ej
hED+wpGIQSSdSJBc2udKAxPZHFQxOTHHr8flxC6bzq01xyjm0W2hDDd0jKRN/cqZ
o10Une5wEO/p7UqFDoNh++kLJeODJ2ZKLr4qwrGXODKLDd5F8ZdDB8deuIb/7RM=
=jdOZ
-----END PGP SIGNATURE-----
 
Command sign an SPDX file

$ gpg --clearsign sample.spdx

Advantages

Embedding the signature in the the SPDX file has several advantages. The combination of the data and its signature reduce the possibility that the two will be accidentally separated as the SPDX data is passed from person to person. Such a separation could happen if an SPDX signature file is simply forgotten, or it could happen very easily if the name of an SPDX file ever needs to be changed. Having that data together will also make tooling easier to build because finding the signature data will be less error prone. Embedding the signature prevents large classes of mistakes from occurring and as such removes the need to cope with them.

Compatibility

This proposal will produce files that are not backwards compatible. Specifically a signed filed will not be readable by SPDX-1.0 compliant consumers. However, files produced by SPDX-1.0 compliant tools will continue to be valid SPDX files and tools that support signing, as described above, will be able to consume SPDX-1.0 files with no changes.

Proposal 2012-Mar-06: Detached Signed SPDX Files

 

Status

Draft

Issue

Currently there is no way to be sure that an SPDX file has not been modified by a third party after it was produced. See also, issue 980.

Proposal

Modify the spec to state that

  1. Signing Convention: SPDX producers may  cryptographically sign SPDX files using the PGP detached signature format as specified in RFC 2440. This format does not modify the original SPDX, but rather creates a separate <filename>.sig or <filename>.sign file containing a signature for the original file.  
  2. Signature File Naming Convention: The signature filename should be either <filename>.sig or <filename>.sign and be in the same directory as the SPDX file.
  3. Signature File Renaming: Renames of an SPDX file from <filename1> to <filename2> should also rename any <filename1>.sig or <filename1>.sign files to <filename2>.sig or <filename2>.sign respectively.  
  4. Consumption Optional: SPDX consumers may accept or ignore SPDX signature files. 
  5. Production Optional: SPDX producers would have the option of signing SPDX files but would not be required to do so.  

Example

SPDX file
 SPDXVersion: SPDX-1.0 DataLicense: PDDL-1.0 Creator: Person: Ed Warnicke 
Signed SPDX file
 -----BEGIN PGP SIGNATURE----- Version: GnuPG/MacGPG2 v2.0.17 (Darwin) Comment: GPGTools - http://gpgtools.org iEYEABECAAYFAk9WSn0ACgkQpqzn7Jq4hlCfYACbBelTUtjOGAYrSBXEODD9Ukpo vuAAn2gLkGsGOntkUTERnISOyOoBJxlT =JxE7 -----END PGP SIGNATURE----- 
Command sign an SPDX file
 $ gpg --armor --output example.spdx.sign --detach-sig example.spdx

Advantages

Detaching the signature in the SPDX file has several advantages.

  1. Leverage Existing Tools: It allows underlying tools that are used to process the formats into which SPDX is normally encoded (RDF tools, Tag Tools, XML Tools, etc) to continue to function normally. 
  2. Tooling Simplication: It makes tooling for SPDX easier because it allows issues of file authentication to be considered orthogonally from other issues.  A tool maker who *just* wants to focus on processing SPDX data does not need to worry about knowing how to unpack a wrapper.
  3. Community Standard: It follows the convention already being followed by kernel.org, mavencentral, the apache foundation, and most packagers.

Disadvantages

Detaching the signature in the SPDX file could lead to

  1. Misplaced Signatures: Separation of the signature file from the SPDX file makes it possible for the signature to become separated from the SPDX file
  2. Signature Correlation: Separation of the signature file from the SPDX file introduces the need to correlate signature files with SPDX files.

Responses to Disadvantages

  1. Misplaced Signatures -- Existing Archive Formats:  SPDX signature files can be passed along with SPDX data files by simple archiving in a common archive format like .zip, providing all of the benefits of inline signatures, while retaining the advantages of detached signatures.  This solution is proposed in Proposal 2012-Mar-11 SPDX File Aggregation
  2. Signature Correlation - Signature File Naming Convention: The SPDX signature file naming and placement conventions in the proposal eliminate concerns about correlation.

Compatibility

This proposal will produce files that are trivially backwards compatible. Specifically a signed filed will be readable by SPDX-1.0 compliant consumers and any tool capable of reading it's underlying encoding format (RDF, XML, Tag). By making the issue of signing orthogonal, we maintain separation of concerns.

 

RDF vocabulary

1.1-DRAFT (04 Apr 2012 19:15 UTC/79b751)

This page contains the latest version of the SPDX RDF vocabulary in various formats.  These are not considered stable at this time.

This document is under revision control at http://git.spdx.org/spdx-spec.git.

The HTML version is the authorative version.  The other versions are generated from the HTML for your convience.

SPDX 2.0 Use Cases

We have several sources to begin pulling for SPDX Use Cases:

  1. The Pad from earlier conversations collected at Use Cases For SPDX 2.0 Discussion
  2. The old SPDX 1.0 Use Cases as well as the SDPX 1.0 Use Case Picture.
 
I'd like to propose that we flesh out use cases here by having a brief summary listed here as a link to a more detailed child page.   Note, these use cases should be *doable* but in general not *required*.  Any item listed here that is not a link, should have a child page created for it.
 
  1. Code commits (original work intended for the project)
    1. Committer provides SPDX data
    2. Contributor makes commit  subject to existing SPDX data of project
    3. Contributor makes commit subject to existing SPDX data of a dual licensed project and selects one license
  2. Committer annotates source files with SPDX data
  3. Patches (original work intended for the project)
    1. Patch provider provides SPDX data for the patch
    2. Patch provider provides SPDX data for the patch indicating it is licensed however the hell its applied
    3. Patch provider provides patch subject to existing SPDX data of project
  4. Patch provider provides a patch that modifies existing SPDX data of project
    1. Downstream consumers contributing patches to SPDX data to upstream.
  5. Upstream maintainer providing SPDX data
    1. Upstream maintainer providing SPDX data in source archive
    2. Upstream maintainer providing SPDX data in SCM
    3. Upstream maintainer providing SPDX data at a URL
    4. Upstream maintainer preparing release artifacts (including SPDX data).
    5. Intended usage communicated by the auditee (how/will the audited item get included in delivered/deployed bits)  [Bill Schineller]
  6. Project maintainer incorporates another project
    1. Project maintainer incorporates another project by including source
    2. Project maintainer incorporates another project by including binary
    3. Project maintainer pulling individual files out of another project (subsetting)
  7. Project maintainer incorporates another copyrightable artifact by reference (think maven, possibly linking cases)
    1. by static reference (the referenced library is included with a redistribution)
    2. by dynamic reference (express runtime dependency on the external library, but not redistributing it)
    3. Maven case
  8. SPDX-Lite:
    1. Allow a low investment SPDX producer to produce valid SPDX data (could be maintainer or some third party)
    2. Produce a valid SPDX dataset even if data is missing for some data we would like to
  9. Intermediate packager (rpm, deb, etc) passing on and adding to SPDX Data
    1. Intermediate packager builds source package from upstream source
      1. Intermediate packager builds source package from upstream source that provides SPDX data
      2. Intermediate packager builds source package from upstream source that does not provide SPDX data
    2. Intermediate packager builds binary package from upstream source
      1. Intermediate packager builds binary package from upstream source that provides SPDX data
      2. Intermediate packager builds binary package from upstream source that does not provides SPDX data
    3. Intermediate packager adds patches to upstream source 
      1. Intermediate packager adds patches to upstream source that provides SPDX data
      2. Intermediate packager adds patches to upstream source that does not provide SPDX data
    4. Intermediate packager adds someone else's patches to upstream source
      1. Intermediate packager adds someone else's patches to upstream source that provides SPDX data
      2. Intermediate packager adds someone else's patches to upstream source that does not provide SPDX data
    5. Intermediate packager subsetting upstream source
      1. Intermediate packager subsetting upstream source that provides SPDX data
      2. Intermediate packager subsetting upstream source that does not provide SPDX data
    6. Intermediate packager chooses to distribute one of multiple available under licenses provided for by upstream (check with legal team)
    7. Intermediate packager reviews SPDX data provided by upstream.
  10. Build systems (build systems want to pass on SPDX data for the thing they are building)
    1. Yocto [Jack Manbeck]
      1. How does SPDX work in an environment where the sources aren't there, but are pulled from git or a mirror and patched.
    2. Maven [ Brian Fox ]
      1. Rolling into release artifacts things only referenced in the POM file
      2. Shading (subsetting) portions of a transitive dependency for inclusion in your artifact
    3. Continuous integration around SPDX files (fixing SPDX files for commits coming in etc).
    4. Linking
      1. Debian has an interest in only building things that are linking license compatible
        1. If a tool is consuming SPDX data to interact with heuristics.
    5. Java complications [Richard Fontana]
      1. What to do about installers that download JDK directly from sun.
    6. I just made a binary out of some source
      1. SPDX data indicating subset of the source that made it into a particular binary or binary package
    7. Tool used to produce software infecting distribution license of the software itself [Kevin Fleming] (e.g. code-generator? Bison? ..)
  11. Aggregator aggregating many 'copyrightable items' for redistribution
    1. Linux Distros [Kate Stewart]
    2. Embedded Images (e.g. router images, switch images)
    3. SDKs [Jack Manbeck]
    4. Reference implementations [Jack Manbeck]
    5. Eclipse/OSGI distributions
    6. Application which ships with documentation +  media + software [Jack Manbeck]
    7. Application which ships with a contrib libraries [Gary O'Neall]
    8. Application which ships with development tools [Gary O'Neall]
    9. Receiving what appears to be commercial software but that commercial software contains Open Source
    10. Receiving what appears to be opensource software but that opensource software contains commercial software
    11. Subsetting out only the shippable bits of stuff coming from an SDK
    12. Aggregators aggregating other aggregations for redistribution
  12. Consumers receiving SPDX data
    1. Procurement needs to view it and review it
    2. Legal department needs to review
    3. Comply with licensing when there are multiple rights holders each with licensing use under a different license
    4. Bradley want to extract all rights holders for a particular file
    5. Multiple SPDX files you need to reconcile
    6. Recognizing the same SPDX data for the same code coming from multiple supply chain paths
    7. Flagging potential issues revealed by the SPDX
      1. License conflicts
      2. Listing out obligations
    8. Helping to meet the obligations of the licenses (Given that I receive an SPDX file, does the info in SPDX file allow me to extract what I need to meet basic kinds of obligations)
      1. How to capture attribution information for binaries
      2. Help with redistribution obligations
    9. Equivalence classes of binaries and tracking back to the same source and source SPDX data.
      1. Consider what to do about license metafiles
      2. COPYING files
      3. LICENSE.* files
      4. README.*
      5. Think about how to handle NOTICE files and Apache
  13. Consuming code snippets (God help us all) (subfile pieces of code not originally intended for the project) [Gary O'Neall]
    1. Make sure that the license and copyright information for a snippet is reflected in the SPDX data for the file
    2. Track differently licensed snippets explicitly
    3. Handle the case where code is copied and pasted through online forums etc.
  14. Signoff/multiple signoff on SPDX data
    1. Contracts with multiple parties requiring signoff by all [Kate Stewart]
    2. Signing off on only a subset of the SPDX data (of an SPDX document in progress?)
  15. Third party does licensing analysis
    1. Third party generates license analysis
    2. Acceptable usage communicated by auditor [Peter Williams]
    3. Actual usage communicated
    4. Did the code that I shipped (the binaries) match the copyrightable items? i.e. be able to produce an SPDX file that applies to binary code
    5. Collecting enough information to allow auditor to make recommendations to remove or not a component
    6. Tooling to assist with copyright (change copyright date and list of contributors/copyright holders, even as license and most of code remains unchanged) for changes between versions
    7. Unaffiliated third party provides SPDX data for a project
  16. Auditor Analyzing/Sanity-checking/correcting Bill of Material he's handed
    1. outbound: validate that SPDX goes hand in hand with what's being shipped [Kirsten Newcomer]
      1. Check to see if the SPDX data provided matches the files provided [Kirsten Newcomer]
      2. Check to see if the SPDX file is internally consistent (do I have a license refs to match licenses)
      3. Did the code that I shipped (the binaries) match the copyrightable items.
    2. inbound:  validate that SPDX goes hand in hand with what's being brought in [Kirsten Newcomer]
      1. Chcek to see if the SPDX data matches the files you are shipping [Kirsten Newcomer]
      2. Check to see if the SPDX file is internally consistent (do I have a license refs to match licenses)
    3. SPDX lint
    4. Incomplete SPDX data you may need to complete
    5. Asserting corrections to SPDX data provided by others further upstream
  17. Migrating from one version of the SPDX spec to another (moving a file from SPDX 1.0 to 2.0 for example)
    1. e.g. knit together a bunch of 1.0 files into a 2.0...
  18. Extensions:
    1. Communicate data beyond what is described in spec between consenting parties w/o breaking consumers that are not in the know
    2. Experimental improvements for new flavors data in SDPX files w/o breaking consumers that are not in the know. [Peter Williams]
    3. License list extensions, how do you handle folks who have more licenses than SPDX
    4. Decorating an already produces and signed SPDX dataset with extension data [Bill Schineller]
    5. Recording per ExtractedLicenseText a comment detailing exactly which pattern matching technique / string found that Extracted License Text (so that SPDX file doesn't need to repeat in every matched File instance) [D. M. German]
    6. Recording free-form tribal knowledge about a file which is not otherwise visible in the text of the file itself (e.g. commit history from git repo, origin information such as scanning against a knowledge base of open source could provide) [Mark Gisi]
    7. Conveying Encryption content (Export Control implications) of a package/file in a package [someone at collab summit]
    8. Conveying Security Vulnerability information [Jianshen O.- Huawei]
  19. Look at a 'pingback' (URL string similar for blogs)kind of mechanism for original providers of SPDX (to allow them to figure out where it's used) [Andrew Hsu]
  20. Cloud
    1. Materializing a VM and making sure it's OK from a licensing mechanism
    2. SugarCRM case, obligation by virtue of using web service interface
  21. Legal Use Cases:
    1. Allow the NDA status of an SPDX document to be communicated in a machine readable way (not just a comment) for organizations that don't want the SPDX document to be publicly released [Mark Baushke from Juniper]
    2. How are we going to handle Public Domain (not in license list... region specific...)
 

Cross-cutting concerns:

  1. Provenance (the need to optionally use signing to validate who said what)
  2. Trust
  3. Handling staleness of data
  4. Composite licensing
  5. Ease of sharing information
    1. Collecting tribal knowledge along the way 
  6. Guarding against file bloat
  7. Simple simple simple
  8. SPDX-Lite:
  9. Clarity
  10. Automation/toolifiability
  11. Regionality

Themes:

 
Looking at these Use Cases, there are some underlying themes:
  1. Root of data (closer to upstream the better)
  2. Subsetting of copyrightable things (and their SPDX data) (Note: Subsets of copyrightable things are usually also copyrightable things)
  3. Aggregation of copyrightable things (and their SPDX data) (Note: Aggregations of copyrightable things are usually also copyrightable things).
 
 

 

Attachments: 

Application which ships with a contrib libraries

  1. Title: Application which ships with a contrib libraries
  2. Primary Actor: Committer of the open source project containing the contrib library
  3. Goal in Context: To include within the distribution of an open source project contributions made by non-project members.  These contributions are by default not built into the resultant binaries (assuming there are build scripts included in the distribution).  There can be no dependency from the main project on the contrib code.  The contrib libraries may contain licenses different from the main open source project.
  4. Stakeholders and Interests:
    1. Committers to the open source project:
      1. Isolates the contrib copyrighted artifacts so that any copyleft licenses will not impact the overall licensing of the project (including the project committers copyrighted works).
    2. Contributors to the contrib library:
      1. Allow the contributors to make their contributions available under the license of their choice
    3. Consumers of upstream copyrightable artifacts:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of artifacts
      2. To be able to distinguish copyrighted artifacts intended for be build and distributed as part of the project from optional copyrighted artifacts which may or may not be included
      3. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  5. Preconditions:
    1. Project has been organized with clear distinctions between the contrib and main project artifacts
    2. Licensing information has been collected for the contrib and main project artifacts
  6. Main Success Scenario: Committer provides complete licensing information and an indication of which artifacts are part of the main project and which artifacts are part of a contrib library.  Each contrib library will contain information on licensing.
  7. Failed End Condition: Committer does not specify an artifact is part of a contrib library causing confusion on the applicable license for the overall project.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Project release
    2. Contrib updates
  9. Notes:  This use case is from the perspective of a committer who is assembling/aggregating additional contributed code for further distribution.  The downstream recipient of the package may choose to use one of the contrib items as part of their delivery could alter the licensing for the aggregated work product.  The downstream recipient could also remove the contrib artifacts completely.
  10. Example: Postgresql, which ships under a BSD license overall, contains a contrib/ directory that contains GPL licensed code.

 

Application which ships with development tools

  1. Title: Application which ships with development tools
  2. Primary Actor: Committer of the open source project containing the contrib library
  3. Goal in Context: To include within the distribution of an open source project development tools used to build a deployable executable (or executables) from the open source code.  These development tools would not be included in any resultant executable and may be under a different license than the stated license for the project.
  4. Stakeholders and Interests:
    1. Committers to the open source project:
      1. Makes clear which copyrightable artifacts are intended to be used only at development time and is not intended to be distributed with any executables.
    2. Consumers of upstream copyrightable artifacts:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of artifacts
      2. To be able to distinguish copyrighted artifacts intended to be build and distributed as part of the project from build tools intended to be used at development time
      3. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts
  5. Preconditions:
    1. Project has been organized with clear distinctions between the build tools and other project artifacts
    2. Licensing information has been collected for the build tools and main project artifacts
  6. Main Success Scenario: Committer provides complete licensing information and an indication of which artifacts is part of the main project and which artifacts are part of the build tools. Each build tool will contain information on licensing.
  7. Failed End Condition: Committer does not specify an artifact is part of the build tools causing confusion on the applicable license for the overall project.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Project release
  9. Notes: This use case is from the perspective of a committer who is assembling/aggregating additional build tools for further distribution.  Although the intent of the committer for the build tools has been made, the downstream recipient may choose to use the build tools in a different manner (e.g. include some of the source in the main project itself).  The downstream recipient may also replace or remove the build tools.
  10. Example: Wireshark, a network analyzer licensed under GPLv2, contains in it's source base piddle, which is GPLv3, but is solely used as a tool for building wireshark, and no part of which goes *into* any of the binary artifacts built out of Wireshark.

Collecting enough information to allow auditor to make recommendations to remove or not a component

  1. Title: Collecting enough information to allow auditor to make recommendations to remove or not a component
  2. Primary Actor: Auditor of open source code
  3. Goal in Context: To provide the consumer of the code audit sufficient information to make changes to the copyrighted materials in order to comply with the consumers policies regarding open source compliance.
  4. Stakeholders and Interests:
    1. Consumer of the audit:

      1. Organization which has an interest in the license obligations of the copyrighted materials
      2. Will typically have policies (either formal or informal) on the use of open source
  5. Preconditions:
    1. Access to souce code tree by auditor
  6. Main Success Scenario:
    1. Source code is analyzed by the auditor and the origin for code and associated license is created
    2. Policy violations are identified to the file (at least) level
    3. Information on the audit is provided in an SPDX file + additional information (e.g. report)
    4. Remediations are made to the source to comply with the policy
    5. Source code is re-analyzed and an SPDX file describing the compliant code is produced
  7. Failed End Condition:
  8. Trigger:Audit
  9. Notes: 
  10. Example: Company has a policy not to deploy any GPL code compiled into their proprietary commercial software.  Audit is performed to identify any GPL code and comply with the policy prior to a product release.

Committer annotates source files with SPDX data

  1. Title: Committer annotates source files with SPDX data
  2. Primary Actor: Committer
  3. Goal in Context: To indicate SPDX data for the file in the source code file.
  4. Preconditions: 
    1. Committer has decided the license for the file they are committing
  5. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Committer: 
      1. To communicate the license information for the file in line with the file.
    2. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To be able to have the source code be self documenting in a machine and human readable manner with respect to license information.
      2. To communicate the licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.  
      3. To have their licenses respected
    3. Consumers of upstream source:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of upstream source
      2. To be able to comply easily with licenses for upstream source
      3. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  6. Main Success Senario: Source code files contain complete accurate SPDX data sufficient to communicate their licensing information in a way that is both human and machine readable.
  7. Failed End Condition: Source code files lack complete accurate SPDX data.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Commit of code to an upstream project.
  9. Notes: There may be sub-use cases here around the distinction between original authorship of a file and capturing in SPDX existing information about the file, either from existing file headers or from commit logs.

Committers provides SPDX data for a code being committed

  1. Title: Committers provides SPDX data for a code being committed
  2. Primary Actor: Committer
  3. Goal in Context: To include SPDX data for code being committed to an upstream project.
  4. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Committer: 
      1. To communicate the licensing information for the code they are committing to the upstream project.
    2. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To be able to document the license information for the commits they receive
      2. To communicate the licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.  
      3. To have their licenses respected
    3. Consumers of upstream source:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of upstream source
      2. To be able to comply easily with licenses for upstream source
      3. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  5. Preconditions: 
    1. Committer has decided on licensing information for their commit.
  6. Main Success Senario: Committer communicates accurate complete licensing information for their commit in an SPDX data format as part of the commit process.
  7. Failed End Condition: Committer communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their package.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Commit of code to an upstream project.
  9. Notes:  

Communicate data beyond what is described in spec

A vendor wants to embed information about a package in its SPDX file that is not representable using standard SPDX fields (and/or classes).

Stakeholders and interests

SPDX producer

The person or organization that is producing the SPDX and wish to extend it with non-standard information.

standard SPDX consumer

A person, organization or tool that can read and process standard SPDX data but is not aware of the non-standard extensions being used by "SPDX producer".

extended SPDX consumer

A person, organization or tool that can read and process the non-standard extensions used by "SPDX producer" as well as standard SPDX data.

Main success scenario

  1. SPDX producer analyzes the package for all the standard SPDX data
  2. SPDX producer analyzes the package for the list actions they believe are required to comply with the licensing of the package
  3. SPDX producer generates an SPDX file which included both the standard SPDX data and the compliance checklist
  4. SPDX producer publishes this file on their website as a "SPDX file for package X"
    1. An extended SPDX consumer downloads the SPDX file and uses the checklist to ensure they are meeting their licensing obligations
    2. A standard SPDX consumer downloads the SPDX file and uses the standard data as input into their compliance processes

Contributor makes commit subject to existing SPDX data of project

  1. Title: Contributor makes commit  subject to existing SPDX data of project
  2. Primary Actor: Committer
  3. Goal in Context: To indicate the commit is subject to existing SPDX data for the project.
  4. Preconditions: 
    1. Committer has decided to accept the licensing for the project
    2. The Upstream Maintainer is providing SPDX data for the project.
  5. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Committer: 
      1. To communicate that their commit is licensed in alignment with the SPDX data for the project.
    2. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To be able to document the license information for the commits they receive
      2. To communicate the licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.  
      3. To have their licenses respected
    3. Consumers of upstream source:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of upstream source
      2. To be able to comply easily with licenses for upstream source
      3. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  6. Main Success Senario: Committer communicates that they are agreeing to the SPDX data for the project applying to their commit.
  7. Failed End Condition: Committer communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their package.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Commit of code to an upstream project.
  9. Notes:  

Intermediate packager adds patches to upstream source that provides SPDX data

 

  1. Title: Intermediate packager adds patches to upstream source that provides SPDX data
  2. Primary Actor: Intermediate packager (someone building a rpm, deb, etc from upstream source)
  3. Goal in Context: To include in the package SPDX data describing the packages licensing information for the package base upon the SPDX data provided by the upstream source in a way that allows the packager to verifiably reference the upstream packagers SPDX data and also to include SPDX data describing the packagers additions (patches) to the project.
  4. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.  
      2. To have their licenses respected
    2. Intermediate Packager:
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their package
      2. To communicate the licensing information for the packagers additions (patches) to the upstream source.
      3. To communicate the licensing information provided by the upstream maintainer.
      4. To respect the licenses of the upstream maintainer
    3. Consumers of packages:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of packages
      2. To receive accurate and clear information of the licensing of the packagers additions (patches) to the upstream source.
      3. To be able to comply easily with licenses for packages
      4. To be able to trust that the package SPDX data is in alignment with the upstream maintainers license assertions.
      5. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  5. Preconditions: 
    1. Upstream maintainer has provided SPDX data
    2. Package maintainer has selected a license for their additions (patches) to the upstream source
  6. Main Success Senario: Packager communicates accurate complete licensing information for their package in an SPDX data format in the package archive.
  7. Failed End Condition: Package maintainer communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their package.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Release of a new package
  9. Notes:  

 

Intermediate packager adds someone else's patches to upstream source that provides SPDX data

  1. Title: Intermediate packager adds someone else's patches to upstream source that provides SPDX data
  2. Primary Actor: Intermediate packager (someone building a rpm, deb, etc from upstream source)
  3. Goal in Context: To include in the package SPDX data describing the packages licensing information for the package base upon the SPDX data provided by the upstream source in a way that allows the packager to verifiably reference the upstream packagers SPDX data and also to include SPDX data describing the additions (patches) to the upstream source that came from a 3rd party.
  4. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.  
      2. To have their licenses respected
    2. Intermediate Packager:
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their package
      2. To communicate the licensing information for the additions (patches) to the upstream source that came from a 3rd party.
      3. To communicate the licensing information provided by the upstream maintainer.
      4. To respect the licenses of the upstream maintainer
    3. Consumers of packages:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of packages
      2. To receive accurate and clear information of the licensing of the additions (patches) to the upstream source that came from a 3rd party.
      3. To be able to comply easily with licenses for packages
      4. To be able to trust that the package SPDX data is in alignment with the upstream maintainers license assertions.
      5. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  5. Preconditions: 
    1. Upstream maintainer has provided SPDX data
    2. Package maintainer knows the license for the 3rd party additions (patches) to the upstream source
  6. Main Success Senario: Packager communicates accurate complete licensing information for their package in an SPDX data format in the package archive.
  7. Failed End Condition: Package maintainer communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their package.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Release of a new package
  9. Notes:  

Intermediate packager builds binary package from upstream source that provides SPDX data

  1. Title: Intermediate packager builds binary package from upstream source that provides SPDX data
  2. Primary Actor: Intermediate packager (someone building a binary rpm, deb, etc from upstream source)
  3. Goal in Context: To include in the package SPDX data describing the packages licensing information for the binary package base upon the SPDX data provided by the upstream source in a way that allows the packager to verifiably reference the upstream packagers SPDX data.
  4. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.  
      2. To have their licenses respected
    2. Intermediate Packager:
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their package
      2. To communicate the licensing information provided by the upstream maintainer.
      3. To respect the licenses of the upstream maintainer
    3. Consumers of packages:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of packages
      2. To be able to comply easily with licenses for packages
      3. To be able to trust that the package SPDX data is in alignment with the upstream maintainers license assertions.
      4. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  5. Preconditions: 
    1. Upstream maintainer has provided SPDX data
  6. Main Success Senario: Packager communicates accurate complete licensing information for their package in an SPDX data format in the package archive.
  7. Failed End Condition: Package maintainer communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their package.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Release of a new package
  9. Notes:   Upstream may be the root provider of the code, a source package, or some other intermediate party.  At the end of the day it's who you got the code from.

Intermediate packager builds source package from upstream source that provides SPDX data

  1. Title: Intermediate packager builds source package from upstream source that provides SPDX data
  2. Primary Actor: Intermediate packager (someone building a rpm, deb, etc from upstream source)
  3. Goal in Context: To include in the package SPDX data describing the packages licensing information for the package base upon the SPDX data provided by the upstream source in a way that allows the packager to verifiably reference the upstream packagers SPDX data.
  4. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.  
      2. To have their licenses respected
    2. Intermediate Packager:
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their package
      2. To communicate the licensing information provided by the upstream maintainer.
      3. To respect the licenses of the upstream maintainer
    3. Consumers of packages:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of packages
      2. To be able to comply easily with licenses for packages
      3. To be able to trust that the package SPDX data is in alignment with the upstream maintainers license assertions.
      4. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  5. Preconditions: 
    1. Upstream maintainer has provided SPDX data
  6. Main Success Senario: Packager communicates accurate complete licensing information for their package in an SPDX data format in the package archive.
  7. Failed End Condition: Package maintainer communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their package.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Release of a new package
  9. Notes:  This is a base case, it is well understood that packagers both add to the upstream source, but also subset it.

Intermediate packager subsetting upstream source that provides SPDX data

  1. Title: Intermediate packager subsetting upstream source that provides SPDX data
  2. Primary Actor: Intermediate packager (someone building a rpm, deb, etc from upstream source)
  3. Goal in Context: To include in the package SPDX data describing the packages licensing information for the package base upon the SPDX data provided by the upstream source in a way that allows the packager to verifiably reference the upstream packagers SPDX data and to make clear that only a subset of the copyrightable artifacts provided by upstream maintainer are included in the copyright artifacts provided in the package.  Examples would include -dev packages that only include headers, packages that do not package contrib/ subdirectories, or otherwise break up what upstream has provided into package shaped pieces.
  4. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.  
      2. To have their licenses respected
    2. Intermediate Packager:
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their package
      2. To communicate the licensing information provided by the upstream maintainer.
      3. To indicate that they are only passing on copyrightable artifacts based on a subset of the copyrightable artifacts provided by the upstream maintainers.
      4. To respect the licenses of the upstream maintainer
    3. Consumers of packages:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of packages
      2. To be able to comply easily with licenses for packages
      3. To be able to trust that the package SPDX data is in alignment with the upstream maintainers license assertions.
      4. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  5. Preconditions: 
    1. Upstream maintainer has provided SPDX data
    2. Packager understands how they are subsetting the upstream source
  6. Main Success Senario: Packager communicates accurate complete licensing information for their package in an SPDX data format in the package archive in such a way that indicates they are only using parts of what is provided in the upstream source.
  7. Failed End Condition: Package maintainer communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their package.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Release of a new package
  9. Notes:  Upstream may be the root provider of the code, a source package, or some other intermediate party.  At the end of the day it's who you got the code from.

License list extension

An organization that does a lot of compliance work is likely to have a license list already which is a superset of the SPDX license list. Such an organization probably will have policies for how to deal with at least some of these licenses. It is important that organizations be able identify the equivalency of these non-SPDX listed license texts/notices.

Stakeholders and interests

Analyzer

A person or organization which produced the SDPX file and maintains their own license list.

Consumer

A person, organization or tool which wants to consume SPDX files produced by one or more analyzer. This entity maintains its own license list and policies for those licenses. This license list partially overlaps with each of the Analyzers' license lists. The Consumer maintains mappings between its list and those of the analyzers from which it receives SPDX files.

Main Scenario

  1. Analyzer analyzes a package and finds licenses it recognizes that are not listed on
  2. Analyzer passes SPDX data to Consumer
  3. For each SPDX listed license Consumer performs appropriate action based on its policy for that license
  4. For each non-SPDX listed license Consumer maps from the globally unique id of the license in the Anaylzer's license list to the license in it's list and performs appropriate action based on its policy for that license

Alternate scenario A

  1. Analyzer generates SPDX data referencing its license list for non-SPDX listed licenses
  2. Later one of the licenses in that SPDX file is added to SPDX license list
  3. Consumer detects non-SPDX listed license and maps it to the now SPDX listed license

Alternate scenario B

  1. Analyzer analyzes a package and finds licenses it recognizes that are not listed on
  2. Analyzer passes SPDX data to Consumer
  3. For each SPDX listed license Consumer performs appropriate action based on its policy for that license
  4. Consumer encounters license from Analyzers list that it does not have a mapping for
  5. Consumer fetches license data from Analyzer's license list and adds that license to its license list

Patch provider provides SPDX data for the patch

  1. Title: Patch provider provides SPDX data for the patch
  2. Primary Actor: Patch Provider
  3. Goal in Context: To indicate the licensing information asSPDX data for the patch.
  4. Preconditions: 
    1. Committer has decided on the licensing for the patch
  5. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Patch Provider: 
      1. To communicate that the license information for their patch.
      2. To have their licenses respected
    2. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To be able to document the license information for the patches they receive
      2. To have a paper trail of the licensing information for their project. 
      3. To have their licenses respected
    3. Third party patch appliers (think Yocto):
      1. To be able to know whether or not they have licensing issues when they apply a patch ot upstream.
    4. Consumers of upstream source:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of upstream source
      2. To be able to comply easily with licenses for upstream source
      3. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  6. Main Success Senario: Patch supplier communicates the licensing information for their patch.
  7. Failed End Condition: Patch supplier doesn't communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their patch.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Creation of a patch
  9. Notes:  

Patch provider provides SPDX data for the patch indicating it is licensed however the hell its applied

  1. Title: Patch provider provides SPDX data for the patch indicating it licensed matching whatever files it applies to.
  2. Primary Actor: Patch Provider
  3. Goal in Context: To indicate the licensing information as SPDX data for the patch.
  4. Preconditions: 
    1. Committer simply wants his patch to have licensing information matching the code it's applied to.
  5. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Patch Provider: 
      1. To communicate that the patch should be licensed the same way as the code it applies to.
    2. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To be able to document the license information for the patches they receive
      2. To have a paper trail of the licensing information for their project. 
      3. To have their licenses respected
    3. Third party patch appliers (think Yocto):
      1. To be able to know whether or not they have licensing issues when they apply a patch to upstream.
    4. Consumers of upstream source:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of upstream source
      2. To be able to comply easily with licenses for upstream source
      3. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  6. Main Success Senario: Patch supplier communicates that their patch is licensed matching the licenses of the files it is applied to.
  7. Failed End Condition: Patch supplier doesn't communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their patch.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Creation of a patch
  9. Notes:  This probably involves work with the legal group around an ASLICENSEDAS-1.0 short form, which would involve drafting a license indicating this, and such a license should probably exclude intentional indications of other licenses (say if the patch actually changed license information in the files deliberately).

SPDX 2.0 UseCase: Reference Implementations

  1. Title:  Reference Implementations
  2. Primary Actor: Member of  reference implementation team
  3. Goal in Context: To include with the copyrightable artifacts distributed by the reference implementation SPDX data describing it's licensing information and the type of copyrightable artifacts.  The reference implementation is typically a hardware device (board) that comes in a box with software pre-flashed to demonstrate some functionality, documentation, cables and so forth. There may also be DVDs, CDs, an SD card, etc that could contain host development tools, the software for the pieces running on the flash, additional SDKs, applications (test and/or demonstration), a distribution of some sort and so forth. This can be a very large amount of material and software and this use case could be seen as a superset of the application, SDK, etc use cases. Note: Some artifacts like Makefiles, sample data files and/or other project files (e.g. IDE project files), scripts and so forth may be machine generated and thus not have a copyright or license and other “incidental” project files may not have copyrights as well.
  4.  Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Reference Implementation Provider: 
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts and the type of artifacts.
      2. To have their licenses respected
      3. To help consumers understand what they are getting.
    2. Consumers of Reference Implementation artifacts:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of artifacts
      2. To be able to comply easily with licenses for artifacts
      3. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  5. Preconditions: 
    1. Upstream has selected licenses for the copyrightable artifacts originating with the project (package, files, etc)
    2. Upstream has indentified license data for other copyrightable artifacts they consume
  6. Main Success Scenario: Reference Implementation Provider communicates accurate complete licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts in an SPDX data format.
  7. Failed End Condition: Reference Implementation Provider communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts, or does not describe the type of artifact ..
  8. Trigger:
    1. Reference implementation release (ship)
    2. Commit time?
    3. Checkout from a repository?
    4. Inclusion of external artifacts into the reference platform
    5. Posting of updated software for a reference implementation

Notes:  This use case can be viewed as a superset of the application, SDK, distribution, Yocto, etc uses cases where many things are aggregated together. There may be a lot of SPDX documents. Software on Reference Implementations are typically updated and could be posted for download from a website or made accessible though a source code control system. (as examples).

SPDX 2.0 UseCase: Upstream maintainer providing SPDX data

NOTE: This use case has been broken down into two  more specific use cases. 

If you are looking for an example of the use case template, please see one of them.

Third party produces bill of materials for software package

An organization desires to understand the legal obligations associated with their intended use of a software package. To gain insight the organization requests a third party to audit their entire codebase to determine all rights holders and licenses for every file in the codebase.

Stackholders and Interests

Auditee
The organization in possession of the code that wants to understand the licensing and rights holders of that code.
Auditor
Third party that need to analyze the codebase and inform the auditee of what the licensing is and who the rights holders are.

Main Success Scenario

  1. Auditee delivers code to auditor
  2. Auditor extracts licensing and copyright information from files
  3. Auditor determines the following for every file in code base:
    • Rights holders
    • Licensing terms
    • membership in a package/component which is included in the codebase
  4. Auditor provides above data to auditee
  5. Legal staff at auditee looks at concluded licensing and right holder and take any necessary actions to comply with the licenses

Upstream maintainer providing SPDX data in SCM

  1. Title: Upstream maintainer providing SPDX data in SCM
  2. Primary Actor: Member of upstream maintainer team
  3. Goal in Context: To include with the copyrightable artifacts distributed by the project SPDX data describing it's licensing information in the SCM (source configuration management system, for example git,cvs,svn).  The goal is to have the SPDX data at any given point in the SCM match the source code at that point in the SCM, so that whenever code is checked out from the SCM, it has SPDX data appropriate to it.
  4. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.  
      2. To have their licenses respected
    2. Consumers of upstreams copyrightable artifacts:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of artifacts
      2. To be able to comply easily with licenses for artifacts
      3. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  5. Preconditions: 
    1. Upstream has selected licenses for the copyrightable artifacts originating with the project (package, files, etc)
    2. Upstream has indentified license data for other copyrightable artifacts they consume
  6. Main Success Senario: Upstream communicates accurate complete licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts in an SPDX data format in the SCM matching the code present in the SCM at that point.
  7. Failed End Condition: Upstream communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.
  8. Trigger:
    1. SCM Commit
  9. Notes:  

Upstream maintainer providing SPDX data in source archive

  1. Title: Upstream maintainer providing SPDX data in source archive
  2. Primary Actor: Member of upstream maintainer team
  3. Goal in Context: To include with the copyrightable artifacts distributed by the project SPDX data describing it's licensing information in the archive of its source being distributed.  In particular this may look like an upstream maintainer including SPDX data in their tarball or jar file.
  4. Stakeholders and Interests: 
    1. Upstream maintainers: 
      1. To communicate the licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.  
      2. To have their licenses respected
    2. Consumers of upstreams copyrightable artifacts:
      1. To receive accurate and clear information of licensing of artifacts
      2. To be able to comply easily with licenses for artifacts
      3. To be able to subset, extend, or aggregate artifacts and pass on clear authoritative verifiable license for the resulting new copyrightable artifacts.
  5. Preconditions: 
    1. Upstream has selected licenses for the copyrightable artifacts originating with the project (package, files, etc)
    2. Upstream has indentified license data for other copyrightable artifacts they consume
  6. Main Success Senario: Upstream communicates accurate complete licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts in an SPDX data format in the source archive they provide for a given release.
  7. Failed End Condition: Upstream communicates inaccurate incomplete licensing information for their copyrightable artifacts.
  8. Trigger:
    1. Release of a new source archive
  9. Notes:  

Spreadsheet Template

The spreadsheet template to be used for spreadsheet input can be found attached to this page.

Example of data using this template should be stored under the examples section.

Information on the tool used to convert to/from this can be found in the Tools Sandbox

Known Issues with the current version of the template:

- 20110325 - still pending resolution from legal team on whether analysis information section will have a data license.

Use Cases Collected for 2.0 discussion

Use cases from fossbazaar site from pre-1.0 discussions:   https://fossbazaar.org/wiki/spdx-use-case-1
some of these taken from http://pad.ubuntu.com/spdx-tech  


Use Cases to consider for SPDX 2.0 - working draft
======================================
 
Source code for SPDX-tools are available at: https://github.com/goneall/SPDX-Tools
 
Use case details:
 
 * http://pad.ubuntu.com/spdx-tech--use-case-embedded-java-jar
 
 [The way I am thinking about the use cases is there are 2 different groups of use cases which I am calling scenarios.  From what I can think of the same solutions should work for both scenarios, but there may be value in keeping these 2 scenarios in mind while working through the detailed use cases]
 
 High level general use case Scenarios:
 A: Embedded Packages (a typical "Audit" scenario)
 - Actors: 
     - Package Supplier: person or entity supplying the package represented by the highest lievel SPDX document
     - Package Consumer: person or entity using the package represented by the highest level SPDX document
Use Cases: 
- embedded java jar 
- embedded source distribution
- embedded source with unused contrib library 
- embedded build tools
 
B: Package Supply Chain
- Actors:
  - Package Originator: Original supplier of a package represented by an SPDX document - likely (but not always) the creator
  - Intermediate Packager: person or entity that redistributes an original package with its own SPDX document
  - End Package Consumer: The consumer of the final package in the supply chain - note that the same entity or person can be both an End Package Consumer and an Intermediate Packager
- Use Cases:
  - simple redistribution
  - package aggregation
  - modified redistribution
  - patches provided to existing (already distributed) package
  - appstore
 
Use Case: embedded source
Givens:
1) Given a pre-existing source tarball (commons-logging-1.1.1.tar.gz) with an SPDX document is available for re-use
2) Given: To build MyApp which re-uses it, commons-logging-1.1.1.tar.gz gets expanded somewhere into the MyApp source tree
 
Problem:
Create an SPDX analysis of MyApp that can reference the pre-existing SPDX document for commons-logging-1.1.1.tar.gz without having to repeat all the info (e.g. every File node...) which was already in the consumed SPDX document.
 
Discussion:
 
  A package supplier includes another open source package in source form (e.g. Apache Jakarta Commons Logging).  The source code is unmodified and intended to be compiled into the final solution by the Package Consumer.  The source code is in a distinct archive file (e.g. commons-logging-1.1.1.tar.gz).  The archive source file would be represented as a single file in the highest level SPDX document.  The archive file would contain an SPDX document representing the embedded source files.  
  Variation: the source code would be in its own distinct subdirectory (e.g. source/java/org/apache/commons/logging/*).  In this variation, the highest level SPDX document would detail all files within the embedded package and the "artifact-of" property would reference the embedded package.
  [Comment: (BillSchineller) - the use case of the supplier handing off a tarball with accompanying (inside or 'sidecar'...) SPDX analysis/doc is the Given.  But the reality is that the consumer must crack it open and expand its contents into the source tree for the build/compile step.   
 
=================
  
Use Case: embedded source with unused contrib library
 Similar to embedded source except there would be source file known to not be compiled into the resultant binaries of the final package, for example the zlib contrib directory.  Solution suggestion: the excluded files could be represented in the SPDX documents with an "unused" property and the license properties for the files would still be represented in the SPDX document (exact mechanism TBD)
 
Use Case: embedded build tools  A Package Supplier includes build utilities (source, scripts, or binaries) which are only used to build the resultant packages.  The specific build tool files are represented in the SPDX document with the appropriate license and and artifact-of property which points to the origin of the tools.  Solution suggestion: A property could designate that this file is used as a tool.
 
Use Case: simple redistribution 
 An Intermediate Packager redistributes an original package without source code modification.  Additional meta data may be supplied by the Intermediate Packager.  Example - Debian packaging.
 
Use Case: package aggregation 
  An Intermediate Packager aggregates several open source packages into a single distribution.  Additional meta data is added.  Example - Linux distribution, Android, Ubuntu, Debian
 
Use Case: modified redistribution 
 An Intermediate Package redistributes a package from the Package Originator with some modifications to the original code.  These modifications may impact the resultant licensing
 
Use Case:  application store - how built and manifest, and how products handled
Pass through provider (Android Market Place, Apple Store), Facebook app?
Downloadable components (clients that are downloadable and resident).
 
Use Case: patches provided to existing (already distributed) package - An existing package with a pre-existing spdx document is patched.  The patch may contain additional licensing information

Sandbox for Sharing Examples, Ideas, etc.

New versions of examples are to be added here:

 

Older versions (and stale) of examples can be found:

 

Candidate spdx.owl (Ontology)

Attaching spdxOWL2.txt  (renamed to spdx.txt so I could attach to wiki)

Also attached spdx_notionalBillEditRDF.txt (renamed to spdx.txt so I could attach to wiki)

spdx_notionalBillEditRDF.txt  validates as RDF against http://www.w3.org/RDF/Validator/  and is meant to have one of each 'tag' in the spec, according to the ontology spdxOWL2.txt

OpenLogic SPDX 1.0 beta examples

Here are some examples generated by OpenLogic.  The are comformant to the 1.0 beta version of the spec. 

Notes

The resulting files are well-formed RDF.  However the graph they produce when parsed as RDF is total gibberish. It appears to be impossible to create a document that both matches the current spec and produces a meaningful RDF graph.

The OpenLogic License Analysis system uses SHA-256 to produce checksums of files. We replaced the SHA1 tag with SHA256 to indicate this.

SPDX Use Case 1

 

Introduction

 

The following use case is presented to help evaluate the SPDX Proposal, DRAFT 20100308. It presents a typical ecosystem, discusses the flow of a facts file within it and the offers some observations. In a future revision, it will be expanded to map the files and other information to the specific fields in a Package Facts File.  

 

Background 

In this use case there are six entities each of which plays a different role.  The project, names and names of individuals are fictional but based on a real open source project and ecosystem.

 

Library A Project

 

  • An individual has created some software he feels is useful to others and decides to license it under an Open Source license. He does that and places it on a web site for download.
  • This is a small library and consists of only a handful of source files including other files such as Makefiles, documentation and test data that support building and testing of the library.
  • Being a simple project, it does not require much maintenance and therefore is updated infrequently.

 

The Project

 

  • The Project is an active community and offers a set of Libraries (for implementing a protocol) that can be integrated by someone into their application. They needed some software and found that Library A did exactly what they wanted.
  • They have incorporated Library A and their community has developed Library B and a Tool which tests both the libraries. The Library B and Tool consist of more than a handful of files including other non source files which support the project like Makefiles, documentation, scripts, test data, and so forth.

 

Company A

 

  • Company A consumes Packages from The Project and has included them with software it has developed as part of a larger offering.
  • Company A has made changes to the source from The Project.

 

 

Company B

 

  • This Company is using what Company A provides to make their own product and adds their own software to it.  
  • Company B has made some changes to the source from Company A.

 

 

Consumer

 

  • The Consumer is receiving a product from Company B.

 

Independent Auditor

 

  • The Independent Auditor is performing an analysis of The Project for Company A and Company B.
  • The Independent Auditor could also have collected the original Package Facts from Library A and The Project in the process of doing the audits.

 

 

[Editorial Note: This Independent Auditor could be a different organization for Company A and B. Also, it is fair to say that this could be two entities? One is an auditing firm and the other a tools vendor. I have combined the two but it can be broken out. ]

 

Use Case Ecosystem

 

 

Library A Project -> The Project  -> Company A -> Company B-> Consumer

Library A                    Library A          Library A’         Library A’

                                    Library B          Library B’          Library B’’

                                    Tool                   Tool

 

     |                                  |                         ^                          ^

     |                                  |                          |                           |

     ------------------------------------------------------------

                                                   |

                                     Independent Auditor

 

 

Flow of the Package Fact Files in the Ecosystem

 

 

Library A Project

 

  • Library A creates a package facts file that is downloaded as part of the release.
  • Library A is small so the individual maintaining it hand creates the Package Facts before every release.

 

The files which make up Library A are described in the table below.

 

File

Copyright in the file

License Text in the file

Exception

a1.c

Josh Brown

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php

See Exception 1

a2.c

Josh Brown

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php

See Exception 1

a3.c

Josh Brown

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php

See Exception 1

a4.c

Josh Brown

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php

See Exception 1

Makefile

None specified

None specified

None specified

testdata.txt

None specified

None specified

None specified

readme

None specified

None specified

None specified

Package Facts

Josh Brown

None specified

None specified

 

Exception 1 – This is part of each BSD license header and reads 
“The license and distribution terms for any publically available 
version or derivative of this code cannot be changed.  i.e. this 
code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution 
license including the GNU Public License.”

 

The Project

 

  • The Project has three separate Package Facts files: one for the tool, one for Library A and one for Library B.
  • This allows for distribution of the Facts file for each piece (package) or in the case of the full download each piece would have its own.
  • The Project has not modified Library A and is happy to pass along Library A’s Package Fact and they do so.
  • The Project creates their own Facts file for Library B and the Tool.
  • The Project likes to automate things so they have put keywords in their source and can use these to generate the Facts file.

 

[Editorial note: okay we can question why they did not automate the generation of the facts from Library A but it’s more interesting that they did not and there are likely many scenarios where facts will be re-used].

 

Library B and the Tool contain the following source files.

 

Library B Source Files (sampling for illustrative purposes)

File

Copyright in the file

License Text in the file

Exception

b1.c

A. Glass, Company C

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.php

None specified

b2.c

I. Will

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.php

None specified

b3.c

T. Brown

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.php

None specified

Makefile

None specified

None specified

None specified

script

None specified

None specified

None specified

readme

None specified

None specified

None specified

NOTICE

Apache Software Foundation, A. Glass, Company C, I. Will, T. Brown

None specified

None specified

Package Facts

The Project

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.php

None specified

 

Tools Source Files (sampling for illustrative purposes)

File

Copyright in the file

License Text in the file

Exception

Tool1.c

Many

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.php

None specified

Tool2.c

Many

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.php

None specified

Makefile

None specified

None specified

None specified

readme

None specified

None specified

None specified

Binary data File

None specified

None specified

None specified

doc.html

The Project

http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/

None specified

NOTICE

Many

None Specified

None specified

Package Facts

Josh Brown

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.php

None specified

 

 

Company A

 

  • Company A brought in the source from The Project.
  • They use the Package Facts from The Project and an Independent Auditor to help in analyzing The Project so they understand what their obligations are with respect to the licenses (e.g. redistribution of source, attribution, etc).
  • Company A has modified both libraries. It updates the existing Package Facts for each. Since Company A does have the same tool as The Project it hand edits the existing Facts files.
  • Company A did not modify the tool so they re-convey the existing Package Facts for the tool.

 

The files which now make up Library A are described in the table below.

 

File

Copyright in the file

License Text in the file

Exception

a1.c

Josh Brown, Company A

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php

See Exception 1

a2.c

Josh Brown

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php

See Exception 1

a3.c

Josh Brown

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php

See Exception 1

a4.c

Josh Brown, Company A

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php

See Exception 1

Makefile

None specified

None specified

None specified

testdata.txt

None specified

None specified

None specified

readme

None specified

None specified

None specified

Package Facts

Josh Brown, Company A

None specified

None specified

 

The files which now make up Library B Source Files (sampling for illustrative purposes)

File

Copyright in the file

License Text in the file

Exception

b1.c

A. Glass, Company C

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.php

None specified

b2.c

I. Will, Company A

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.php

None specified

b3.c

T. Brown

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.php

None specified

Makefile

None specified

None specified

None specified

script

None specified

None specified

None specified

readme

None specified

None specified

None specified

NOTICE

Apache Software Foundation, A. Glass, Company C, I. Will, T. Brown, Company A

None specified

None specified

Package Facts

The Project, Company A

http://www.opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.php

None specified

 

 

Company B

 

  • Company B gets the packages from Company A.
  • They use the Package Facts from Company A and an Independent Auditor to help in analyzing the unique instances of the packages to help them understand what their obligations are with respect to the licenses (e.g. redistribution of source, attribution, etc).
  • Company B wants to create an attribution document they can ship with their product (since it has binaries). They use information from the Package Facts to do this; as an example, to get the list of copyright holders.

 

[Editorial Note: Company B was not shown modifying the Facts Files and passing on to the consumer. They certainly could have done that though.]

 

 

Analysis and Observations

 

[Editorial Note: This section of the document is for use in analysis of the use case.]

 

The flow of the Fact files and who modified them, according to the example above, is shown by the table below.

 

Package Fact

Library A Project

The Project

Company A

Company B

Independent Auditor

Library A

Original

Re-conveys

Modifies

Modifies, Consumes or Re-conveys

Modifies version in source it examines

Library B

N/A

Original

Modifies

Modifies, Consumes or Re-conveys

Modifies version in source it examines

Tool

N/A

Original

Re-conveys

Modifies, Consumes or Re-conveys

Modifies version in source it examines

 

 

In some of the observations below, a best practice is recommended. I think it is a good idea for the proposal to contain them (even in a separate document).  Listing best practices will help to clarify expected behavior which can not be captured in the facts fields alone and should help to create fewer variations on a theme.

 

In this use case, the Package Facts travelled with the Package vs. being centralized in one location.  While the current proposal does not preclude either approach it would seem useful to examine both as each has advantages and disadvantages and may affect the types of fields we need in the proposal. I am thinking the options could be something like: Facts follow a Package, Centralized but the distributor of a Package posts the Facts file for all to see (and comment or possibly update), Centralized but a common entity posts the facts files for all to see (and comment or possibly update). There may be more variations. This is a good area for someone to do an analysis with the pros and cons.

 

When I asked about the use case one of the responses was how would this information be collected and put into a facts file. It is a fair question but I think the answer would be that one size does not fit all.  Instead I propose we re-focus the question and look at the “facts” that we convey and make sure that we allow for the maximum opportunity to automate the their generation (for example, if it were me I would put some doxygen keywords in the source files and call it a day). Information used for the facts like copyright holders for a file may change frequently for very active projects. Without the opportunity to automate I believe larger projects will die under the weight of this and that the information will not be as accurate due to the number of files, etc that need to be documented.

 

Should the information in a facts file be taken at face value or does the receiver need to decode the package and double check it?  If you have to re-decode the entire package I am not sure of the value of a facts value (this should help entities receiving the Package to better understand it is licensing). This level of “reliability” is a key point and may not entirely emerge until the standard matures but we should be cognizant of it and make sure that we do not over specify things (i.e. keep it simple). That said it is fair to dig further if something does not seem right. 

 

What if the facts file from a project is incorrect? This could range from minor typos, to missing file declarations, etc. It is entirely possible that in the course of someone analyzing the files they find some of these things. What should they do at that point? Do they correct it; do they place something in the Independent Audit block? We should specify the behavior or maybe a best practice. The value of this is especially important as we mature the standard so having expectations would be a good thing.

 

There is currently no way to capture the exception for Library A in the facts file. It is possible it will be listed as a unique license in which case Company A or any of the downstream recipients could have gone to the source file but then I think we are assuming people will get the license field right for the way we intended it to be used. If Library A had listed it as BSD this may not have happened?

 

Would it be useful to have multiple audit blocks in one facts file? What if The Project had audited the Facts and Company A had audited the facts. It would also be useful to see who made what comments and why at each stage.

 

It would seem that there could be multiple versions of a Facts File for a particular Package and you could even use Facts files to see a history of the Package (assuming we have a way to track that inside). This seems useful for Company A or Company B when doing the analysis as they can see the original file. For example, if Company A did an independent audit of Library A and the Independent Audit Entity did one as well it would be like getting a second opinion on the package which seems useful.

 

Are Package Facts only created on a formal release a package? If not, what happens if you access the package through a SCCS like GIT or SVN to get the working tip? Would the facts file be completely up to date?  Maybe we do not need to worry about this, but I will throw it out there anyway. This could also be handled through some sort of best practice.

 

Company B wants to create a single attribution document for their release. In this example that is somewhat of a trivial exercise. In reality they need to mash 30-40+ packages in a consumer product of any size. If the various fact files they want to mash are under different and potentially incompatible licenses this may hamper their ability to do so.

 

In large distributions where some projects assemble other open source it seems reasonable that a package facts would follow the packages they bundle like they did in this example of The Project using the one from Library A. The organization pulling in these packages could mash them in some way but it if they do not, do we want to specify any guidelines on how to communicate how many there are, where they are, etc. We may want to document some best practices along with the proposal so they are easily discoverable, etc. 

 

 

Sample (partial) SPDX file for Geronimo

 

Geronimo Sample for SPDX

April 14, 2010

 

This is a sample of what Geronimo would look like under current spec.  Note that I have not provided all of the data – since it would be very large, but just some samples so we can see how it looks.

 

IDENTIFICATION

Version: 1.0

UniqueID: 123456789abcdef

Tool: OSSDeepDiscovery

Tool: FOSSology

Manual: OpenLogic

Reviewed by: Jane Doe

Created: 20100315-HH:MM:SS

 

Issues

  • Will likely have used multiple tools as well as manual review to create this list.  Need to have a way to include all of those.
  • For “manual”, we may want a company name – not a person’s name
  • As packages get passed up the supply chain, it may be modified or added to by multiple people, companies, tools – how do we manage that? 
  • Do we want to include the field names – or just the value?
  • It’s not 100% clear what “reviewed by” means.  Do we really need it?

 

OVERVIEW

Formal Name: Geronimo

Package Identifier: geronimo-jetty6-javaee5-2.1.4-bin.tar.gz

Official Source Location: http://geronimo.apache.org/downloads.html

Declared License: Apache-2.0

Licenses Present:

Academic-2.1

Apache-1.1

Apache-2.0

Bouncy Castle 

BSD

BSD (3 clause)

CDDL

CDDL-1.0

CPL-1.0

CDDL or GPL-2.0 with classpath exception

Dojo

JSON

Jtidy

MIT (modern style with sublicense)

Public Domain

Sun Binary Code License for JDK

Sun Community Source License Version 2.3

W3C-Software

Copyright Holder: The Apache Software Foundation

Copyright Holder: The Dojo Foundation

Copyright Date of Package: 2003-2009 (for ASF)

Copyright Date of Package: 2005-2008 (for Dojo)

 

Issues

  • There doesn’t seem to be any information about what open source packages the additional licenses are associated with.  Do we want that?  Many of the additional licenses come from “bundled” packages.  Knowing what package it is can be helpful, but we don’t show that
  • Where should actual license text go?
  • Copyright holder and Copyright Date can be problematic – since there may be multiple.  What does it mean to have a single one?  Should we list them all here?  Need to align which copyright holders and dates go together. 
  • Should we be listing copyright for other bundled packages?
  • For non-ASF projects, this will get even more complicated.
  • All of the highlighted licenses don’t have a short name in Fedora.  Would we want all of those to be “Other”
  • There are a bunch of other notices/copyrights – how should those be handled?

 

 

DETAILS

 

File Name:

assemblies/geronimo-boilerplate-minimal/LICENSES.TXT

assemblies/geronimo-boilerplate-minimal/src/main/underlay/var/config/README.TXT

assemblies/geronimo-jetty6-javaee5/LICENSE.txt

assemblies/geronimo-jetty6-minimal/LICENSE.txt

assemblies/geronimo-tomcat6-javaee5/LICENSE.txt

buildsupport/buildsupport-maven-plugin/LICENSE.txt

buildsupport/geronimo-assembly-archetype/LICENSE.txt

plugins/connector/geronimo-connector-builder/src/test/resources/database.rar

etc….

File Type:  How do we handle this at directory level where there may be multiple types

License: Apache-2.0

Copyrights: Various??? Do we want to list all of them?

 

File Name:

buildsupport/car-maven-plugin/src/main/java/org/apache/geronimo/mavenplugins/car/AbstractCarMojo.java!/java.io.BufferedOutputStream

File Type:  source

License: Sun Binary Code License for JDK

Copyrights: Sun Microsystems

 

File Name:

buildsupport/geronimo-maven-plugin/src/main/java/org/apache/geronimo/mavenplugins/geronimo/ServerProxy.java!/javax.management.remote.JMXServiceURL

File Type:  source

License: Sun Community Source License Version 2.3

Copyrights: Sun Microsystems

 

File Name:

buildsupport/car-maven-plugin/src/main/java/org/apache/geronimo/mavenplugins/car/CreatePluginListMojo.java!/org.xml.sax.SAXException

File Type:  source

License: Public Domain

Copyrights: ??

 

 

File Name:

buildsupport/testsuite-maven-plugin/src/main/java/org/apache/geronimo/mavenplugins/testsuite/ResultsSummaryMojo.java!/org.w3c.dom.Document

File Type:  ????

License: W3C

Copyrights: ??

 

 

Issues:

  • We can have lots of files and directories that are spread all over the project that fall under one license, but are of different types and copyrights.   Do we need different blocks for each of these?  Or can we list multiple files/directories
  • Do we really want to list every file here?
  • Do we just show exceptions to the Declared license
  • Do we need copyrights down to the file level? Or just an aggregated list?
  • With license.txt files or copying files, are we applying the license automatically to every file in the directory?  The sub directory?
  • The file type is not easy – doesn’t the file name tell us that?  Can we drop that field
  • I think we should reorient around licenses – list the licenses and then a set of files associated with them….creating a
  •  definitive list of files for a license is not straightforward since you may have a licenses.txt file in a directory
  • Where does the actual license text go?

 

Sample RDF File for Apache Tomcat (section 3)

Attached is an example of an RDF file for Apache Tomcat section 3 only.  Also attached is an example of a DOAP RDF document for the same package.

How to Handle Licenses in SPDX


Handling of Licenses IDs (Short names)

  • We have proposed using the Fedora short names
  • We have also looked at the Debian naming scheme
  • There are a couple of key differences
  • Version handling

1. Fedora builds versions into the short name, but it is done in a non-standardized way that seems to vary from license to license, eg

  • ASL 1.0  (for Apache 1.0)
  • AGPLv1  (for Affero GPL v1)
  • CeCill (for both Cecill v1.1 and v2)

2. Debian proposes a standard way – “license name-version”, eg

  • GPL-2
  • Apache-2

3. Both Fedora and Debian also use standard way to deal with the “and later” version options by using a “+”, eg

  • GPL-2+ (debian)
  • GPLv2+ (Fedora)

4.    Suggested Solution for SPDX

  • I believe we should have a standard way to handle versions for SPDX.  I would suggest going with the Debian approach or something similar.  This would entail slightly modifying the Fedora short names where they do not follow the standard
  • I’m not sure if there is some reason why Fedora hasn’t standardized this.

Handling of “standard” exceptions is different

  1. Fedora just uses a term that is “with exceptions”  They don’t tell you which exceptions.  The result is that a short name “GPLv3 with exceptions”  is used for both the classpath and font exceptions.  This seems to create ambiguity.
  2. Debian proposes naming the common exception – with the following syntax
  • GPL-2+ with classpath exception
  • GPL-2+ with font exception

3.    Suggested Solution for SPDX

  • I believe we should use the Debian approach for common “approved” exceptions such as the 2 mentioned for GPL

Spaces in short name

  1. Fedora has spaces in the short names
  2. Debian does not  (they do have spaces when they do “with exceptions”

3.    Suggested Solution for SPDX

  • I would ask the technical people if this will be problematic having spaces when we want to automatically parse these files. 

 

Handling of multiple licenses

  1. Both Fedora and Debian use “ands” and “ors” when there are multiple licenses associated with a pkg. 
  • “and” when you must comply with the terms of all the licenses because parts of the package or file are under difference  licenses
    • artistic-1 and gpl-2
    • “or” when you get to choose a license
      • artistic-1 or gpl-2

2. Both Fedora and Debian address the combining of ors and ands.

  •  
    • Use parentheses when needed
    • (artistic-1 or gpl-2) and lgpl=1.1
    • “and” takes precedence
    • GPL-2+ with font exception

3.    Suggested Solution for SPDX

  • Follow the same rules

 

 

Handling of license variations

  1. There are several licenses that have “variations”.  MIT and BSD are examples of this.  These situations are handled differently by Fedora and Debian.
  2. Fedora
  • For MIT, Fedora treats a bunch of the MIT variations as “functionally equivalent” and uses the short name “MIT” to refer to all of them.  They have a page listing all of the MIT variants and the actual text. https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Licensing/MIT
  • For BSD, Fedora seems to have different short names for each of the variants, eg
    • BSD License (original) = short name “BSD with advertising”
    • BSD License (no advertising) which is a 3 clause version and BSD License (two clause)  both = short name of “BSD”
    • BSD Protection License = short name of “BSD Protection”
    • Academy of Motion Picture Arts and Sciences BSD = “AMPAS BSD”

3. Debian

  • For MIT, Debian says that it is “problematic”  and hasn’t addressed it .  They have no short name for MIT yet.
  • For BSD, Debian has a short name for BSD, but it’s unclear how the variants are handled

4.    Suggested Solution for SPDX

  • This one is a little complicated.  I think for any situation where we have different variants of a license, they should have different short names.  Fedora has done this to some extent, but in some cases (like BSD 2 and 3-clause) they have combined it to use one short name.   This would require us to stray from the short names of Fedora.
  • The other question is what do you do with “other” variants that don’t have a unique short name.  Some people use “BSD-like” or terms such as that.  I know some people don’t like that.   It seems that for now the most accurate approach would be either to give a variant it’s own short name, or tag it as an “Other” license.

 

 

Sandbox for Tools

RDF to Spreadsheet Translator

Attached is the RDFToSpreadsheet tool.  See the tools documentation http://spdx.org/wiki/draft-spdx-tool-doc-beta for information on usage.

Updated - 5/9/2011 to include the latest spec changes related to NONE and NOASSERTION values

Note: This page will be moved to spdx.org/tools once the tool output has been reviewed.

Attachments: 

SPDX Viewer

Attached is the SPDX Viewer application.  See the tools documentation http://spdx.org/wiki/draft-spdx-tool-doc-beta for information on usage.

Updated - 5/9/2011 to include the latest spec changes related to NONE and NOASSERTION values.

Note: This page will be moved to spdx.org/tools once the tool output has been reviewed.

Attachments: 

Spreadsheet To RDF Translator

Attached is the SpreadsheetToRDF Tool. See the tools documentation http://spdx.org/wiki/draft-spdx-tool-doc-beta for information on usage.

Updated - 5/9/2011 to include the latest spec changes related to NONE and NOASSERTION values

Note: This page will be moved to spdx.org/tools once the tool output has been reviewed.

Ideas for After 1.0 of Spec

This is a placeholder for tabling items that are not going to make it into first version but we want to discuss further for subsequent versions of the spec.

  • Create a version of the specification that can be included inside a package.   Note the problem is that the uniquie ID of the package (SHA1) field has to be taken over the entire package, and if the analysis is part of it, we can't include the SHA1 of the package. (requested by package creators, to carry forward with package, keep accurate).
  • Incorporate an optional MD5 checksum field at package level to permit correllation to other existing analysis of a package (requested for consideration by Bill S.)
  • Further simplification of RDF - make more human writable friendly.  (requested for consideration by Kate S.)
  • In detected licenses, consider adding counts per license (requested by Bill S.)
  • == Brought up during 7/22 meeting ==
  • How to detect licenses where synonyms are used in licenses; "package" instead of "software", for example. Can this be handled by templating? British vs. English spelling, too!
  • How do we want to deal with JAR files? They can contain dependency info, licenses, etc - and how do they relate to their source files?
  • How to deal with the case where the license is NOT part of the distribution, but is (for example) on the project web site.
  • Variations of licenses - BSD and MIT
  • 8/5 Kim W - we should consider adding disjunctive licenses to the Detected License field on the package.  This would be helpful when you are looking at the Detected Licenses to give you a summary of licenses because you would be able to tell that there is a choice to make without having to examine every single file license.
  • 8/5 Kim W - we should consider adding an optional field to the file section to identify the Component that the file (and license) came from.  This would be helpful because the reviewer could better understand where the license info came from, validate things with developers, and do research on the project.

Rough proposal for provenance; hierarchy and aggregation; and supply chain friendliness in SPDX 2.0

A desire has been expressed to be able to have SPDX be capable of expressing

 

  1. Provenance (we can know precisely who said what and when about a package)
  2. Hiearchy and Aggregation ( package A contains packages B, C, etc)
  3. How software flows through a supply chain (upstream to packager, through several intermediate vendors to consumer)

A rough example of this thought is shown in the diagram below, showing how the coreutils package might be represented:

 

 The simple story behind this diagram is this:

  1. The upstream maintainer of coreutils provides an SPDX file which
    1. Provides information for the copyrighted entity that is the package as a whole
    2. Provides embedded information for the copyrighted entity that is each file in the package (same format, just embedded and clearly down hiearchy)
    3. Provides a coreutils.spdx.sig file with the signature for the coreutils.spdx file (so we can authenticate it)
  2. This coreutils.spdx file is in the coreutils.tar.gz for the upstream
  3. The rpm (or deb) packager creates a coreutils.spdx (distinct from the one for the upstream) in the rpm file which:
    1. Provides information for the copyrighted entity that is the rpm (or deb) package as a whole
    2. Provides embedded information for the copyrighted entity that is each file (such as patch files) contained in the rpm (or deb) package
    3. For the coreutils.tar.gz file (also contained in the rpm or deb package), provides it's SPDX information by *referencing* the coreutils.spdx in the coreutils.tar.gz file.
    4. Optionally provides and Annotation section to 'annotate' some of the information provided by the coreutils upstream.

 

Diagram for a Concrete proposal (very very rough) for structure (note, notes that say 'Concrete' or 'Referential' are just indicating an 'or' in the doc structure):

 

Description of diagram

  • Top: Simple top level place to start
  • SPDXFile: File containing SPDX data
  • SPDXElement: The containing element for SPDX data for a given copyrightable work contained in the SPDXFile.  It's SPDXElements all the way down.
  • Specifier: Not really a node, sort of a grouper of nodes to indicate those fields which specify the 'thing' the SPDX Element is about
  • LicenseData: not really a node, sort of a grouper of nodes to indicate those fields which specify what we know about the 'thing' this SPDX Element is about
  • SPDXElements: zero or more additional 'contained' SPDX Elements referring to contained things (like files, or contained tarballs etc).
  • Annotations: zero or more annotations indicating additional information about the contained SPDXElements (to handle the case where a contained SPDX Element represents a reference to a another SPDX file that is signed and thus we can't change directly) - Note, we need more thought here.
  • Creator (Annotation): Equivalent to SPDX 1.0 Creation Information Creator
  • Date (Annotation): Equivalent to SPDX 1.0 Creation Information Created
  • Comment (Annotation): Equivalent to SPDX 1.0 Creation Information Creator Comment
  • AssertNewLicense (Annotation): Reference to new License Data you wish to assert to override existing SPDX License Data.  Generally used in situations when we have existing License Data from a more primary source but we believe we have reason to believe otherwise.
  • Name: Equivalent to SPDX 1.0 Formal Name
  • Version: Equivalent to SPDX 1.0 Package Version Information
  • Supplier: Equivalent to SPDX 1.0 Package Supplier
  • Summary: Equivalent to SPDX 1.0 Package Summary Description
  • Description: Equivalent to SPDX 1.0 Package Detailed Description
  • URI (in SPDXElement->Specifier): URI of the copyrightable thing being referenced, may point to a file, an archive, a package, etc.
  • URICheckSum( in SPDXElement->Specifier): Checksum for the thing URI points to
  • CopyrightText: Equivalent to SPDX 1.0 CopyrightText
  • LicenseText: Full text of license if LicenseShortForm isn't available
  • LicenseShortForm: License short form in lew of license text if available
  • SPDXFileURI: If the SPDX Element does not contain it's own concrete license data but references an external SPDX File... the URI of that SPDXFile
  • SPDXFileSigURI: If the SPDX Element references an external SPDXFile, the URI of the sig file for that SPDX file
  • ACL: I hate the name ACL, but basically it's a way of specifying that you are including or excluding some of the copyrightable bits that are covered by the referenced SPDX File.
  • Exclude (in ACL): Used to specify parts of the stuff referenced by the external SPDX file you are not bring in.  So if I am using all of a package, but not foo.c or bar.c.
  • ExcludeAll (in ACL): Used to indicate that *none* of the referenced copyrightable items from the SPDX file are used except those explicitely included.
  • Include (in ACL): Used after an excludeall to indicate we are only using the specifically included files... say we are just using foobar.c for example.
  • SPDXFileSig: Separate file containing the signature for the octets of the SPDXFile 

 

This can also be visualized with a UMLish diagram:

 

Mapping SPDX 1.0 Fields to Proposal

SPDX 1.0SPDX 2.0 ProposalNotes
SectionFieldElementAttribute 
Document InformationVersionSPDXVersion
Document InformationData License  TBD
Creation InformationCreatorAnnotationCreator 
Creation InformationCreatedAnnotationDate 
Creation InformationCommentAnnotationComment 
Package InformationFormal NameConcrete SpecifierName 
Package InformationPackage Version InformationConcrete SpecifierVersion 
Package InformationPackage File Name  If the SPDX data is outside the package, then this can be specified with a contained SPDX Element with a Referential Specifier, if the SPDX information is inside the package, otherwise this field is undesirable.
Package InformationPackage SupplierConcrete SpecifierSupplier 
Package InformationPackage Originator  Note: As the SPDX 2.0 proposal correctly handles the notion of 'things' being repackaged along the way via nesting, this field is no longer necessary. The coreutils.tar.gz upstream is the supplier for coreutils.tar.gz. Someone like Fedora could be the supplier for coreutils.rpm, which would refer to the SPDX data from coreutils.tar.gz. Full provenance abrogates the need for this field.
Package InformationPackage Download Location  TBD
Package InformationPackage Verification Code  SPDX Sig File + Referential Specifier URIChecksum
Package InformationPackage Checksum  TBD
Package InformationSource Information  Handle as an Annotation
Package InformationConcluded LicenseLicense Data Note: Concluding a license different than what is declared upstream of you is handled via Annotations
Package InformationAll Licenses Information From Files  Handled by SPDX Element Nesting, not even desirable in a world where an upstream consumer may choice to pick some but not all of the contained parts
Package InformationDeclared LicenseLicense Data  
Package InformationComments on License  Handle as an Annotation
Package InformationCopyright Text  TBD
Package InformationPackage Summary DescriptionConcrete SpecifierSummary 
Package InformationPackage Detailed DescriptionConcrete SpecifierDescription 
Other License Information DetectedIdentifier Assigned  TBE
Other License Information DetectedExtracted TextLicense Data TBE
File InformationFile NameReferential SpecifierURI 
File InformationFile Type  TBD
File InformationFile ChecksumReferential SpecifierURIChecksum 
File InformationConcluded LicenseLicense Data  
File InformationLicense Information in FileLicense Data  
File InformationComment on License  Handled by Annotations
File InformationCopyright Text  TBD
File InformationArtifact of Project Name  TBD
File InformationArtifact of Project Homepage  TBD
File InformationArtifact of Project URI  TBD
Review InformationReviewerAnnotationCreatorHandled by SPDX nesting and Annotations.
Review InformationReview DateAnnotationDateHandled by SPDX nesting and Annotations.
Review InformationCommentsAnnotationCommentHandled by SPDX nesting and Annotations.

 

 

Stealing Java's archive URI syntax:

In the java world, they commonly use a URI syntax <archivename>!<filename> to indicate a particular file within an archive, for example foo.tar.gz!bar.c.  I suggest we use this (as there are no other widespread alternatives).

Archiving multiple SPDX files:

It may be desirable to archive together multiple SPDX files so that we have full resolvability for a given package.  In that case, those should be rolled into a specific archive format (say foo.spdx.zip) with the various spdx files, their sig files, and an index file.  The index file should map URIs (as specified the SPDX files) to filenames in the archive (so we can resolve them).

 

Example:

file://coreutils.tar.gz!coreutils.spdx: file://upstream/coreutils.spdx

file://coreutils.tar.gz!coreutils.spdx.sig file://upstream/coreutils.spdx.sig

Note: We have to also solve the problem here of how to distinguish when two spdx files contain the same URI (say relative to their archives) but they actually need to be resolved to separate files in the rollup, say if both upstream and the rpm (or deb) packager used file://coreutils.spdx 

 

SDPX 2.0 Provenance

Provenance

 

It is desirable to be able to know the provenance of SPDX data.  This means being able to reliably know who declared what SPDX information when, and where applicable, for what reason.

 

Components of SPDX Provenance include

  1. Signing of SPDX Data

 

 

SPDX Data Signing

Since SPDX Data can be represented in both RDF and Tag, and since there is no standard mechanism for signing RDF or Tag data as such (as there is in DSig for XML), we are left to fall back to signing the octets of the file containing that SPDX data. This has a few implications:

  1. The signature must be a in a separate file from the SPDX file (Example: foo.spdx has foo.spdx.sig containing it's signature)
  2. The SPDX file, once signed, must not be changed by downstream consumers of the file (because to change its octets would be to invalidate the signature).

 

SPDX Signing Proposal

SPDX files should optionally be signed using RFC 2440 PGP ascii-armored detached signatures.

GPG Example:Sign a file with GPGsjc-vpn2-814:~ hagbard$ gpg --armor --output example.txt.sig --detach-sig example.txt

You need a passphrase to unlock the secret key for user: "Ed Warnicke " 1024-bit DSA key, ID 9AB88650, created 2001-09-09 See signature filesjc-vpn2-814:~ hagbard$ cat example.txt.sig -----BEGIN PGP SIGNATURE----- Version: GnuPG/MacGPG2 v2.0.17 (Darwin) Comment: GPGTools - http://gpgtools.org

iEYEABECAAYFAk9NCpUACgkQpqzn7Jq4hlA3cACfUOxrlkISMjjLELGlLQuNn93h X6wAniliWFVoi7qfRGI79hwdLhajKcdI =0NsF -----END PGP SIGNATURE-----

Verify file with GPG

sjc-vpn2-814:~ hagbard$ gpg --verify example.txt.sig example.txt gpg: Signature made Tue Feb 28 11:10:45 2012 CST using DSA key ID 9AB88650 gpg: Good signature from "Ed Warnicke " gpg: aka "Ed Warnicke " Primary key fingerprint: 0B87 BC4A F6BF F571 FF9B BF51 A6AC E7EC 9AB8 8650 Implementation Notes:

GPG is available for Linux, Mac, and Windows and provides PGP support. PGP support is available via the Legion of the Bouncy Castle in Java, and they provide an example DetachedSignatureProcessor in their openpgp examples section.

Technical Team Meeting Minutes

Meeting Minutes for the Technical Team are posted here:

2010-11-16-TechnicalTeamMinutes

2010-11-16 Weekly Technical Team Meeting

Attendees:

Kate Stewart, Bill Schineller, Peter Williams, Gary O'Neall

 

Topics:

  • we now have a mailing list for technical team (thanks Kate)  self-register at http://spdx.org/wiki/spdx/spec-development  (click the 'mailing list here' link http://lists.spdx.org/mailman/listinfo/spdx-tech  )
  • Peter reviewed the re-vamped structure of spec.html currently maintained in master branch of his github repo at https://github.com/pezra/spdx-spec    spec.html has directives for the rake task to include contents of section_2,3,4,5  such that one html file is generated with the complete ontology.  Team asked that the generated file also get committed (to lower the barrier of entry for someone wishing to look at the rendered html during development)
  • Reviewed Peter's writeup of the composite license proposal at http://spdx.org/wiki/proposal-2010-10-21-4-composite-licensing    Team agreed the "OrLater" concept in the proposal best be split out into a separate proposal.  Bill asked technical question about whether the references to standard spdx licenses should use rdf:resource vs. rdf:Description... rdf:about   Bill asked whether the e.g. DisjunctiveLicenseSet should itself be a subclass of spdx:License; Peter's recommendation was that it be another object in the range of properties which currently have License in their range.
  • Mozilla Tri-License usage scenario for composite license.  Proposal shows its usage in Package/Declared and Discovered licenses.  How to avoid repeating for every File object in a) RDF format and b) tag-value format?  Kate noted that if the 'Mozilla Tri-License' is well known to exist in the wild, then it is a good candidate for inclusion in the SPDX license list.  But more generally, team agreed it would be good form if a 'composite license' is encountered to model it once within the NonStandardLicense section of the SPDXDoc with a locally unique id and reference it from other places within the document.
  • re: the artifactOf proposal, Kate noted that the tag-value example was unclear.  Peter and Kate discussed a convention...
  • Peter raised idea of additional properties between licenses such as 'laterVersionOf'
  • Bill asked about use case of SPDX analysis reporting the discovery of a phrase like "This file is licensed under the GPL' - clearly too ambiguous to map to one of the standard SPDX licenses, but perhaps of interest to consumer of an SPDX doc.  With current spec, *could* report such as a NonStandardLicense whenever encountered.  Raised idea (in future rev of spec?) of modeling license 'families' as an additional way to express associations between licenses, and allow reporting such a discovery in a standard way.
  •  Time expired on the meeting.

2010-11-30-TechnicalTeamMinutes

SPDX RDF/Technical meeting Minutes 11/30/2010:

Attendees:

Bill Schineller

Gary O'Neall

Peter Williams

Kate Stewart

zLib example discussion:

Discussion on the whether the SPDX Doc is necessary.  Led to a discussion on having the SPDX Doc contain multiple packages which led to a discussion whether we were constraining the model to a flat model.  Decided to table the discussion for version 2.

Discussion on the file being associated to a package - Section 5.5 - need to have a property to associate the file with the package.  Needed to have the RDF parse properly and to have the graph represent the file relationships properly

Discussion on non-standard licenses - should it be within the package or at the SPDX Doc level.

Three possibilities - "describes license" creates a separate license resource not associated with the SPDX doc or package; a property of the SPDX doc; property of the package

Discussed the pro's and cons of different approaches.  Technically, all three approaches are similar in that the non-standard license will only be valid within the specific SPDX doc (and there is only one package per SPDX doc).  Several people felt that the non-standard license should be associated with the analysis - perhaps leading to it being associated with the SPDX doc.

Actions:

Gary to writeup a proposal for hasFile belonging to a package (section 5.5)

Peter to write up the alternatives for the non-standard licenses

Kate to write up a proposal for field to be added for the validation of entire package

2010-12-21 Technical Team Minutes

SPDX Technical Call
12/21/2010

Attendees:
Bill Schineller
Gary O'Neall
Peter Williams
Kate Stewart

Review of previous meetings

RDF to Tag notation - Kate to provide a grammer.  Will include the zlib example in the tag/value format

Key discussion point is how the implicit section boundaries will impact forward compatibility (issue 589)

Review of issues recorded in the issue tracking

Issue 590 - How individual files are referenced:
 - Discussed use cases for having a unique reference to a file
 - Discussed whether we should have a single URL for a file
 - Agreed that in the RDF, there needs to be a single URI (whether created by conventions or auto

generated in rdf/xml)
 - Discussed an approach we feel will have merit where the tag/value format has 2 tags for a file

(package + file) and we have some documented conventions for converting between these 2 tags and the RDF

file URI

 - We can use the example created for the tag notation to solidify the proposal

Discussion on the repository
 - git repositories have been setup - the ontology
 - Master will be the official version of the spec
 - Proposal to have a post-commit rake task create the ontology

Need the appendices added to the git repository

Peter will send out an email on how to pull down the spdx-spec from the git repo

All - review the spdx-spec and document any questions/issues

2011-01-11-TechnicalTeamMinutes

SPDX Technical Call
1/11/2011

Attendees:
Bill Schineller
Gary O'Neall
Peter Williams
Kate Stewart
Ann Thornton


Agenda:
 - Infrastructure status
 - Differentiation a judgment from a fact
 - Model for representing a judgment
 - DEP 5

Infrastructure status:
 - Git up and running for both SPDX spec and pretty printer
 - Bugzilla up and running

Request to integrate SPDX mailing list with Bugzilla
 Some concern about keeping too much of the comments in Bugzilla if replies to email are added to the 
bugs - will pick discussion after we find out if the David can set this up (Peter already sent in the 
request)
 Should have the default cc on the Bugzilla notifications be the SPDX mailing list

Discussion on posting information to the larger SPDX distribution list
 Bill will send meeting announcements to the larger general distribution list

Differentiating judgment from fact
 - discussion (not all details not captured)
 - agree that when something is stated in a file, it is a fact the file contains that statement
 - discussion on whether conclusions from various stated licenses are also facts or judgments
 - different interpretation what the file level license represents - the declared license or the inferred 
license
 - agree file level would distinguish inferred, and detected license
 - add a reason to the inferred license.  Proposal is that this is either an entry from a standardized short set, or else is a free form text field to act as a comment to explain why the inference occured (ie. results of investigations and caveats/justification for inference conclusion).
 - Proposal that the inferred should be a composite license structure.  This proposal should be discussed in the next meeting.

2011-01-18 Technical Team Minutes

Attendees:

 

Bill Schinelle

Gary O'Neall

Peter Williams

Kate Stewart

 

Next week - move time to 4:00PM Eastern

 

- Kate's grammar for the 'tag-value' format / DEB-5

- Gary's slides for tools to be made available

- recap / status of inclusion of new license fields

- Proposal process

 

Grammar Tag-Value / DEB-5

 - Is there a difference between the grammar embedded and the proposed grammar?

                - Similar.  Purpose of Kate's proposal is to resolve ambiguities.

                - Difference in syntax of the grammar - DEB-5 compatibility would require a different grammar

representation

                - Concern about forward compatibility - ability of a version X parser to understand version X+N documents

                - There is a goal to be compatible with the DEB-5 which would lead more to the DEB-5 based grammar

                - Need a way to map between the RDF and tag value and between tag value and RDF

 

Gary's slides for tools to be made available

                - Can the pretty printer output tag-value

                                - Concern about not having a formal parser for the tag-value - could lead to bugs if hand-coded emitter for the tag-value

                                - Gary agreed to prototype a tag-value emitter

                - Gary will ping Kate for the current Spreadsheet format

                - For contribution/feedback switch from emailing spdx.org to use bugzilla

                - Mention that in the spec there will be a grammar and an RDF OWL document

 

recap / status of inclusion of new license fields

                - An asserted license field seems to have achieved consensus

                - Proposal to split the license field into asserted license, "detected" or "seen" license, and a comment field

                - Will continue the proposal process on the spdx-tech mailing list and in bugzilla

2011-01-25 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 1/25/2011

Attendees:

Bill Schineller
Gary O'Neall
Peter Williams
Kate Stewart

Summary of follow-up items from the call:

  • License section - consider renaming non-standard licenses to embedded licenses - has implications on the short form names.  Todo: Kate to follow-up on the proposal. 
  • Document and review the algorithm for creating the xor'd sha1's from the file list
  • Change the description in the source information field in the package section
  • Discuss/decide if the package level asserted license should be optional or mandatory
  • Rename "asserted license" to "asserted licensing"
  • Future topic- should there be additional optional fields for non-standard licenses?
  • Add a comment for the reviewer in the review section
  • Reconcile the tag names with the SPDX overview
  • consider a more consistent naming convention

Minute details:

Review spdx overview slides sent by Kate - purpose to align on the current status of the spec:
 Section Headers in the spec - Reviewer information has been moved to a separate section at the end
 License section - consider renaming non-standard licenses to embedded licenses - has implications on the short form names.  Todo: Kate to follow-up on the proposal.  Note that embedded is somewhat ambiguous - used for "embedded in the package" as opposed to "embedded in the SPDX file"
 Identification section - Version of SPDX - does it make sense in the RDF spec?  Topic for future discussion.
 Identification section - Method of xor for all file sha's to generate overall checksum - need to publish and review the specific algorithm
 The package file sha is optional in case the spdx file is embedded
 Source information - change description to reflect additional information on the source rather than anomalies (e.g. the download URL is no longer available)
 Package level - agree to add asserted license
  Asserted may include logic (and/or disjunctive/etc)
  Seen licenses would just be a list
  Not clear if asserted license at the package level should be mandatory or optional - future discussion
 Copyright - just a string for release 1 of SPDX
 
 Should there be additional optional tags in the non-standard license?  Topic for a future proposal.
 File - Asserted License -> Asserted Licensing (takes care of possibility of multiple licenses)
 File - Seen license - can be multiple licenses
  Cardinality - does it make sense to have a mandatory field that may contain 0 items  - yes since it confirms that "none were found"
 Reviews - should there be a comment for the reviewer?  Yes - add this as an optional field.

Todo: reconcile the tag names with the spdx overview
Need a better naming convention - add to topic for next week's call - suggestion to invite the individual providing the feedback to the call.

2011-02-01 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 2/1/2011

 

Attendees:

Bill Schineller

Gary O'Neall

Peter Williams

Kate Stewart

Marshall Clow

Phil Koltun

 

Pre-meeting discussion on version management of the specification.  Need to work through the remaining issues to get the git version of the spec in sync.  After that, we can modify the process to automatically push out the defects.

Issues review - please refer to the spreadsheet attached to the minutes.  The legend tab describes the priority definitions.

Changes in the spreadsheet from the original proposed priorities:

                587 and 625 should probably be merged

                617 - leave as priority one since the legal team may require

                Move 640, 643, 646 to P1 - these will affect the spec being in sync

                623 - comment field for author of the SPDX document - move to P1 since this is relatively easy

                Need to add a bug to track the implementation of the xor's for all file hashes to create a unique package signiture

                Reference this new bug in bug 593 - the solution referenced above will solve this bug as well

Bill added rought estimates on the effort for the P1 defects

Gary will update bugzilla with all of the priority information from the meeting

From this point forward, all submitters of bugs should assign a priority based ont he following critera:

                1 - Must be resolved for beta

                2 - Want to resolve for beta, but is a must for the release 1 of the spec (e.g. can be resolved after the start of beta)

                3 - Want for release 1

                4 - Target for a future release of the spec

We should assign all P1's - if you see any bugs you would like to work on, please assign it to yourself

Some discussion on the support for tag values in Beta.  We will raise this question in the call with prospective beta sites on Thursday.

2011-02-08 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 2/8/2011

 

Attendees:

 

Bill Schineller

Gary O'Neall

Peter Williams

Kate Stewart

Kirsten Newcomer

 

Three items were discussed during the meeting:

- Bugzilla ID 644 - cardinality of Package Overview Info is missing

- Bugzilla ID 592 - License repo

- Time for next week’s call

 

Bugzilla ID 644:

 

We discussed the implications of nesting in RDF/XML and the impact of any changes to the spec.

 

During the discussion, it was decided that a diagram representing the domain model would be helpful in resolving this and other issues.

 

Kate agree to draw up diagram(s) representing the domain model.

 

Bugzilla ID 592:

We discussed the processes for setting up the license repository.  It was proposed that we use the license spreadsheet to produce RDFA/HTML pages which would populate the repository.

[Note - since the meeting Peter has proposed a modification to the process to retain the formatting of the license text]

 

Peter agreed to produce an example RDFA/HTML document.

 

Gary agreed to write a tool which would translate the spreadsheet into the RDFA/HTML documents.

 

Next week’s call:

Gary will be calling from Hawaii - we agreed to move the call to 1:00 Eastern time to accommodate the time zone differences.

 

Summary of Actions:

 

Kate to draw up diagrams representing the domain model

Peter to draft an RDFA template/document for the license

Gary to write a tool to translate from the spreadsheet to RDFA

 

 

 

2011-02-15 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 2/15/2011

 

Attendees:

 

Ann Thorton

Kristin Newcomer

Bill Schineller

Peter Williams

Kate Stewart

Gary O'Neall

 

Note: Next weeks meeting will be at 1:00 Eastern time

 

Agenda -

 

License Repository (bug ID 592) - review Peter's draft rdfa html

Domain model diagram (fromt the discussion on bug ID 644) - review Kate's diagram (postponed due to time)

 

License Repository:

Review of the web pages:

 - On the summary web page, there are just 2 columns - full name and short form identifier

 - The license detail page would contain the full name, short identifier, other web pages for this license, notes, text, templated version of text, "official header", templated header

 - Template column/field - There was a discussion whether the template text should be a separate field from the text field:

            - Exact format of the abstract license template text TBD

            - Current working guidelines are:

                         - no capitalization

                        - white space condense (single blank represents multiple blanks and tabs)

                        - alternatives denoted as [a|b] for cases of acceptable spelling differences - for instance, british vs american spelling of common word.

                        - [.*] to denote any value is acceptable - for instance, after a copyright statement.

            - Defining the abstract license template format of the license text is out of scope for the technical team, this will come from the legal team.  The technical team will review for technical implement ability.

            - Suggestion that getting FOSSology/Ninka experts to do the review of the the abstract license template syntax, based on what their tools can recognize, and what they do already as part of their matching.   If Open Logic or Black Duck want to contribute information from their recognition algorithms, that would be welcome too. To be discussed in a future meeting once we nail down the format a bit more.

      - legal team agreed that having a separate field for template would be useful (ie. it would be good to have both the official human readable formatted version available on the license detail web page as well as the abstract license template version on the license detail web page.)

            - for now, this template field will default to the same text as the license text

 - no property for for the license name.  In the proposal, dc:title is used for the name – Proposal to for the SPDX spec to include a license name.  Proposal to add this after beta.  To be discussed  

- License ID - should it be generated from the URL or have a separate tag?  [Gary: I think we agreed on it being a property, but I did not confirm this on the call]

 - no property to store the header

 - no property to store abstract license template template

 - no property to store license notes

 - No property to store the other URL’s.  owl:sameas currently used for the other urls in the license, should we add it in the SPDX spec as a separate appendix or in a license specific section.

- Header text (could have multiple headers are in the text).  The data model will support

multiple headers, but we will only use one for now.

- Issues with spreadsheet license text was discussed throughout the call.  There were 2 issues – formatting is lost and some license text is too large for the spreadsheet cell.  A proposal was made to have the spreadsheet license text cell reference a file which would be formatted using HTML tags.

- We also talked about headers, and abstract template versions of the headers.  To keep things sane for beta at least, only a single header will be recognized for each license initially, preferably the official recognized one, if it exists.

 

 

Action: Add the missing properties to the spec.  In general, if there is a column in the license spreadsheet from legal, it should be a property in the spec.

Action: Proposal for the license text column to refer (optionally) to a text file which will be included with the license spreadsheet.

 

2011-02-22 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 2/22/2011

 

Attendees:

 

Kristin Newcomer

Bill Schineller

Peter Williams

Kate Stewart

Gary O'Neall

Marshall Clow

 

Review of last week’s minutes – minutes updated and will be posted to the wiki.

 

Review Kate’s UML diagram:

 

Discussion on the relationship between the SPDX File and the information.  There are basically 2 different conceptual models – one proposed by Kate and a second model where the SPDX Package contains many of the relationships.

 

A discussion on the impact to the tag/value format and to the RDF format was discussed.  A discussion on the impact to Beta was discussed. 

 

Actions resulting from the discussion:

-          Obtain information on how the beta customers will use the SPDX spec – will they use the tag/value format or the RDF format?  The current assumption is that the beta customers will use the spreadsheet and will not care what the underlying format is.  A questionnaire has been sent to the beta sites through the business teams.

-          Draft the UML model for the current RDF tools implementation (Gary) – will compare and discuss next week

-          Document the new fields that need to be added to implement Kate’s proposed model (Kate)

2011-03-01 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 3/1/2011

 Attendees:

 

Kirsten NewcomerBill SchinellerPeter WilliamsKate StewartGary O'NeallAnn Thorton

  

Review Peter’s UML diagram:

 

We're in the process of reviewing 2 different conceptual models with the goal of finalizing on one model for beta.

On 2/22, the team reviewed a model proposed by Kate

At this meeting, the team reviewed a model proposed by Peter. 

 Discussion included: relationships between objects, what abstract classes are necessary, model for licenses. Peter made some real-time modifications to his model during the discussion to address points raised. 

 

There was some discussion of whether we should allow for names to change after beta, given that the spec will be versioned. I don't believe agreement on this was reached. 

 

Actions resulting from the discussion:

  • (Peter) will send his model to the team, as well as the name of the tool he used to create the model, so that team member can make proposed changes to the model and share them for review. Goal is to finalize the model this week.  [Attached to the minutes]
  • Team agreed that we need to finalize names of properties this week as well to better support tool implementation for beta. The team all agreed that the singular form of the name is preferred to plural. (Kate) will work with Rockett to get the definitive list of names from the legal team.
  • (Bill) will put out a call to the SPDX mailing list for use cases the team can use to validate the model. 
  • (Ann) agreed to collate and document the use cases on the twiki. (Kate) will work with Ann to bring her up to speed on previous use cases discussed. Bill will send a pointer to the twiki location for use cases. 
  • (Peter) signed up to provide training on the spec for the beta as soon as the spec is nailed down. The use cases collected by Ann will be useful input for this training.

 

 

Attachments: 

2011-03-08 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 2/22/2011

 

Attendees:

 

Ann Thorton

Kristin Newcomer

Bill Schineller

Peter Williams

Kate Stewart

Gary O'Neall

 

Agenda:

Compare the models provided by Kate (attached) and the models from the email thread

Review/discuss the SPDX Names spreadsheet provided by Kate (attached)

 

Model discussion:

 

There were a lot of similarities between the proposed models.

 

Two differences in the models were discussed:

1.      Abstract License which subclasses a non-standard license and a standard license vs. a License object with one subclass for standard license.

2.      Representing the license reference text – either as the text in the non-standard license or text in a LicenseInfo object.

 

For #2 – The scope was discussed as to whether text for licenses not in the standard license list and not in the file itself.  The scenario discussed was if text was found in a file referencing a license which is not in the SPDX standard list of licenses, is there a way to represent the text of the license which is not in the file itself.  This was described as out of scope which raised some concerns.  Kate raised a concern that if this was in scope, there would be issues with the ID.

 

We agreed that it was confusing to have the name of the referenced license text “Non-Standard License”.  Various names were discussed and we agreed to change name of Non-Standard License to “License Reference”.

 

Kate to follow-up on updating the diagram based on the discussion.  Once that is done we can revisit the scope question and the need for Abstract License.

 

Kate provided a spreadsheet that compared the names for the SPDX properties used by RDF/XML, Tag/Value and the spreadsheet.

 

Peter agreed to fill in the RDF/XML column and update the git repository version of the spec with the resultant names.

2011-03-15 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 3/15/2011

 

Attendees:

 

Kristin Newcomer

Bill Schineller

Peter Williams

Kate Stewart

Gary O'Neall

 

Agenda:

 

·         Resolve the naming differences based on the spdx-naming-resolution spreadsheet (http://www.spdx.org/wiki/field-names)

·         Resolve the complex licensing model – supporting non-std licenses

·         Discuss ways to represent the RDF entities in the spec (e.g. artifactOf, DisjunctiveLicensingSet)

 

Spreadsheet:

·         Kate provided a new spreadsheet format with a “proposed” tab to focus in on the remaining items

·         Discussed the SPDX version and agreed that, although a bit redundant in the RDF XML format, we can add a property spdx:specVersion.

·         Creator/created – matched the name in the RDF to the tag (Creator)

·         Need a creator class and possible a comment class to associate the comments with the creator – same general requirements for reviewer – Peter agreed to propose a model

·         Package filename – since this isn’t a relative path, should be a different property, agree to change the name to spdx:packageFileName.

·         URL: couple issues were discussed, conflict of uniqueness with spec “Unknown”, required field, redundancy with SourceInfo.  Peter brought up a good point that if we don’t have URL being the same as the Package resource URI, there is no place to store package resource URI information in the tag value or spreadsheet.  Agreed on property DownloadLocation property.

·         Seen Licenses in All Files – discussed the change in terms and proposals, should update the bug to reflect the renaming

 

(2:00 continuation of the meeting)

 

Discussion of the complex licensing model

 

·         A non-standard license would include text for licenses not in the standard license text and licenses not included in the file or package information.  This would only be applicable for a concluded license.  This resolves the scope issue.

·         An issue was raised where we are losing some information on the structure of a license with this approach.  We also will not be able to include the text of the standard licenses in the SPDX Analysis itself.  We agreed that this issue can be resolved after beta.

·         The proposal of associating text with the AbstractLicensingInfo object (in SPDX-model-v4.png) was discussed.  We agreed to log this is a bug and discuss this after beta.

 

Back to the discussion on the name:

 

·         SeenLicense name – legal proposal is LicenseInfoInFile.

·         Concern on consistency on the use of LicenseInfo.

·         Decided to leave concludedLicense alone (prefer LicenseInfo)

·         Synchronized 3.9 (seen licenses) with this terminology – see spreadsheet for final resolution.

·         Note on the spreadsheet – a green cell indicates that this is the preferred terminology for the row.  Other columns may need to be updated to synchronize with this cell.

·         Copyright statement – agreed to change to copyright text to allow a more structured copyright statement in the future

·         NonStandardLicense – changed to LicensingInfo

·         LicenseID – discussed various approaches and issues – agreed to keep a property for LicenseID to map between the RDF/XML and non-RDF/XML formats in a consistent manner.

 

Agenda for next week:

·         Complete discussion on names

·         Discuss ways to represent the RDF entities in the spec

 

 

2011-03-22 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 3/22/2011

 

Attendees:

 

Nicholas Loke

Branden Robinson

Kristin Newcomer

Bill Schineller

Kate Stewart

Gary O'Neall

 

Agenda:

 

·         Complete the resolution of the naming differences

·         Discuss ways to represent the RDF entities in the spec (e.g. artifactOf, DisjunctiveLicensingSet)

 

Spreadsheet:

 

·         Started with 4.2 licenseID

·         We will color proposed changes in RDF column yellow for Peter’s review

·         Agreed on LicenseID as property last time – propose spdx:licenseID

·         Per file info -> File Information

·         File name – spdx:filename

·         File checksum/sha1/identifies – Agree on the name being fileCheckSum. 

·         To future proof the field, we agreed to make the name generic (not algorithm specific)

·         Create a checksum class with 2 properties, algorithm and value

·         We changed the Package field to be use the same checksum approach

·         For the RDF fields, should we have property names for everywehere we have class names defined in the spreadsheets?  We decided to add a property name followed by “/” then the class name for these fields.

·         Discussed whether the file verification field should also use the same checksum approach.  Decided to keep this as a single field.

·         ArtifactOf – To not loose information, we will add a URI property

·         Some discussion on the different scenarios with ArtifactOf DOAP documents (external DOAP documents and creating internal DOAP resource nodes within the SPDX document).  Agreed to test out some of these scenarios during Beta.

·         Some discussion of the comments – agreed to use the rdfs:comment consistently.

·         Note: Some of the updates to the spreadsheet may not have been captured in the bullets above – see the Spreadsheet version 9 yellow for all updated names.

 

Agenda for next week:

·         Complete discussion on names – website fields

·         Discuss ways to represent the RDF entities in the spec

 

2011-03-29 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 3/29/2011, 3/30/2011

 

Attendees 3/29/2011:

 

Nicholas Loke

Branden Robinson

Kristin Newcomer

Bill Schineller

Kate Stewart

Gary O'Neall

Peter Williams

 

Attendees 3/30/2011:

 

Jack Manbeck

Bill Schineller

Gary O'Neall

Nicholas Loke

Marshal

Peter Williams

Kate Stewart

 

Agenda:

 

·         Review naming spreadsheet updates

·         Discuss ways to represent the RDF entities in the spec

 

Spreadsheet:

 

·         Reviewed Creator change name to creationInfo (property) and CreationInfo (Class)

·         Discussion on if we should prepend property names with cardinality of 1 to N with “has” – we will decide after completing the rest of the spreadsheet

·         Format of the spreadsheet RDF column: propertyName/Range (and/or class)

·         Proposal for Beta – remove the CreationInfo class, add back a property for creator – range Agent, add a creatorComment property - string

·         Future – proposal to add changelog class and property to Analysis

·         Todo: Gary to re-align spreadsheet rows

 

We decided to have a follow-on call on Wednesday, 2:00PM Eastern.  Bill will send out an invite.

 

Continuation of the call –

·         Agreed to go back to a simple model for creator  (property spdx:creator) and comment – (property spdx:creatorComment).  We discussed whether comment should be spdxcreatorComment or rdfs:comment.  Concluded that the semantics are different enough to create an SPDX specific property.

·         Discussed the use of the Checksum class and alternatives to providing the extensibility (e.g. separate properties for each algorithm and having the algorithm be identified through the subclass of Checksum rather than a property).  Decided on using the checksum class as it allows for additional / different properties based on the algorithm and keeping the algorithm property.

·         Change property name from spdx:packageChecksum to spdx:checksum since it is semantically the same property as the file property – Note: we did not (and probably should)  update the fileChecksum to checksum.

·         Discussed whether we should change the range of the packageVerificationCode to a Checksum class.  We decided to leave it as a literal string for now, although most people on the call thought that we should make this field more extensible.  We will revisit this during and/or after beta.

·         Licensing discussion:

o   We discussed the name and meaning of the “NonStandardLicense”.  Agreed to rename the field [see spreadsheet for resolved name]

o   We discussed whether the RDF model should have the previously named “NonStandardLicense” as a subclass of License.  We will pick up this discussion in our face to face meeting.

o   The LicenseSets (ConjunctiveLicenseSet and DisjunctiveLicenseSet) will both contain LicensingInfo objects.

 

Note: there will not be a call next Tuesday, we will meet again at the face to face meeting at the Linux Collaboration Summit 

 

2011-04-07 Technical Team Minutes

Attendees

--------------

Kate Stewart

Peter Williams

Bill Schineller

Gary O'Neall

Phil Odence

Kirsten Newcomer

Mark Gisi

Marshall Clow

Matt Germon

Michael Herzog

Scott Peterson

Jack Manbeck

Philip Koltun

Steve Cropper

Kim Weins

Martin Michlmayr

Guillaume Rousseau

 

Agenda

-----------

  • Review spec 
  • Tools overview
  •  Licensing model
  • Remainder of the bugs
  •  Version 2.0 considerations

 

We reviewed the Specification as a group in order to close on issues and get agreement for the beta/release candidate version of the Specification. 

There was a lot of lively and effective discussion. 

A number of updates were made to the Specification during the meeting. 

Below are the conclusions made during discussion, along with some issues identified for exploration after beta. 

Again, please review and send additions/corrections as needed

 

Conclusions

-----------------

  • Specification number will be set to version 0.8
  • Purpose text:
    •  major versions incremented when incompatible changes are made. 
    • minor field will be incremented when backward compatible changes are made. 
    • Concern about the example where sections cause major version revisions.  We’ll leave the example for now.
  • Section 2 will be split into two parts and the following sections will be re-numbered
  • Section 2 title: SPDX Document 
    • sub-section 2.1 SPDX Specification Version Number
  • New Section 3 title:  Creation Information 
    •  sub-sections include remaining fields from original Section 2, as modified during meeting
    • Creator: changed format to be future reference to format and define it to be just a string for version 1
    • Created: updated the definition to be the last update when the analysis was done
  • NOTE: Following comments refer to section numbers in place during the meeting
  • Add all the rdf properties to the SPDX Document to map the package and analysis
  • Add a checksum class to the Specification (referred to in File section)
  • Review for terminology consistency
    • license vs. licensing
    • Undetermined vs. Unknown: used to indicate that data was reviewed, but conclusion is not clear
    • Not Analyzed will be used to indicate that data was not looked for
    • None: data was looked for but none found
  • Package-level and File-level licensing fields:
    • Proposed 

licensing model that enables representation of disjunctive / conjunctive licensing is adopted. This means license cardinality can be 1. 

  •  
    • Affected sections will be updated, including
      • 5.4.1
      • 5.5
  •   Some Purpose/Intent text in the related sections needs to be reviewed with legal. Specifically:
    • 3.8.1: "all should be recited"
    • 3.10:  text refers to both author and copyright, but field descriptions are specific to copyright. Intent/Purpose text and fields need to be in agreement
    • 4.1 wording in Intent -- exact words were highlighted in spec during discussion
  • Cardinality for Copyright will remain 1 for beta, but will be more than one after beta
  • Section 5.2.6: 
    • Need to add definitions for listed types
    • For future version of Specification, consider mime types.
  • Section 5.6: Need this same field at the package level
  • Fix "SDPX" typo in footer
  • Review section (is this Review or Reviewer?)
    • Copy Creator Data format information to Reviewer section
    • Review Comment field: Needs intent text from Rockett
  • Appendix I will simply link to SPDX License repository
  •  

Graphical version of model will be added to the Specification (appendix?)

 

Action Items

-----------------

Kate will complete first round of edits to Specification

Gary will make additional edits to the Specification to add RDF/XML examples and update the tools and example spreadsheet

Kate will get input on wording changes from legal where appropriate

Technical team will do a final review; date TBD

 

Open Issues

------------------

Concerns were raised about the verification mechanism (SHA1) not including the relative filename

Will the OWL document be added to the Specification?

Proposed that version two provide support for more hierarchical use cases (package in a package for example)

Concern about the created date being overly specified for the RDF format

2011-04-12 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 4/12/2011

 

Attendees:

 

Nicholas Loke

Kirsten Newcomer

Peter Williams

Bill Schineller

Kate Stewart

 

Agenda:

·         Plan for what remains

·         Review spec – create a list of what’s missing

·         Go through all remaining items

 

Review Spec:

·         Discussion on document format.  Agreed to add RDF XML examples to the sections and move the tag/value example under the tag/value

·         The RDF and tag/value information will be separated out into different appendices.

·         Peter will produce a new set of RDF documentation.   It will be included in the PDF document and the HTML will be posted to spdx.org/rdf/terms.  The documentation will be based on an OWL.  This will be provided by Sunday.

·         Gary will generate examples for the RDF XML from the tools.  This will be done within 2 weeks.

·         Section 3 – concern about having structure to the strings, for the RDF.  Data format for beta will be simple strings.  The tag/value should have a structure.  The RDF format for after beta TBD.

·         Date Format – should we specify the date format?  Agreed to leave the spec as is (was highly discussed a year ago and the current format was the resolution).

·         Should creator comments and  reviewer comments be rdfs:comment?  TBD (Peter – can you include a proposal when you document the RDF)

·         Discussion on the RDF specific subsections – will make consistent once we add the documentation from Peter

·         SourceInfo 4.6.6 should be changed to multi-line

·         LicenseInfo fields – add the new syntax for license sets and mandatory 1

·         Review of license terminology – will handle on the list (I’m not sure I completely captured this item)

·         Section 5 Identifier Assigned -> Identifier

·         Section 5.2 is currently 4.1 – renumber/format issue

·         Review free form text fields (e.g. 5.1.13) for consistency for <text> … </text>.  Would prefer the subsection for data format to be just free form text and the tag example to include the <text> … </text>

·         Possibly add a sentence or two in section 6, add the description for what happens if there is no archive file name for the package (use the package name).

·         6.3.5 lowercase c in checksum

·         ArtifactOf structure does not match well to the RDF format – Peter to propose a solution

·         Reviewer – name string format – same issue with parsing strings in the RDF

·         Inconsistent use of unspecified and unknown licenses – proposal to treat these as standard licenses and include them in Appendix I (and on the spdx.org/licenses website).

·         Diagram – Analyzed file – is it a property of SPDX Doc or a just a property of the package?  Agreed to add a property at the SPDXDoc level for all file and OtherLicensing info.  This will allow for an easy extraction of all file information within an SPDX doc and easy extraction of all OtherLicensing info within a doc.

 

Plan: Peter will provide the RDF information by Thursday.  We will review on Friday.  This will allow implementation to begin over the weekend.

2011-04-19 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 4/19/2011

 

Attendees:

 

Nicholas Loke

Kirsten Newcomer

Gary O’Neall

Peter Williams

Kate Stewart

 

Agenda:

·         Definitions doc – review Kirsten’s emails on consistent terminology

·         Resolve differences in spec and html – review email thread on consistency

·         Discuss proposals on verification code algorithms – review email thread from Marshal

 

Review of the terms “Unknown”, “Undetermined”, and “None”:

Discussion of Undetermined/NotSpecified/NotAnalyzed terminology proposal. Outcome: recommendations made to revise proposal to reflect 4 use cases where license/copyright/url cannot be specified: 

·         1) analyzed and data is insufficient to draw a conclusion 

·         2) analyzed, and conclusion is Not Licensed 

·         3) analyzed, and no data found 

·         4) not analyzed 

·         Revised proposal sent out to list on 04/19

·         Add “NONE” category for concluded license

·         Change “NOTSPECIFIED” to “NONESEEN”

 

Discussion of cases where no info is available need to be captured affirmatively in RDF license valuesor whether empty value is sufficient

·         Conclusion:  should be affirmative; provide values that specifically address this use case

 

Discussion of how best to handle special terms: as literals/constants or try to "shoe horn" into license registry

  • Noted that these terms can be applied to copyright and URL data, not just license data
  • Proposal: use URI that points to definition page on spdx.org but NOT license page
  • All will require special case treatment

 

Review differences between pdf doc and html rdf spec:

·         For licenses, change the application to match rdf html spec on the “NONE” (etc.) being spdx/rdf/terms URI’s.  Peter to update vocabulary with new terms.

·         Spdx:License class – ok as is for beta; revisit after beta

·         CreatorInfo cardinality – go with the pdf cardinality for now and revisit after Beta start

·         Cardinality of licenseInfoFromFile is 1 .. n

·         Cardinality licenseConcluded, … cardinality 1 – if multiple licenses, represented as a conjunctive or disjunctive set

·         Cardinality of licenseInfoInFile is 1..n (semantics similar licenseInfoFromFiles)

·         Describe which properties of DOAP are used in both the pdf and html (name and homepage)

·         Agreed to change licenseID -> licenseId in pdf, html, and app

2011-04-26 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 4/26/2011

 

Attendees:

 

Kirsten Newcomer

Bill Schineller

Brandon Robinson

Gary O’Neall

Peter Williams

Nicholas Loke

Marshall Clow

 

Agenda:

·         Discuss the email thread on the terms for undetermined/none seen/not analyzed licenses (email thread originated by Peter)

·         Review the verification algorithm (email from Gary)

·         Discuss the relationship between the SPDX Document and the extracted licensing info

 

None Seen, None, Not Analyzed, Undetermined:

·         Discussed meaning of the terms.

·         Discussed need for 4 terms.

·         Discussed some proposals for different terms (unfortunately, I did not capture the specifics).

·         Did not reach a conclusion on the call, will follow-up on email

·         Kirsten to write-up the definition of the 4 terms

·         Peter to follow-up with a proposal based on Kirsten’s write-up

 

 

Analyzed (effort expended)

Not Analyzed

Seen/factual

 

 

Concluded

 

 

 

File Verification Algorithm:

·         Reviewed the proposal – consensus on the general approach of generating a sha1 from the filenames + sha1’s of the individual files

·         File path – reference the file name in the document rather than define the filepath in the verification section

·         Check the file name specification to make sure it specifies forward slash “/” as the separator character

·         Sha1 – reference the sha1 in the doc rather than define the format in the verification section

·         Change sorting to start with sha1 followed by file path.  Note that this resolves case sensitive sorting issues with the file name.

·         Change sha1 definition to specify lowercase a-f for the hexadecimal representation

·         What to do with the spdx file itself – proposal is to leave it out of the verification algorithm.  Peter to review and possibly propose other terms.  This will be specific proposal will continue on the email thread.

Extracted Licensing Info at the Doc level

·         Agreed to add a property at the SPDX document to capture all of the extracted licensing infos

·         Proposed property name “hasExtractedLicensingInfo”

·         Range ExtractedLicensingInfo

·         Cardinality 0 or more

·         The URI associated with this property would be the same URI used in licenseInfoFromFile and licenseInfoInFile

·         Peter will update the spec with this information

 

With the two outstanding items on the spec (terms for unused/none/noneseen licenses and how to treat the spdx fil in the File Verification algorithm), there may be impact on the beta start date.  Depending on the outcome of the email discussions, we will alert the business team to the possible schedule impact on Thursday.

 

2011-05-04 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 5/3/2011

 

Attendees:

 

Kirsten Newcomer

Bill Schineller

Gary O’Neall

Peter Williams

Nicholas Loke

Marshall Clow

Kate Stewart

 

Agenda:

 

Terms – prepare for legal team

Verification – any concern with excluding the spdx file(s) which are being generated or updated?

Push tools for beta?

Re-organizing the web – difficult to find things

 

Tools:

  • Feedback – change “non-standard licenses” tab name, perhaps format spreadsheet
  • Should we push the tools to the spdx.org/tools? – Once updated with terms discussion.  By Saturday.  Push to spdx.org/tools
  • Kate to review the differences between rdf terms and doc

 

Overall schedule:

  • Close on terms on Wednesday
  • Update tools to decision – by Friday (Gary)
  • Update spec pdf by Saturday (Kate)
  • Update rdf terms with the results of the license terms discussion by Thursday (Peter)
  • Tools document update – by Friday morning (Kirsten)
  • Start an email thread to confirm the URL’s and upload the documents (Kirsten)
  • Update rdf terms to the correct location (Peter to coordinate with Martin)

 

Re-organizing the web:

  • Change link to rdf to be next to the

 

List of excluded files from hash calculation:

  • Create a property which is a list of excluded files
  • Property would have 0 or more file paths
  • Property of the verification
  • Would be a comma separated list of paths in the tag/value
  • Spreadsheet would have an additional column
  • Peter to update rdf spec by Wednesday morning
  • Gary to update the tools
  • Kate to update pdf document

 

License terms:

·         Agree to hold to the proposal (three terms for no-value AMBIGOUS, NONE, NOTANALYZED

·         Discussed revised definition of NOTANALYZED – ok with revising definition to try to address Scott Peterson concern or that the preparer of the SPDX document is not making any assertion regarding the value of this field.

·         Propose new definition of NOTANALYZED:
Indicates that the preparer of the SPDX document made no attempt to
determine the value of this field or that the preparer of the SPDX document is not making any
assertion regarding the value of this field.    

2011-05-10 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 5/10/2011

 

Attendees:

 

Kirsten Newcomer

Bill Schineller

Gary O’Neall

Peter Williams

Nicholas Loke

Branden Robinson

Kate Stewart

 

Agenda:

 

URL’s for beta

 

  • URL’s – Reviewed Kirsten’s email on the URL’s.  Agreed with the proposal except the URL for  rdf terms – agreed to leave the rdf terms URL as spdx.org/rdf/terms for beta
  • Remove reference to an RDF terms page (spec should be sufficient)
  • Examples – stay under spec/examples
  • Templates: Agreed to have the spreadsheet just under the tools directory (we don’t currently need a separate template area)

 

Review of open priority 1and 2 bugs

  • None blocking beta.
  • License text – we believe this is not an issue for beta
  • License repository – Gary to send an updated set of files to Martin
  • Moving tools to the tools web page – Gary to move files today
  • Rename git repository to tools – Peter will rename to “tools”
  • Tag/Value example – Either Kate or Peter will produce
  • Examples – Agree that the examples should all pass the validation
    • Copy the spreadsheet example from the tool
    • Peter will regenerate some of the prior examples with the current spec
  • Verification algorithm – need to make sure it is in the spec.  We could also add a Wiki page just for the algorithm.

2011-05-17 Technical Team Minutes

2011-05-24 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 5/24/2011
Attendees:
Kate Stewart
Kirsten Newcomer
Bill Schineller
Gary O’Neall
Peter Williams
Marshall Clow
Branden Robinson
Steve Cropper
 

Agenda:

  • Report on General team meeting
  • Beta readiness and ArtifactOf URI proposal
  • Specification and Technical web page review/cleanup

Report on General team meeting -- Kate

  • Various edit passes completed on Spec
  • Waiting for feedback from additional members of legal team
  • Kate will continue to consolidate edits and requests that edits be saved either in Open Office or .doc format for Word (Word '97-2004) to ensure edits are not lost
  • OSI is going to adopt same short form names as SPDX


Beta readiness

  • Tools -- Gary
    • tools are ready except for one item (see below)
    • would like some volunteers to test
    • need closure on ArtifactOf URI proposal
      • CONCLUDED:
      • If there is a known location for a doap:Project document on the web, RDF will use this as the resource URI (i.e. a named node); this will be the value for ArtifactOf URI in the tag/value format
      • If there is no known location for a DOAP document on the web, RDF may represent as an anonymous node; in the tag/value format, ArtifactOfURI will have the value ‘UNKNOWN’
      • RDF may generate a URI named node for the doap:Project even if document is not on the web, so that single node may be referenced in the RDF graph.
      • If translating from tag/value format to RDF format, translator may choose to generate a single URI any referenced doap:Project having name and homepage pair are the same
      • Comments: this would make the RDF graph neater, but adds work to translator
  • Technical Doc -- Kirsten
    • Technical training PPT needs updating due to some terminology change
    • Kirsten to send suggested updates to Kim
  • There was also some general discussion about having a way to inline contents of a package. Topic was raised by Brandon Robinson.
    • Brandon stated that this has been raised by some of their supply chain
    • Kate mentioned that there are technical issues with embedding pkg contents
    • Group agreed that this is not required (or even requested) for beta

Web page review and cleanup -- all

  • SPDX Whitepaper referenced on both the Home page and the Specification page needs updating.
    • Owners: Phil Odence and Kim Weins.
    • Kate will provide a technical review after update.
  • http://spdx.org/licenses/ <http://spdx.org/licenses/>
    • Title needs to be changed to "SPDX License List"
    • Text needs to be modified to read: "This following is a list of all liceneses currently registered with SPDX as of <date>."
    • Owners: Martin M. and Gary (?)
  • http://spdx.org/rdf/terms <http://spdx.org/rdf/terms>
    • Contents are up to date
  • http://spdx.org/spec/guidelines <http://spdx.org/spec/guidelines>
    • Currently empty. Assumption is that this will be populated during beta.
    • Owner: Kim Weins (?)
  • http://spdx.org/spec/examples <http://spdx.org/spec/examples>
    • There was some discussion about the best way to organize the information on this page. No final conclusions reached. Proposals included
      • Provide a separate page for each type of example
      • Keep current examples all on one page (fewer clicks)
      • Provide an archive folder for older examples
      • Currently, older examples are hidden
    • Requested that the sub-team reviewing SPDX website organization create a working group page for itself to make it easier for others to follow progress and provide feedback
    • Owner: Kirsten

As always, please send additions or corrections.

 

2011-06-07 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 6/7/2011

Attendees:

  • Bill Schineller
  • Kate Stewart
  • Nicholas Loke
  • Steve Crawford
  • Peter Williams
  • Gary O’Neall

Agenda:

  • Review current spec published 6/6/2011

Review

  • Language updated from the legal team
  • Request review from Kirsten for the legal language
  • Still some review comments in the Legal team, so there may be some additional changes
  • Request for technical team to review and send Kate a document version under change revision mode to highlight any review comments or changes
  • Request for a spreadsheet example including the URI for artifactOf – Gary
  • Appendix II. RDF Data Model Implementation – needs a review to make sure it is in sync with the latest spec (especially naming)
  • hasFile property on the document – hasFile is a property of package. Having a property at the document level is OK, but we would like to add such a property in the future. Concern about the name “hasFile” at the document level. Agreed to “referencesFile”.
  • Discussion on having a property from the file to the document – agreed to postpone any changes until there is a use case which benefits from this relationship
  • artifactOf – need for more information to describe how it is used. Produce some examples.
  • Need to produce instructions on how to use the spec.
  • PackageVerificationCode excluded file, need to review/update the cardinality – 0 or more – some question/concern on the language used to describe the cardinality (0 or more mandatory or optional)
  • PackageVerificationCode excluded file – review syntax in the main document
  • Conjunctinve/Disjunctive licenses – should the cardinality be 2 or more – tradeoff of additional effort for tooling to interpret manage degenerative case. Agree to 2 or more as the cardinality.
  • SimpleLicenseInfo discussion – Should we have SimpleLicenseInfo a straight subclass of AnyLicenseInfo? Would be more constraining, but would also match the conceptual model – proposed for next week’s agenda
  • Proposal for embedded octect stream – proposed for next week’s agenda

2011-06-14 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 6/14/2011

Attendees:

  • Bill Schineller
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Kate Stewart
  • Nicholas Loke
  • Peter Williams
  • Gary O’Neall

Agenda:

Review of last week’s items:

  • Legal language updated from last week completed
  • Review of document – Kate received some comments
  • Spreadsheet example of the URI for artifactOf (Gary) – Still pending
  • Spec updated with change to hasFile
  • PackageVerificationCode – still pending
  • SimpleLicensingInfo – pending
  • Embedded Octect Stream - pending

Update on Kate’s conversation with Steve

  • Need to capture a “supply chain” for the origin of the packages
    • Can capture this as a reviewer, but would require a company – proposal to have Reviewer be an Agent. Agree to change the spec to accommodate company. We can change the definition of the string or we can implement Agent. For Beta, we can change the definition of the string. We would like to implement an Agent structure, but that would require a more detailed proposal and incrementing the version number. Kate will work on a proposal.
  • Proposal to have a package level ArtifactOf. Agree that this will be useful. This may require two different properties to represent A) if the package is part of a larger project and B) the package originates in a particular project. We need some use cases written – Peter will write one of the use cases in a bug.
  • Need to write-up usage of the spec
    • Agree to create a Wiki page for usage guidelines. This would be structured around use cases and a description of the fields. The per-field would shadow the spec. Any contributed conversations to the per-field could be rolled into the spec itself at a later date. Would like to create a separate Beta web page which would include a link to the usage guidelines page. This could be added under participation. Kirsten will add after checking with Kim.
  • Crypto flag request – need a proposal.
  • Suggest that we add bugs for the new proposal.
  • Open source or commercial package flag request – concern that different companies/organizations have different definitions of open source and commercial package
  • Package version – request to make the version parseable. Agree to add a field, but there was concern on making it parseable – Kate will add this in the next draft
  • Use of term package, raises questions about the hierarchy of packages. ArtifactOf at the package level will help.
  • A third delivery model – 1) SPDX is a sidecar to the package archive, 2) SPDX is embedded in the package, 3) a third proposal would be to have the SPDX document itself contains the archive.

2011-06-21 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 6/21/2011

Attendees:

  • Bill Schineller
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Branden Robinson
  • Peter Williams
  • Gary O’Neall
  • Nicholas Loke

Agenda:

  • Updates from last week

Updates since last week:

  • Spreadsheet example updated with ArtifactOf
  • Beta website update, since Beta is coming to a close we may not want to move the beta information

Web site for usage information for the spec:

  • Consider setting this up in the technical area
  • Consider just adding the information to the FAQ
  • Agree to update the draft SPDX FAQ. Once beta is complete, we can go through the FAQ and separate out any information which should be in a usage (or other) area
  • Added a link to the FAQ from the technical area

Tools update:

  • Feedback on installation – dependency on the Java environment
  • A defect is causing warnings which has caused some concerns from the Beta participants (since the call, I added this to Buzilla – id 823)

2011-06-28 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 6/28/2011

Attendees:

  • Bill Schineller
  • Branden Robinson
  • Peter Williams
  • Gary O’Neall
  • Kate Stewart

Agenda:

  • Feedback from the betas

Tool defects:

  • Posted as bugs in bugzilla
  • Bug 824 – error if the standard licenses are not present in the spdx document
    • OK to assume that the type information will be present for non-standard licenses
    • Basic design to attempt to load the RDF graph for standard licenses
      • First attempt will be against the spdx.org/licenses website
      • If the first attempt fails, the a static file distributed with the application in the jar file will be used
  • Plan to fix and updated the tools before next Tuesday’s call

Other beta feedback:

  • Discussion on the Fossology support
  • Recognizing “families” of licenses
  • Agent definitions – disconnect between tag/value restricted to “Person …” where RDF is just a string. Decided to discuss next week. Peter will provide a proposal for RDF.
  • Versions – Decided that the beta version of the spec should be 0.9. Will update spec and tools.
  • Package Verification Code – update spec, documented in bug 832 – Gary and Kate to review.
  • Next week, review (and clean up) bugs. Decide which ones need to be fixed for release 1.
  • Discussion on the jar files/archive files found in a package. Decided to treat these as a single file with concluded licenses and “NONE” for the found license.
  • FAQ’s – need to divide up the works. Will do this on next week’s call.

2011-07-05-TechnicalTeamMinutes

Minutes 7/5/2011

Attendees:

  • Bill Schineller
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Branden Robinson
  • Peter Williams
  • Gary O’Neall
  • Kate Stewart

Agenda:

  • Tools update
  • Review open bugs

Tools update:

  • Most of the id’d issues fixed and pushed
  • Added versioninfo to package, required update to template but is backwards compatible
  • Can’t upload the tools – already contacted Martin
  • Wrong namespace on the licenses RDFa, once fixed, the tools will obtain the standard license information from the website

Review open bugs

  • 728 – move examples – Kirsten will take this as part of the web team
  • 726 – Move priority to 2, Gary to coordinate with Peter [update – this has been addressed by the Linux Foundation]
  • 724 – vocabulary on the website – completed, should be closed
  • 656 – License text outside spreadsheet, move to priority 2
  • 633 -- close
  • 628 – can probably close – quite old and before we discussed the structure in S.F.
  • 617 – leave open
  • 812 – Add column for OSI approved – Gary to compare OSI licenses to web page before adding column
  • 811 – Providing license texts as simple tar file. Assign to Rockett to include as part of the process, change priority to P3
  • 739 – Should be able to close
  • 738 – ask Peter if can be closed
  • 737 – Should be able to close
  • 715 – License ID specs, assign to Kate
  • 673 – Should be able to close
  • 646 – Should be able to close
  • 666 – this is resolved, should be able to close
  • 638 – Bill S. to add comments to clarify
  • 588 Close

Additional updates:

  • Should add a bug for adding license families based beta feedback
  • Martin fixed the file upload problem , so the tools should be available within the next hour or two
  • Jack Manbeck and Gary have been collaborating on adding HTML output as part of the pretty printer. Gary will ping Peter since he may also be thinking of similar enhancements.

2011-07-12-TechnicalTeamMinutes

Minutes 7/12/2011

Attendees:

  • Bill Schineller
  • Branden Robinson
  • Peter Williams
  • Gary O’Neall
  • Kate Stewart
  • Nicholaas Loke
  • Marshall

Agenda:

  • Package Version
  • Review open bugs

Package Version:

  • · Proposal – cardinality 1, String format
  • · Already in ontology and tool – only difference is the property name. Peter will reply to Kate’s email with the proposed property name. Kate will update the spec document. The RDF ontology and tools have already been updated.

Review open bugs

  • New bug – license text is not rendering correctly in IE
  • All other defects were updated in Bugzilla – see Bugzilla comments and status for details [Note – some of the defect updates are not captured in the minutes]
  • 728 – Assigned to Kirsten
  • Need to add Kirsten to Bugzilla (Bill will follow-up)
  • 838 – Assigned to Peter
  • 729 – Some examples still need to be posted. Kate will post the examples and notify the web team so it can be placed properly in the new web design. Consider adding to spdx.org/tools
  • 726 – Git repository name updated – need to update the tools documentation and spdx.org/tools text – assigned to Gary
  • ??? - RDF/Tag-Value mapping – discussion as to if this is fully resolved. Agreed to close the defect and enter any specific issues if they occur.
  • 638 - Conformance section – Discussed the need since the spec already defines cardinality etc. Kate will propose – see defect for details on the discussion
  • 646 – closed
  • 673 – closed
  • 715 – assign to Kate
  • 737 – closed
  • 738 – Assigned to Peter
  • 811 – Assign to Rockett, P3
  • 818 – Set target milestone to V2 – did not come up as a blocker in the beta feedback discussion
  • Need to add a “Version 2” to target milestone in Bugzilla
  • 835 – Assigned to Peter
  • 837 – Assigned to Peter
  • 839 – Kate will review wording

2011-07-28 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 7/28/2011

Attendees:

  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Branden Robinson
  • Peter Williams
  • Kate Stewart
  • Steve Cropper
  • Jack Manbeck

Agenda:

  • Discuss proposal from Steve Cropper for Supplier related fields
  • Review open bugs

The team had a good discussion about the new proposed Supplier fields, including discussion of:

  • Optional vs. Mandatory
  • Reasons for including in GA of 1.0 rather than waiting
  • Overlap with need for handling package hierarchies
  • Affect on tools
    • suggested that tools could be udpated after GA date
  • Use cases, including
    • open source package maintained by loose coalition where no individual has clear ownership
    • open source package where original copyright owner has died
    • package shared between supply chain partners
    • Discussed providing special options as we do for certain other fields such as NOASSERTION, NONE, and possibly ORPHANED

Spec update

  • waiting for trademark info from Rockett
  • waiting for input from Karen C. on confidentiality

Bug review

We ran out of time to review the bug list, but ask that everyone

  • review for any open P1s assigned to them
  • review closed bugs to be sure we're in agreement

Corrections, additions welcome.

2011-08-02 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 7/28/2011

Attendees:

  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Nicholas Loke
  • Peter Williams
  • Kate Stewart
  • Steve Cropper
  • Jack Manbeck
  • Marshall Clow

Agenda:

  • Discussion of Supplier related fields
  • Review of recent updates to the Spec
  • Open Action Items (see list at end of minutes)

Supplier fields discussion

  • Kate has updated the working version of the spec with the two fields discussed last week
    • Package Supplier
    • Package Originator
  • Today's discussion started with some email threads on intended use of 
  • We seem to have a common understanding of what info should be used to fill in the Package Supplier field
  • We're still working toward a common understanding for the Package Originator field
    • We discussed a few possibilities. For example, is the data in the Package Originator field
      • the copyright holder?
      • the place where the Supplier got the code?
    • We discussed the desire to capture the chain of custody in the SPDX document; Kate noted that was part of the original intent of the Reviewer field
    • We noted that there is an overlap between the goal of capturing chain of custody and the need for hierarchy in the SPDX document; hierarchy will be discussed post 1.0
  • Concluded: we need to make an extra effort to document the thinking behind these fields and provide usage guidelines

Additional updates to Spec

  • Kate walked the team through some additional updates that have been made to the spec as well as some planned changes based on feedback
  • Key changes include:
    • Clean up of RDF section (typos, spelling)
    • Proposed changes to certain field names for tag/value
    • Section 1.7: Conformance statement will point to trademark statement that is being worked by legal team and will be posted to web. This is not yet finalized.
    • Section 2.2: SPDX data will still be delivered under PDDL-1.0. Confidentiality field has been dropped.
      • Acknowledged that this could be an issue for using SPDX with commercial/proprietary code and plan to discuss commercial code use case post-1.0 GA
    • Recommend that info be added on where to provide feedback

Open Action Items

  • Everyone: Bug list review
    • review for any open P1s assigned to you
    • review closed bugs to be sure we're in agreement
  • Start developing Guidelines for Implementation/Use and/or Best Practices 
    • Everyone: Review current FAQ as starting point. You can find it here: 
      http://spdx.org/spec/guidelines
    • If you've volunteered to update/add to a certain section, please add your name here. :-)
  • Kirsten: Provide website location for 2 items so can be referenced in Spec
    • Process for requesting licenses be added to SPDX license list. 
    • SPDX trademark terms.
      • I've added placehoder text for a links here: http://spdx.org/spec 
      • I don't have the privs to create a new child page and will send a note to Martin 
  • Everyone: Please review the spec with the goal of approving final version next week if possible

Corrections, additions welcome.

2011-08-09 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 8/9/2011

Attendees:

  • Bill Schineller
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Branden Robinson
  • Peter Williams
  • Gary O’Neall
  • Kate Stewart
  • Nicholaas Loke
  • Jack Manbeck
  • Marshal

Agenda:

  • · Open bug list review
  • · Spec walkthrough/check for ambiguities

Review open bug list

  • · 887 - Do we have structured strings for creator, reviewer, …? Agreed that in the future, the RDF structure will probably be different than a structured string but we do not have time to create, review and implement a proposal. Agreed to have a structured string for this release – Peter will propose a more formal syntax. Note: SPDX tools currently doea a simple partial validation of strings starting with “PERSON:”, “ORGANIZATION:”, etc.
  • · 728 - Move examples to spdx.org – leave in spdx.org/spec/examples – Kirsten will create subcatory for “work in progress”, once reviewed we can label the examples as conforming to the spec. Can close bug.
  • · Xxx – What license is the RDF terms released under, need to confirm with legal. Peter will follow-up with legal. Proposal to make the rdf spec
  • · 874 – packageOriginator and packageSuppler -> originator, supplier – spec is being updated. Tools will be updated and re-uploaded this morning to make consistent.
  • · Suggest that the class order in the rdf terms page match the order from the spec
  • · 656 – closed after review of license text and license index
  • · 883 – agree we don’t need ascending order for license ID’s – assigned bug to Kate and will e fixed in next rev of the spec
  • · 886 – broken link, assigned to Kate, will be fixed in next release
  • · 888 – rdf example fix - assigned to Kate, will be fixed in next release

Walkthrough of spec changes

  • · Reviewed updates (a few changes were noted “spdx.com” -> “spdx.org”)
  • · Request to make sections 5 and 6 consistent in the statement for what is required and optional – Steve to send an email describing request to the group
  • · Decided to change the status of the rdf terms from “testing” to “stable”

Other status

  • · RDF terms will be updated by this afternoon (Peter)
  • · Gary will review the doc, rdf terms, and tool property values for consistency

2011-08-23 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 8/23/2011

Attendees:

  • Bill Schineller
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Branden Robinson
  • Peter Williams
  • Gary O’Neall
  • Kate Stewart
  • Nicholaas Loke
  • Jack Manbeck
  • Marshal Clow

Agenda:

  • · Weekly call Logistics
  • · LinuxCon Feedback
  • · Proposal for Spec Version numbering
  • · Tools source structure
  • · Verification Code algorithm
  • · Composite Packages
  • · “Garbage Files”

Logistics:

  • Move to 2:00 Eastern to accommodate west coast- considering that we don’t currently have any attendees from Europe. Kate will update Wiki.

Feedback from LinuxCon:

  • Discussed relationship between SPDX packages and the needed for a hierarchical relationship
  • Discussed PDDL
  • Discussed compatibility between tags and RDF for future development

Numbering for Spec. version:

  • Format AA.BB.CC
    • AA – Major version - Incremented for changes incompatible with previous versions (current definition)
    • BB – Minor version - would be used when changes may impact the consumer, but is compatible with previous versions
    • CC – Micro version - would be used when the changes do not impact to the consumer of SPDX

Tools source structure:

  • Create separate repositories for the different language tools
  • Create a separate git-repo named “Python-SPDX-Tools”
  • Rename current tools repo to “Java-SPDX-Tools”
  • Kate will either send info to Gary or send info to Linux Foundation to make changes

Note: Bugzilla has a target field to indicate which release the resolution is targeted for. There are no targets for detail “CC” versions; we will use the major version targets for those changes.

Verification code algorithm:

  • Need to specify a better separator character “\n” is ambiguous – Kate will choose a character and update spec
  • Update to the verification code algorithm would result in an increment to the micro version (e.g. 1.0.1)

Bug 818 – Composite packages:

  • Agreed to create a request for proposal
  • Will update bug with additional information discussed on the call
  • Three approaches were discussed:
    • Include all composite information in one document
    • Keep package documents separate and have separate new type of file to cross reference.
    • Enable multiple documents to cross reference each other
      • Link files
      • Unique IDs
        • Can use the verification code
         
  • Signing documents
    • How does adding reviewer information impact the signing?
  • Composite packages requirements
    • Requirements will be included in the request for proposal
    • We will discuss the requirements on next week’s call

“Garbage Files” (e.g. .svn files):

  • All files need to be included in the file info, even “garbage files”
  • Proposal to create a new file type – “CRUFT” – proposal for the mailing list. Gary will write a proposal in the form of a bug and send to the mailing list. [Bug 944 has been added with the proposal]

2011-08-30 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 8/30/2011

Attendees:

  • Bill Schineller
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Branden Robinson
  • Peter Williams
  • Gary O’Neall
  • Kate Stewart
  • Jack Manbeck
  • Ed Warnicke

Agenda:

  • · Composite Package Requirements
  • · Verification Code
  • · Basic practices on file naming (to include or not include version)

Verification Code:

  • · Discussion on whether we should include a verification code or just have an algorithm to calculate the verification code from the data within the SPDX document
    • Requirements – determine if a package has been modified – or - was this SPDX file generated against the files being looked at
    • Is it simpler to have a verification code than it is to calculate?
      • Depends on use case
      • Use Case 1: In comparing an SPDX document to the files, the algorithm would need to be executed anyway – would be more work to compare to the verification code
      • Use Case 2: In comparing 2 SPDX documents, only need to compare verification codes – would be less work
      • Variation on Use Case 2: case where the SPDX file represents a binary “blob” and the file level information may be lost
      • Use Case 3: Verification of an SPDX file used in a “side car” scenario (where the SPDX file is not included in the archive file itself)
      • Can’t think of any other use cases – but leaving open the possibility for other use cases
      • Use Case 2 would likely be done in a scenario where Use Case 1 would also be done (or in a scenario where the SPDX is used in a “side-car” scenario)
      • Remove the verification code would cause the SPDX files to not be backwards compatible – would need to be a 2.0 change
      • Concern about losing credibility if we throw the field out this early
      • Proposal to change the verification code to option for backwards compatibility
  • · Fixing the algorithms
    • Discussed issues with the locale
    • Discussed proposal to encode in UTF-8 then perform a byte sort
      • Issue with UTF-8 encoding may have some options which differ for unusual characters – would result in byte sequence differences
      • Even if locale issues were resolved, the encoding issues would remain since the hash function is performed on the bytes.
      • Proposal to use common utility “iconv” to encode the text
        • Concern about licensing for some tools
        • Concern about acceptance in the Java community
      • No one on the call was comfortable providing a specific proposal/resolution
  • · Next steps:
    • Fix the algorithm – continue discussion on fixing the algorithm
      • Seek out an expert (or experts) on encoding issues
      • Review section
      • Revisit if the field should be removed, remain mandatory or change it as optional
      • Seek out expert on encoding issues
      • For background - review section 7 man page for locale

2011-11-29 Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 11/29/2011

 

Attendees:

  • Gary O’Neall
  • Bill Schineller
  • Rana Rahal
  • Ed Warnicke
  • Brandon Robinson
  • Peter Williams

 

Agenda:

  • Bugzilla bug review

 

Updates:

  • Bill pinged Jaime Garcia on validating the new package verification code algorithms, have not yet heard back
  • Bugzilla is back!
  • Minor progress on HTML pretty printer

 

Bugs:

  • 818 – Composite packages – this represents the general discussion on hierarchies
  • 968 – Package Verification Algorithm should be addressed.  Will be in a 1.1 version.
  • 944 – Gary will propose a new filetype for version 2 for “CRUFT” files
  • 878 – Download mechanism link would be a useful improvement.  Note that different source management systems have different mechanisms and information to denote the versions and download specifics.  DOAP has a vocabulary for this, proposal to look at DOAP and see if it can be leveraged.
  • 898 - Changelog discussion:
    • The proposal for composite packages can solve the need for changelogs by having one SPDX document refer to a previous SPDX document with an annotation on what has changed
    • Should a complete copy be made or a reference?
    • Should it be versioned?  No – a versioning would require an authority.  Need a mechanism to reliably refer to previous versions (e.g. a hashcode, verification code or other mechanism).  Action – add a bug to represent this issue – Peter will add.
  • 591 – Proposal to change the license list to include “or later” for some of the license declarations.  Note that the license text for a GPL 2.0 or later license will reflect the GPL 2.0 text, which isn’t exactly correct (especially of a GPL 3.0 license is chosen).  Alternative, expand the model for the licenses to include an “or later” concept.
  • 632, others – not yet discussed.

 

2011-12-05-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 12/6/2011

 

Attendees:

  • Gary O’Neall
  • Bill Schineller
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Kate Stewart
  • Rana Rahal
  • Ed Warnicke
  • Brandon Robinson
  • Peter Williams

 

Agenda:

  • Ed’s composite package proposal

 

Updates:

  • Git repos back online

 

Composite Package Proposal:

  • Ed walked through the proposal
  • Discussion on the ACL – can be used to describe what is included or excluded – perhaps even what source files are used to produce a particular binary.
  • Discussion on the domain model – should we be modeling general copyrightable material or modeling software packaging?  Agree that we are not modeling the entire copyright domain.  Mapping a subset of the copyright domain.  The proposal is to model more of “copyrightable things” rather than just packages.
  • Do we need to have more detail on the relationship between elements?  [left open]
  • Do we have a separate file for signature or do we have an “envelope” with a signature?
  • Should we separate out the concept of what is physically included/embedded from the relationship of analyzed components?  Should these be represented as separate graphs?
  • Annotations approach compared to modifying a copy of an SPDX document.  Annotations help solve the provenance problems.  Annotation approach would be difficult for tools to recreate the new SPDX file representation. [left open]
    • Example use cases – Different opinion on the licensing for the package, choice of a license for a package that offers license choices
    • Alternative proposal – add an additional tag in an SPDX file to denote which SPDX file it is based on and what changes were made
  • Do we care about backwards compatibility?  Agree to have a future discussion.

 

2011-12-12-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 12/13/2011

 

Attendees:

  • Gary O’Neall
  • Bill Schineller
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Kate Stewart
  • Rana Rahal
  • Ed Warnicke
  • Peter Williams

 

Agenda:

  • Updates, review next steps on the embedded proposal

 

License Metadata:

  • Discussion on additional license metadata for custom licenses – bug #975 submitted to capture the request

 

Updates:

  • Tools update – Source code pushed to Linux foundation git repo and github.  Rana contributed a tag to rdf tool.  A first pass is complete on the HTML viewer.  The HTML viewer will produce a single HTML file.  Currently there is no formatting on the HTML file.  Binaries for the tools will be built and published once unit testing is complete.
  • Website update – Discussion on use of github as a backup to Linux foundation git repo, but the Linux foundation will be primary repo

 

Review of last week’s minutes:

  • Discussion on backwards compatibility requirements.  Need to have a definitive statement for the mandatory fields.  Have a way to convert forward and an understanding of what would be lost translating back.  Need to be a way to represent one model that incorporates both 1.0 and 2.0 spdx.  Propose a general approach of creating a new model that is not constrained by compatibility then, once the proposal is understood; make the specific tradeoffs to compatibility.
  • Suggestion to that we have specific examples to work against for working on the hierarchical proposals.  Suggestion for examples on embedded packages (zlib and coreutils), need an example for supply change and possible one that mixes both supply chain and embedded.  FFMPEG and JBoss were suggested.  Three examples, zlib, coreutils, FFMPEG.  Rsyslog as an example of a simple supply chain example.  It is showing up in various embedded products.  Commons Logging as another example – simple embedded case.  Consider a Maven based scenario. Apache CFX as another example.
  • Suggestion to replace the term ACL (“includes/excludes”)

 

 

2012-01-03-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 1/3/2012

 

Attendees:

  • Gary O’Neall
  • Bill Schineller
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Kate Stewart
  • Rana Rahal
  • Peter Williams

 

Agenda:

  • Review of latest 1.1 spec draft

 

Review of 1.1 spec draft

  • ·         Should the data license be a new tag?  Kate will discuss this with Jilayne
  • ·         Fixed the bugs related to spelling/grammar
  • ·         Added optional creator comment field – Peter will update RDF then assign to Gary to update tools
  • ·         [action] Verify the verification code by comparing the python results with the java tools results (Bill)
  • ·         Inconsistency in RDF examples related to “nodeid” and “resource=” license references.  Kate will make it consistent in the document.  Cannot easily make the tool generate consistent references, however, it is equivalent in RDF.
  • ·         RDF site has missing SHA – Peter to add back the SHA for versioning
  • ·         Update to the diagram – Currently no object model around Organization and Person.  Proposal to add object model for 1.1.  Will add to the list of features to be considered for 1.1.
  • ·         Data license – change text from “only valid” to “current valid” to reflect the fact 1.0 version had a different “only valid” value.
  • ·         Use of the word “database” in the data license section can be confusing.  The creative commons zero license only refers to “database” and not “data”.  Kate will update spec to add text connecting “database” to its use in the license (e.g. “database as used in the Creative Commons …”).
  • ·         Supplier field – implementation of this field isn’t clear.  To be discussed in the 2.0 discussion for the supply chain use cases.
  • ·         Would be nice to add the Creative Commons Zero license as an appendix to the spec.
  • ·         Will add a changelog for future changes to spec

 

Other discussions and updates:

  • ·         Timing on version 1.1– proposed target end of Q1
  • ·         License matching – legal team is discussing if 2 license texts represent the same license.  Proposal to create a guidelines document (separate from the spec) and a tool reference implementation (being worked on by Kate)
  • ·         Proposal to annotations in programming languages – will add a bug to track
  • ·         Tools – haven’t heard from Martin on increasing upload size – Kate will check with Martin.  Other option is to update the new website.
  • ·         Kate will be in Europe next week, but still plans to make the call.  The last 2 weeks Kate be in Australia and will not be able to make the call due to time zone differences.

2012-01-10-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 1/10/2012

 

Attendees:

  • Gary O’Neall
  • Bill Schineller
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Brandon Robinson
  • Rana Rahal
  • Savino Sguera

 

Updates – still can’t upload tools

 

Gary to forward email to Kirsten for Martin to up the limit

 

Version 1.1 –

 

Tools need to be updated to the latest spec, Gary will review 1.1 draft once completed and update the Java tools to the latest spec

 

Git repo – should we upload the binaries?

 

Problems configuring Git repo for the python tools – enlisting Peter’s help

 

Update spdx tech page to display the git repo URL – Gary to update page

 

Next week – discuss 818, example document – try out an example, move it to something more concrete

 

 

Agenda:

  • ·         Update on tool blockers
  • ·         Next steps on bug 818 (hierarchical packages)

 

Update on tool blockers:

  • ·         Still unable to upload tools due to the 3MB limit.  Gary to forward email to Kirsten to forward to Martin.  Martin has been pretty active on the web redesign, emails may be getting caught in a spam filter somewhere.
  • ·         The tools need to be updated to the latest 1.1 spec.  Once the 1.1 spec is completed, Gary will compare the 1.1 pdf spec to the rdf spec Peter maintains as well as the tool.  Any updates to the tool will be done at that time.  Note: the new verification code algorithm is implemented in the latest version of the tools.
  • ·         It is possible to get the latest source code from the spdx git repository.
    • o   Gary to add the URL to the main SPDX-Tech page
    • o   If anyone would like the built binaries to be added to the git repository, let Gary know and he will push the binaries to the repository
  • ·         Running into some issues getting Jaime access to the python tools repository.  Gary just sent Peter an email this morning outlining the issues and asking for assistance.  Once Jaime’s tools are uploaded, we can compare the verification code output.

 

Next Steps on bug 818:

  • ·         Would like to make progress since this is a rather impactful change to the spec
  • ·         If Ed is available for next Tuesday’s call (1/17/2012), the technical call can focus on making progress on 818
    • o   Request that users of the spec review Ed’s proposal and comment via email and/or attend next week’s call
    • o   Request that example SPDX documents be created prior to the Tuesday call
    • o   Bill to send out agenda for next week’s call

 

2012-01-17-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 1/17/2012

Attendees:

  • ·         Gary O’Neall
  • ·         Bill Schineller
  • ·         Kirsten Newcomer
  • ·         Ed Warnicke
  • ·         Brandon Robinson
  • ·         Peter William
  • ·         Rana Rahal
  • ·         Jack Manbeck

Agenda:

  • ·         Update on tools
  • ·         Discuss proposal for hierarchical supply chain (bug 818)

 

Update on tools:

  • ·         Discussed using XSLT to produce HTML form an RDF/XML file including some of the challenges with order not being guarenteed
  • ·         Jack offered to help with the HTML and .css on the RDF to HTML tools
  • ·         Agreed to add SPDX examples to the git repo (bug 988 assigned to Gary)

Hierarchical supply chain:

  • ·         Agreed that UML would be a good way to describe and discuss the proposal
  • ·         Ed drafted a class diagram
  • ·         Discussion on the need to discuss more concrete classes vs. modeling higher levels of abstraction – agreed that we need to do both simultaneously
  • ·         Discussion on relationship between SPDX element and current model, will pick up the discussion with more concrete examples
  • ·         Example of a file – proposal would be a URI and Checksum reference to a file (under specifier)
  • ·         Referential nodes - are referenced nodes things that must be referenced or can be referenced?  Proposal that it would be “best if referenced”
  • ·         Do referential nodes introduce an unnecessary complexity? 
    • o   This may be required for signing the references.
    • o   Alternative proposal to signing – archive structure where the files are copied
    • o   Do references need to be resolved for the SPDX specification to work?  Problem with requiring references to be resolved is the SPDX doc could not be read without access to those references. 
    • o   Having a reference model would make it easier for certain use cases and scenarios (e.g. packager of a WAR file containing many copyrighted elements).
  • ·         Ed will send out the class diagram once complete
  • ·         We will pick up the discussion next week

2012-01-24-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 1/24/2012

Attendees:

  • ·         Gary O’Neall
  • ·         Bill Schineller
  • ·         Savino Sguera
  • ·         Kirsten Newcomer
  • ·         Ed Warnicke
  • ·         Brandon Robinson
  • ·         Rana Rahal
  • ·         Jack Manbeck

Agenda:

  • ·         Discuss proposal for hierarchical supply chain (bug 818)

Discussion on excluded files and relationship to SPDX files.  Embedded packages will be addressed in version 2.0 of the spec.

For the embedded packages which are represented by a subdirectory of files, proposal would be that there is an SPDX file at the root of the subdirectory which would detail out the embedded package.  The higher level SPDX would reference the SPDX file in the subdirectory.  The higher level SPDX does not need to detail out the files contained in the lower level SPDX.

Discussion on references to embedded SPDX files – how does that affect the proposed model?  Possibly including a null specifier reference.  Possibly including an SPDX reference in the model.

Discussion on including some of the 1.1 model into the proposed model. 

[I believe there was general agreement that the license model was useful, however this was not confirmed on the call]

Discussion on the model around packages files and file types.  Discussion on whether this model is useful or if it overly complicates and constrains the model.  Agreed that it would be nice to allow SPDX to refer to things other than packages.  Discussion on using the annotations for this purpose.  Will pick up the discussion next week.

 

2012-01-31-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 1/31/2012

Attendees:

  •         Gary O’Neall
  •         Bill Schineller
  •         Kirsten Newcomer
  •         Ed Warnicke
  •         Steve Cropper
  •         Rana Rahal
  •         Jack Manbeck
  •         Peter Williams

Agenda:

  • ·         Discussion on SPDX package definitions
  • ·         Discuss proposal for hierarchical supply chain (bug 818)

Package definitions:

-          Start with Wiki’s definitions

-          Kate proposed any collection of files

-          Jack’s proposal – unit of delivery of software files

  •   What is a “unit” of delivery, over time one unit of delivery may not be a unit of delivery later in the supply chain
  •  Discussion on package/subpackage supply chain model [manufacturing analogy]
  •   Different between unit of consumption vs. unit of delivery

-          The current RDF Package definition could be used

  •   Discussion on if a single file could be both a package and not a package

 

-          Agreed on the usefulness of a definition “{} represent a collection of one or more files that are delivered as a unit" vs "A package represents a collection of software files that are delivered as a single functional component" from http://spdx.org/system/files/spdx-rdf-terms_27.html#Package

  •   The “{}” term will be replaced with an agreed upon term (TBD)
  •   Follow-up on possibly further defining “delivered as a unit”

 

2012-02-07-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 2/7/2012

Attendees:

·         Gary O’Neall

·         Bill Schineller

·         Savino Sguera

·         Peter Williams

·         Kate Stewart

·         Rana Rahal

·         Brandon Robinson

·         Steve Cropper

Agenda:

·         Date for version 1.1

·         Discussion on SPDX package definitions

·          

·         Discuss proposal for hierarchical supply chain (bug 818)

Update on license text:

Large text issue for spreadsheet – proposal to use external text files for the large text.  Will be discussed in the legal team.

Date for 1.1:

·         Would need feedback from the verification code implementations first

Model discussion – comparing two proposals from Gary and Peter:

·         One difference in the models is how the relationships between SPDX documents are implemented.  Gary’s proposal implements it at the Licensable/SPDX Element level while Peter’s proposal implements the relationship at a more concrete level (e.g. SPDX Package and SPDX File).

o   Peter’s model is more straightforward – 1 RDF triplet to describe a relationship vs. 3 RDF triplets

o   The indirect relationship model has the advantage of being more extensible and will allow applications which only want to deal with the SPDX Element/licensable level

o   Question: Is there any use cases which would only use the SPDX Element and not want to go down to the file/package level of detail?  No one on the call could think of any examples.

o   Is there enough value having a level of abstraction and flexibility to describe the relationship to warrant the additional complexity? [We did not close on this question, but the discussion seemed to trend towards the simpler approach]

Note: the top level element of the combined proposal should be SPDX Document (not SPDX file)

Postpone discussion on package definition for when Ed’s back.

Supply Chain Summit will be held immediately after Linux Collaboration Summit – Question – Can we present/discuss the version 2.0?

2012-02-14-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 2/14/2012

Attendees:

  •          Gary O’Neall
  •          Bill Schineller
  •          Kirsten Newcomer
  •          Jack Manbeck
  •          Savino Sguera
  •          Peter Williams
  •          Marshal Clow
  •          Ed Warnicke
  •          Rana Rahal
  •          Brandon Robinson

Agenda:

  •          Large license text update
  •          1.1 date
  •          Discussion on SPDX package definitions
  •          Discuss proposal for hierarchical supply chain (bug 818)

Update on license text:

  •          Bug 1003 – could just keep the HTML formatting and update the pretty printer to interpret the tags
  •          Will implement the license text as external text files encoded in UTF-8.  Spreadsheet will contain a link to the file.

Collab. Summit:

  •          Agree we should have a tech team meeting at the Linux Collab. Summit in April

SPDX package definitions

Hierarchical supply chain

  •          Ed has been updating the Wiki page with additional details on 1.0 and 1.1 comparisons to proposed model.
  •          Discussion and review or Ed’s proposal
    •    Enhanced model for Annotations
    •    Mapping table of the SPDX 1.0 sections to the proposed model
      •   Package file name – should this be mandatory?  In the case of the archive file containing the SPDX file itself, does it makes sense to include the filename in the SPDX?
      •   Package originator – may not required with the supply chain model.  Discussion about different scenarios (such as there is no original SPDX file).  May depend on people generating SPDX files for the code they bring in.
      •   Discussion on annotation types – adding specific types to annotations will allow for compatibility with earlier versions
      • o   Discussion on alternative using subclasses for packages
        •   Are the properties specific to a package or something more general?
        •   Conflict with specificer model
          •          Are we overloading the specifier with specifying the properties?
          •          Does RDF already provide the mechanisms for concrete and references to the concrete data?
          •   Agree we should call SPDX Element SPDX Licensable

Gary will do some homework on mapping the properties into a model where SPDX Package is subclassed from SPDX Licensable.  Will also do some thinking about how to implement the specifier mechanism.

2012-02-21-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 2/21/2012

Attendees:

  •        Gary O’Neall
  •        Bill Schineller
  •        Kate Stewart
  •        Peter Williams
  •        Ed Warnicke
  •        Rana Rahal
  •        Brandon Robinson
  •        Rana Raha

Agenda:

  •        Review minutes from last week
  •        Discuss proposal for hierarchical supply chain (bug 818)

Need to figure out planning of breakout session for Linux Collab in April.

 

SPDX Licensable vs. SPDX Package - no clear decision from last week of how SPDX package relates to SPDX licensable.

 

Three proposals:

   - Ed: original

http://spdx.org/wiki/rough-proposal-signing-and-supply-chain-friendliness-spdx.2.0

   - Gary: Updated for property mappings and a proposal for referencing SPDX licensable (note that the referencing proposal is not considered very complete)

   http://spdx.org/wiki/2012-feb-1-merged-model-proposal

   - Peter(Licensable incorporated into Package) from mail list.

 

Discussion on annotations - when can it be used?

  - Example: a license header that is incorrect creeps into source, email permission from author to correct header prior to release of the package.

  - Example: producer after SPDX is created - sign combined entity only?

 

Annotation - include information you need. 

 

Failure mode example - inbound some source code,  upstream too lazy to do it, don't want to be bound by all rights reserved.. but want to put on SPDX data.

 

Discussion on concluded license vs. declared license - Ed asserting is it really is not needed if we have annotations.   Conflicting assertions - arbitrary subsequent opinions may be problematic, using current model.

 

Example for discussion: 

  Individual has created SPDX file, 2 files in high level directory,

The asserted license in the SPDX document is incorrect (inconsistent with text in the distribution).  How is this handled with annotations and make it clear it is an issue with the asserted license and not a new conclusion on the license?

 

  Basically there exists some complex scenarios as to when you need fine semantic differences to be explicit.  GPLv3 is going to be lots of opportunity for confusion adding in to mess.

 

  To what extent is the review field able to compensate for annotations?

Under discussion. 

 

  Very complicated networks that emerge, and want to know providence.

Want to preserve this...  duplicate vs. backward chains.  (copy or annotate on backward chain).

 

How to get closure & conclusions?  Mixing a couple of things here:

1) how SPDX licenseable elements refer to one another

   - problem that needs to be solved.

2) what is the model for an SPDX document (licensable, but what else is really needed, and what is modeled)

3) heirarchy mechanisms - URI/hashed/etc. (annotations vs. concluded licenses vs. reviewers.)

 

Concern: supply chain day, can use this as a way of picking brains once these proposals are fleshed out and structured for more working conversation.  Collaborative to work through problems rather than marketing to people.  Ed wants to have input from technical team into agenda.

 

Assertion that all the proposals are wrong size - either too big or too small.  Too much vague around the edges.   Reach conclusion and agree on.

 

Can we disconnect the mechanism we use for linking Licensable elements from the model?  Proposed as a way to move the discussion forward.

 

Some of the proposals for the linkage mechanism work well for RDF but not for tag/value. 

 

Gary proposed there may be a way to represent the RDF in a text file in a readable format using triplets.

Gary to send ideas.

 

 

2012-03-20-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 3/20/2012

Attendees:

·         Gary O’Neall

·         Bill Schineller

·         Kirsten Newcomer

·         Kate Stewart

·         Peter Williams

·         Jack Manbeck

·         Marshall Clow

·         Ed Warnicke

·         Rana Rahal

Agenda:

·         1.1 spec

·         Signing proposals

1.1   Spec

 

Verification code has not been tested.  A single implementation in the SPDX tools has been provided, but has not been verified.  We have not heard anything back on the Python implementation.

 

Proposal to move forward as specified.

 

Kate will review bug DB and update spec.

 

Peter will update RDF terms, then Gary will update the tools app and compare the doc to the RDF to the tools implementation.

 

Kate to put draft licensing changes in SPEC and get signoff from legal team

 

2.0 Specification - Signing proposals:

 

·         Backwards compatibility requirements

o   Ed asserts that there are mandatory fields in 1.0 that do not make sense in the supply chain scenarios. 

§  Proposal to review these mandatory fields and decide if they make some of these mandatory fields as optional in version 2.0

§  Agree to discuss what is mandatory and what is not in the in person meeting

§  Agree to document use cases

·         Agree that signing is optional

·         Compatibility – inline would probably break existing tools if the document was signed

·         Put to a vote – Most participants expressed the opinion that both would work.  Vote yielded a majority to the detached proposal.  Rana – pass,  Marshall – pass , both should work, Jack – detached,  Gary – detached,  Bill – detached, Kirsten – detached, at that point it was clear that we had trended to detached, so voting stopped.

Plan for the face to face meeting:

·         Wednesday PM session:   discussion of Use Cases & Mandatory field migration from 1.0 to 2.0

·         Thursday AM:  proposal and discussion with wider group on what fields do it make sense to change what is mandatory, and what is not.  Get wider group feedback – before moving forward

·         Thursday PM: Working through Ed's wider 2.0 proposal, incorporating feedback from earlier sessions on mandatory fields vs. not, and whiteboarding against the use cases. 

Pre-work before Face to Face.

·         Create a table of the mandatory fields and properties, and list the use cases that support and those that are contraindicated by them.    Have this work done before we get to face to face meeting.   - Kate put a wiki page framework up.   Others to add use cases against the fields as they think of them.

·         Create a consolidated use cases for 2.0 list.   Bill has transferred work from pad onto this site.   All – please review and add other cases for consideration.

 

2012-04-04-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes for April 4, 2012 Face to Face meeting at Linux Collaboration Summit

Attendees:

Marshall Clow

Kate Stewart

Ed Warnicke

Jack Manbeck

Gary O’Neall

Peter Williams

Bill Schineller

Kirsten Newcomer

 

Discussed proposed agenda for Thursday afternoon (4/5) meeting

  • Use case discussion (Thursday)
  • Mandatory vs. non-mandatory / backwards compatibility
  • SPDX Tech web site
    • Review progress; request update from volunteers, and from Steve C.

 Steps needed to close on v 1.1 of the spec

  • Get Tech team to sign off, then publish to general team for final review
  • Open issues:
    • final pass to ensure RDF and spec are in synch -- Kate
    • Appendix 1 will be updated to reflect what’s on the website as of date -- Kate
    • Review section 1 to see if it needs to be updated  -- Kirsten
    • Compare version 1.1 and 1.0 side by side -- Kirsten
    • Compare RDF terms, Spec terms, and tool implementation for 1.1 - Gary
    • 5.3 & 5.4:
      • Per discussion, these fields will be made OPTIONAL -- Kate
      • Peter to provide a proposal for how to present RDF examples for these fields
  • Provide guidelines to consumers for adopting 1.1
    • Minimum: update Data License and Package verification code
    • Available OSS tools support multiple versions of the spec

 Proposed governance model for SDPX Technical group

  • Post agenda one day ahead of call
    • Kate owns and will delegate as needed
  • Proposals to be voted on will be posted to wiki and sent to mailing list
    • Votes sent to mailing list
    • Votes tabulated on wiki (with names)
    • We will use Plus one model for votes
      • Plus one (+) is a yes vote
      • Minus (-) is a no vote
      • Zero (0) is a present / don’t care vote
  • Any objection / negative vote results in a call scheduled on the topic
    • We assume that if you voted minus, you’ll participate in call

Brief discussion of signing & review fields

  • Suggest using annotations on already signed files for review data

Discussed schedule for 2.0. Potential schedule:

  • Draft by end of 2012, with beta program
    • Need tools lined up to support beta
    • Provide v2.0 SPDX document as an example
    • 2.0 GA is about 1 year out

Proposed To-Do list for next 12 months

  • Mailing list for users: spdx-users
  • Publicize IRC channel; ensure registered
  • Additional tools needed
    • SPDX document for existing tools -- Gary
    • SPDX validator – enhance viewer
    • Reading packages and generating SPDX files – Ninka, Fossology
      • Gary has offered to help Fossology
    • License matching normalization – Kate & Daniel G.
    • License matcher – input text, and check to see if one of the standard licenses, leverage normalization tool
    • Existing tools now handle tag value format
      • Go between tag and rdf and spreadsheet
  • Tooling available with
    • Ubuntu – Kate & Gary
    • RPM
  • SPDX tools available via SaaS model
    • Amazon offers an option here
    • Gary has an instance already; UI needed
    • Ask LF to pay for hosting this instance for fixed domain (Kate/Jack will approach Jim when we’re ready)
  • Additional documentation is needed
    • Getting Started Guide with SPDX
    • YouTube video
    • Update tools documentation – Kirsten
    • Translated version of v1.1 into Japanese – Kirsten to see if I can find a volunteer to do this by June
      • Future: identify process for getting spec and related materials translated by community volunteers

SPDX 2.0 Use Case review & discussion: changes based on discussion captured in wiki changes

  • NOTE: Review to continue starting with item 12.

 

As always, comments and corrections are most welcome!

Kirsten

2012-04-11-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 4/10/2012

Attendees:

  • ·         Gary O’Neall
  • ·         Bill Schineller
  • ·         Kirsten Newcomer
  • ·         Kate Stewart
  • ·         Jack Manbeck
  • ·         Ed Warnicke

Agenda:

  1. 1.       overview Linux Collab meetings and SPDX summit.
  2. 2.       1.1 new optional field proposal: File Comments

https://bugs.linuxfoundation.org/show_bug.cgi?id=1017

  1. 3.       2.0 Use Case - status of fill in, owners for remaining?

Overview Linux collab Meeting: All attendees on the call participated in the face 2 face meeting

 

File comments proposal (https://bugs.linuxfoundation.org/show_bug.cgi?id=1017)

 

  • Proposal was reviewed
  • Added detail to the proposal that a property rdfs:comment would be added to file
  • Specific us cases discussed (captured in the use case wiki – “tribal knowledge” relating to a file and file origin information
  • Concern raised that the comment may better be served by other extension mechanisms
    • Agreed that a possibly more proper extension mechanism is a topic for 2.0 and not 1.1
  • Proposal to generalize the definition of the current file license comment
    • Concern this may cause a migration problem between 1.0 and 1.1
    • Concern that some of the use cases that rely on the use of the license comment field as defined may break (e.g. Auditor use case where the auditor expresses the logic behind a file concluded license in the file license comment property).
  • Agreement on the call that a file comment field should be added for 1.1
  • Discussed a related proposal to add a comment property to the extracted license info class
    • Discussed the use case and implementation issues as described in D.M.’s email
    • Discussed and agreed that a File comment would not be sufficient
    • Agreed in principle to add a comment field to extracted license info for 1.1 to solve the use case
      • Information on the proposal (including a new bug) will be sent to the mailing list and we will close on the proposal next week

 

Use Cases

  • Discussed and documented the use cases for the 2 proposals (file comment and extracted license text comment
  • Discussed the NDA use case – some complexity in implementation
  • Agreed that many of the use cases need to be fleshed out more (especially the new ones added from the SPDX forum)
  • Discussed the next steps and how do we get from documenting use cases to deciding on the model
  • Agreed we need to somehow group the use cases
    • Gary to send a proposed process on how to approach grouping use cases over the phone
  • Discussed if we should prioritize the use cases
    • Concern that prioritizing may eliminate use cases which are less important but require less effort
    • Proposal to use an approach that considered priority and effort (e.g. something similar to Pareto)
    • Proposal to use the effort applied to the use case as a mechanism to prioritize
      • Use cases which are not detailed out may indicate lack of interest by participants in the effort thereby indicating lower priority
      • Concern that new members may be disadvantaged by this approach
  • Agreed we would mark use cases as to whether they are sufficiently specified

2012-04-17-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 4/17/2012

Attendees:

  • ·         Gary O’Neall
  • ·         Bill Schineller
  • ·         Michael Herzog
  • ·         Kate Stewart
  • ·         Ed Warnicke
  • ·         Peter Williams
  • ·         Brandon Robinson

 

 

 

 

Collecting use cases – concern on the deadline – 1 ½ weeks isn’t enough.  Suggest 5 from today deadline.  Agreed to 5 weeks.  Ed will update the email and resend to the groups.  Will send out updates weekly until the deadline.

Agreed to grouping the existing items.

Grouped the first set of use cases – results are on the use case Wiki.

Grouped up through build system (10).  Next week we will start at the build system.

 

2012-04-24-Technical Team Minutes

Minutes 4/24/2012

Attendees:

  • ·         Gary O’Neall
  • ·         Bill Schineller
  • ·         Kirsten Newcomer
  • ·         Michael Herzog
  • ·         Ed Warnicke
  • ·         Peter Williams
  • ·         Brandon Robinson
  • ·         Jack Manbeck
  • ·         Sameer

Continue consolidating use cases:

Reviewed current groups

Going from the bottom up to group the less sorted

NDA (#38) – Agreed to refer to legal

Discussion on the “meeting license obligations use case” – has been discussed as “out of scope” for SPDX in previous discussions.

SPDX Lite – not really a use case, but it is a topic which affects many use cases – suggest to move to cross-cutting concerns

Stopped at #24 working from th bottom

 

Business Team

  • This is the working area for the Business Team. This team has primary responsibility for planning and coordinating the rollout of SPDX.
  • The Business Team meets every other Thursday at 11am eastern US time alternating weeks with the General Meeting.   The Dial In number for the US and Canada is Dial-in (US&Canada): 281-964-1607 or 877-675-4345; ID#: 970-898-2804. There is a webex at http://ti.webex.com
    and enter the meeting number: 755 887 596
    For a complete list of dial in numbers see the business team dial in numbers pdf below.
  • You can sign up for the mailing list here.

Beta Program

BETA FEEDBACK

Beta Feedback Meeting 7/7/2011

Attendees

  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Nicholas, Protecode
  • Mark Gisi, Wind River
  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck
  • Bill Schineller, Balck Duck
  • Phil Koltun, Kinux Foundation
  • Scott Lamons, HP
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor
  • Phil Odence, Black Duck
  • Guillaume Rousseau, Antelilnk
  • Freddy Munoz, Antelink
  • Pierre Lapointe, nexB
  • Jilyane Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Steve Cropper, Cisco
  • Philippe, Antelink

 

HP - Scott Lamons

How well did the SPDX format cover information you need to exchange?

The most useful part for our review process is the higher level package information because we require product/project teams to enter information into our tracking system about the open source package they are using/distributing -- often these teams make mistakes or enter incomplete information.  SPDX potentially provides a better and  more trustworthy way for teams to enter this information into our system.

What was effort involved in converting to/from SPDX format?

Very straight forward using the tools that Gary provided although it might be helpful to have a GUI based tool for non-expert users.   We did encounter a few bugs but I believe these have since been corrected. 

Did the SPDX format help you understand what was in the software?

Yes, the spreadsheet format is well organized and easy to follow.

How did the standard license information work for you?

Can you see how using SPDX could save your organization time/money?

Are any changes needed to make SPDX meet your needs?

Separate package name and version fields would be helpful.   Combining name and version into the PackageName field will require additional processing and interpretation which we would rather not do since our system has seperate fields for FOSS name and version.  

Some corrections and comments in the specification are attached in MS Word format.

Issue: Spearate package name and version fields

  • Several people want this
  • Should be a Must-Do for 1.0
  • Version should be optional or allow for an "Unknown"

Issue: Confusion/Disagreement over package level licenses - what they mean, how they should be used, what's important

  • Still confusion over which license fields are valuable and how
  • Scott L - He sees value of Declared and Licenses in File.  Not sure about Concluded
  • Mark G - He uses the concept of an "aasociated" license -- what the community thinks
  • We need to make this a Must-Do for 1.0.

Issue: Time it takes to do the analysis

  • Mark G - Had to be more careful with analysis because he knew that there would be more eyeballs on the results
  • Scott L -- uses package level data more.  file by file is useful, but package is more important.
  • Mark G. - to really get it right, you have to go down to the file level

 

Antelink -- Freddy Munoz

 

  1. How well did the SPDX format cover information you need to exchange?
    The format provides reliable information about licenses (based on human analysis) and the distinction between the licences who are declared by the package creator and those which are found in files.
  2. What was effort involved in converting to/from SPDX format?
    The conversion from the SPDX file format to an object model was easily made.
  3. Did the SPDX format help you understand what was in the software?
    The SPDX file format gives declarative fine scale information about the licenses and the origin of each file in the package.
  4. How did the standard license information work for you?
    For us the standard license information is very important because is much more precise and reliable than a simple declaration of the licence's name with no standard formatting.
  5. Can you see how using SPDX could save your organization time/money?
    When we collect information about open source projects, it would be easier to parse information if the licence information were completely machine readable. SPDX format provides this feature.
  6. Are any changes needed to make SPDX meet your needs?
    If any file's licence cannot be defined ("none") it would be better if the format allowed to use "none" as one of concluded licenses.
    It's necessary to impose every concluded license to be the concluded license of at least one file, otherwise some licenses could be considered as concluded licenses of the package but we cannot know from which file (component) they come from.
  • Was pretty happy with the format
  • Some concern with different types of licenses - Global license might be overridden by file level license
  • If conclusion at file leve is that you are not able to determine a license, how can you create a package level info.
  • If you have a match against source code, should that go into concluded license.
  • Discussion about "no assertion" vs "none" and what they mean. 
  • Must-do for 1.0 -- provide guidelines about when to use none vs no-assertion at file level licenses
  • Must-do for 1.0 -- provide guidelines on concluded license at file level vis a vis source code matches
  • Few artifacts of were tagged.

 

Additional issues:

  • Issue of standardization on package names

 

 

 

Beta Program Doc and Email Blurb

Email blurb for recruiting beta sites

----------------------

As you may know, SPDX is a new standard for companies that need to exchange information about the open source licenses included in a software package.  SPDX is being developed by dozens of organizations as a working group of the Linux Foundation.  This standard will greatly streamline the disparate disclosure processes that exist through the software supply chain.

We Want You

We are looking for a few companies or organizations that would like to participate in the SPDX Beta Program.  Beta participants will be asked to use the SPDX spec to exchange information with one of their trading partners (a supplier or a customer/user of their software) and provide feedback on the specification and the process.

You Can Count on Us

The SPDX support team will be helping you through the process – providing you with advice and information and gathering feedback on your experiences.

Be an SPDX Star

By participating in the Beta program, you can help further the SPDX initiative – reducing the time and effort involved to understand and analyze software for open source licenses.

Attachments: 

Beta Sites

Here are the potential beta sites so far:

HP

  • Contact Scott Lamons

Wind River

  • Contact Mark Gisi

Mentor Graphics

  • Contact Brad Dixon

Motorola

  • Contact Esteban Rockett

Fedora

  • Contact Tom Calloway

ASUS

  • Soeren Raebenstein

Antelink

  •  Guillaume Rousseau

Alcatel-Lucent

  •  Contact TBD?

Draft of SPDX Beta Program Orientation slides

See attachments.  These are still a work in progress.

Draft v2 of SPDX Beta Program Orientation slides

Here are the latest slides for  the Beta Orientation

Final SPDX Beta Orientation Slides

These are the final slides we used on the Beta call in PDF and PPT format.

Recording Link for Beta Orientation Call Feb 3, 2011

Here is the recording from the Beta Orientation if anyone wants to listen/watch.

 

https://cc.readytalk.com/play?id=43h3pl

Technical training materials for beta

Attached is a draft of the technical training slide deck. 

Feed back and/or revisions are welcome.

Events in 2012

Here are potential events where we would like to have a talk on SPDX.  We will create an abstract that anyone can use.  If you are planning to be at one of these events (or an event that's not listed)  and would like to submit a talk on SPDX, please let Kim know kim.weins@openlogic.com.

  • LF
    • Android Builder/Embedded – Feb CA - Mark Gisi Wind River submitting proposal on compliance/SPDX, Phil O to look into including in BD talk
    • Collab Summit – Apr CA -- Kim to submit a talk
    • Enterprise Summit – May NY
    • LinuxCon Japan – Jun Yokohama
    • LinuxCon NA – Aug San Diego
    • LinuxCon Europe – Nov Barcelona
  • Others
    • DebConf Jul 2012 Nicaragua
    • OSCON – Jul Portland -- 
    • ApacheCOn – Nov  -  Scott Lamons willing to speak
    • EclipseCon – Mar DC - BOF Mahshad/Chuck putting together
    • FUDCon – Jan VA
    • Open World Forum -- End Sep. Guillaume willing to speak
    • FOSDEM Legal DevRoom  http://info9.net/wiki/fosdem/LegalIssuesDevRoom/  Philippe O or Antelink

Launch for 1.0

Ideas for Rollout Plan

Here are the initial ideas for the rollout plan.

Process for Adding to License List (Draft)

  • Process
    • First validation/vetting for complete/correct info - contact person who submitted
    • Decision making by group
      • Allow comments in a timeline
      • Start with an open ended time
      • Have business team make decision initially until we see what the volume is
        • Shoot for doing this first year unless it's getting out of hand
      • Way to batch it - handle at biz team meetings
      • Can have some where we decide to "defer" for now.
      • Business team will decide -- likely based on majority vote for people that attended the meeting (at least 5 people and 1 legal)
      • Publish the ones we will vote on 2 weeks in advance to full list.  Discussion/comments on biz list.
        • Set up a separate wiki page to keep the list tracked of what we are voting on when
    • Later -- Have a more formal committee that makes a decision - 5-7 people
      • Should have 2 legal spots on community
      • Might want at least one community spot
      • Nominations (including self nominations) make clear the requirements
      • Way to adjust if someone is not participating
    • Assignment of standard name
      • Have requester/"pilot" propose a standard name (short and long) based on our rules
      • Review and agree on that when we vote
    • Data entered into repo and templatizing is done
      • Templatizing should be automated process
    • Review/QA of the data in the repo
      • Have a legal person look to make sure it's OK and nothing is broken
  • Suggested Criteria
    • Center of gravity is OSS license but will consider freeware or
      other licenses that are widely encountered.  For example would consider
      Sun Binary Licenses.  Things that share many/all of OSI attributes -
      but may have additional requirements
    • Not for purely commercial licenses (ex EULA, or Oracle license)
    • License must be publicly accessible
    • License that is seen across multiple projects or on a heavily used project
    • License that will be popular in future (eg new version of GPL, Apache)
  • Need a statement that we don't necessarily consider all these
    licenses to be open source - just trying to facilitate a way to refer
    to them.  Check how Fedora does this (talk to Spot)
  • Who does stuff
    • Could have one person "pilot" assigned to a license and have them follow it through process  all the way to finish to put in repo
    • List of volunteers willing to be pilots and rotate through that list -- show list on site
    • Assign the Bugzilla issue to someone (manually initially) -- Kim will assign names manually
    • Allow people to submit directly to Bugzilla or via a form on the site
      • To use Bugzilla, you have to register, so that might filter people out, so if we had a form on the site that would work.  That form could send an email and then someone can manually enter in the bug database
    • Automatically send comments to mailing list when bugzilla form is updated
  • For bulk groups of licenses we could put them thru in bulk -- and have a bit of a different process
  • Need to discuss how we will turn the license list spreadsheet into the web pages.  Right now it's a multi-person process and we will need to streamline.
  • Timeframe
    • Will need to set expectations for turnaround time
    • Likely a 2-3 month period (rough target -- not a guarantee)
      • 2 weeks -- Time to vet
      • 2 weeks to comment (min)
      • 2 weeks in advance to schedule a vote
      • 2-4 weeks to enter in repo and QA after approval

 

SPDX FAQs

 

Frequently Asked Questions

General

  • What is the SPDX Specification?
    • The SPDX Specification enables suppliers and consumers of software that contains open source code to provide a "bill of materials" that describes the open source licenses and components that are included.  The specification defines a common file format to communicate this information.
  • Who do you expect to use the SPDX Specification?
    • The specification is designed for use by participants in the software supply chain.  Some potential use cases for the spec:
      • Developers of open source projects could provide an SPDX file to users of that project
      • Linux distros could require upstream projects that are included in the distro to provide an SPDX file
      • Developers of software that includes a Linux distro or open source project could provide an SPDX file to their users or customers
      • In the mobile industry, chipset providers, mobile providers and carriers could exchange SPDX files as software moves through the supply chain
  • Am I required to use the SPDX specification?
    • The SPDX organization does not and can not make it a requirement for anyone to use the SPDX specification.  However, we do encourage the use of SPDX as a way to streamline the processes needed to analyze software for open source licenses.  However, there may be companies or organizations that DO require use of the SPDX specification and the creation of SPDX files as part of contracts with their supply chain partners.  For example, a mobile handset vendor might require, as part of a contract, that it's supplier provide an SPDX file along with any software.
  • Who created the SPDX spec?
    • The specification is being created by a working group of the Linux Foundation.  Its members represent a wide spectrum of open source creators and consumers, including open source communities, Linux distros, mobile supply chain companies, software companies, makers of open source scanning tools and service providers.  The process is an open process, run much like an open source community, and the group is open for anyone that wants to participate.  Membership in the Linux Foundation is not required to participate.
     

Using the SPDX Spec

  • Is an SPDX file associated with a particular piece of software?
    • Yes.  An SPDX file is associated with a specific version of a software package.  A package may consist of one or more files. When any changes are made to a particular version of software, the corresponding SPDX file will also need to be updated to reflect those changes.
  • What information is included in an SPDX file?
    • We refer you to the SPDX specification for specific details, but at a high level, a SPDX file represents components, licenses and copyrights associated with a particular version of a software package.  For example, it includes license information (if any) associated with each file found within the package.  It may also include information about what open source project or component the file originated from.
  • Is SPDX for open source packages only or can I use it with software that is a mix of both open source and proprietary?
    • SPDX files can be created for any software component that consists of one or more files. The software component is typically represented as a single archive file (e.g .tar, .gz, .bz2, .zip, … ). 
  • How do I know if the information included in the SPDX file is accurate?
    • There are several ways to assess the level of trust in an SPDX file.
      • Each SPDX file includes a history of who created and reviewed the information -- similar to what you would see for authors of open source code.  By reviewing that information, you can make your own assessment of the level of trust you place in the creators. 
      • In cases where you receive the SPDX file from a supply chain partner, you may also have separate contractual arrangements whereby a supplier vouches for or guarantees the accuracy of the SPDX file. 
      • You may choose to use software tools that can scan software and validate the accuracy of the SPDX file.
      • You may choose to use software tools that can scan software and validate the accuracy of the SPDX file.
  • How does one handle non open source licenses or licenses not found in the SPDX approved license list?
    • When a license identified in the software package is not found in the list of approved SPDX licenses, one can add the license text to the SPDX file and define a new license label. That license label is defined only for that specific SPDX file.
  • How does SPDX work with binaries?
    • Binary files represent just another file type. License information (if known) should be assigned to each file regardless of its file type (e.g., binary, source, script …).
  • How does one represent a file or package that is dual licensed (i.e., a license choice)?
    • SPDX license information can be represented using conjunctive or disjunctive regular expressions.  For example, a file that is dual licensed under either the GPL-2.0 or MIT would be represented using the following disjunctive expression: GPL-2.0 OR MIT. 
  • How does one represent a file that is licensed under two or more licenses?
    • SPDX license information can be represented using conjunctive or disjunctive regular expressions.  For example, a file that is subject to the Apache-2.0, MIT and GPL-2.0 would be represented using the following conjunctive expression: Apache-2.0 AND MIT AND GPL-2.0.
  • The Creator field is mandatory. If my organization does not permit me or my organization to be listed in the Creator field, is the SPDX file non-compliant?
    • Although including a value for this field is mandatory, one can always choose the value: ANONYMOUS as described in section 3 of the specification. Use of the ANONYMOUS value would be compliant with the SPDX specification.
  • What license is the SPDX specification document available under?
    • The SPDX specification document is available under the  Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Unported License. A copy of the license can be found in the appendix of the specification.
  • What license is the SPDX file data under?
    • The first version of the specification requires the SPDX file data to be placed under the Open Data Commons Public Domain Dedication and License 1.0 (“PDDL-1.0”).  There are plans to revisit this requirement in future revisions of the specification. See section 2 of the specification for more details.
  • Can I share a collection of SPDX files I created with another party under confidential terms?
    • The specification states that although it requires the SPDX data to be available under the Open Data Commons Public Domain Dedication and License 1.0 (“PDDL-1.0”), it does not prohibit one from entering into a confidentially agreement with   another party  where the agreement restricts sharing of the SPDX data. See section 2 of the specification for more details.
  • Why are there two different license fields for a package (Concluded License and Declared License)?
    • The Concluded License field is the license the SPDX file creator believes governs the package. The Declared License is what the authors of a project believe govern the package. Often these fields have the same value. When they are different the SPDX file creator should provide background information in the Comments on License field.
  • Why does the specification include examples for both Name/Value tag and RDF/XML formats?
    • Name/Value tag and RDF/XML formats are two very popular data syntax representations used within the open source community. The SPDX file creator can choose to represent the SPDX data using either format and therefore examples are provided for both.
  • Why are there two package identifier fields Package Checksum and Package Verification?
    • Although the values of the two fields Package Checksum and Package Verification are similar, they each serve a different purpose. The Package Checksum provides a unique identifier of a software package which is computed by taking the SHA1 of the entire software package file. This enables one to quickly determine if two different copies of a package are the same.  One disadvantage of this approach is that one cannot add an SPDX data file into the original package without changing the Package Checksum value. Alternatively, the Package Verification field enables the inclusion of an SPDX file. It enables one to quickly verify if one or more of the original package files has changed. The Package Verification field is a unique identifier that is based on SHAing only the original package files (e.g., excluding the SPDX file). This allows one to add an SPDX file to the original package without changing this unique identifier.
  • Can I use the SPDX trademark?
  • Is there a designated file extension for SPDX files?
    • The SPDX specification does not specify which file extension a SDPX file should have. A common practice is to append the SPDX file with the extension .spdx.
  • Should the version number be included as part of the name in the package name field?
    • The specification does not specify whether the version number should or should not be included in the package name field. Since there is a designated field for the version number, it is a common practice not to include the version number in the package name field.
       

 

Licenses (i.e. the SPDX License List)

  • What is the SPDX License List?
    • The SPDX License List is a list of well known, commonly-used, and Open Source Initiative (OSI) approved open source software licenses.  The list includes the following fields for each license:
      • The full name of the license
      • A short identifier for use in an SPDX file
      • A url for where the original license can be found
      • Any relevant notes about the license, (such as if its been since deprecated or its relationship to other license)
      • The license text itself
  • Why does it exist?
    • The purpose of the SPDX License List is to provide short identifiers for popular and common licenses.  The full license text associated with each license on the SPDX License list will have a unique, permanent URL on the SPDX.org website. Being able to refer to licenses via the short form identifier lessens the SPDX file size and allows for unambiguous license identification.
  • How do I identify licenses not on the SPDX License List?
    • The SPDX specification includes a way to identify and include open source licenses that are not on the SPDX License List.  In this case, a short form identifier for the license is created and the full text of the license included in the SPDX file.
  • Why are some licenses I've heard of included on the list and some not?
    • The primary purpose of the list is to provide a short form identifier for common or popular open source software licenses.  To create this list, the SPDX legal work group included all the OSI approved licenses and any other license members of the work group had experience with "in the wild."  All versions (even if since deprecated) of these licenses were also included.  It was always contemplated that the list would grow over time, so the initial goal was to provide a sensible starting point such that the most commonly found licenses would have a short identifier.
  • How to request adding a license to SPDX License List?
  • What if I find a license or license variation that is not on the SPDX License List - how do I identify that license?

 

Tools

  • Are there tools available that can help me create, validate or read an SPDX file?
  • The SPDX Group has developed some open source tools to assist with creation, viewing and validation of SPDX documents. The tools are intended to:
    •    Reduce the effort of creating, consuming and validating SPDX Documents
    •    Provide a translation from the technical document (e.g. RDF/XML or tag-value format) to a more readable format
    •    Provide a mechanism for validating SPDX documents
    •    Enable contributions and review of the tool implementation by the broader technical community through open source licensing
  • In addition, we expect that additional open source and proprietary tools will be created to help with these tasks.
  • See the Tools page for more information and to download documentation.

Business Team Meeting Minutes

Meeting Minutes for the Business Team are posted here:

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 2012 04 26

 

Attendees

  • Scott Lamons
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Phil Odence
  • Mark Gisi
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Chuck Gadreaux
  • Michael Herzog
  • Jack Manbeck

Agenda/Minutes

 

  • SPDX Forum follow-up
    • Scott received the list of folks who registered for the Forum from Kim.
    • Phil O prepared a follow up email that he will send (bcc:) to folks who pre-registered.
    • Might have been a few attendees who didn't pre-register.  Scott will ask Steve if we can get a copy of the sign-up sheet and add those folks to the spreadsheet and follow-up email.
  • Outreach/Adoption
    • Communities
      • Jack is meeting with the Yacto project this morning
      • Scott is trying to setup some time with Jeremy Allison of the Samba project
    • Companies
    • Tools
  • SPDXv2 Discussion (what role should the business team play?)
    • Some good work on use cases but we seem to be lacking a higher level business strategy, direction, and roadmap.
    • What are the high level problems we're trying to address and how do we prioritize these and decide which ones to focus on in 2.0, 3.0, ...   e.g. upstream adoption or solving downstream problems
    • Can these be seperated?   For example upstream adoption may not depend on new features and functionality in 2.0 (or maybe it does?? -- we're still early in the outreach process!).  Should 2.0 be focused on solving the big downstream barriers to adoption by companies, thier suppliers, our their customers
    • Might make sense to circle back and confirm that everyone is still in sync with the high level vision and strategy originally layed out for SPDX (Phil  to dig up some artifacts on that)
    • Micheal volunteered to get us started with a proposal or framework for how the business can  help to uncover and/or clearify the strategy and prioriites for SPDX moving forward.   He will circulate to the team next week and we will discuss further at our next meeting.
  • Web site
    • No update from web team
    • Scott will review bus team work on the new website to ID gaps prior to next meeting
  • Others Topics
    • Phil O reported that there is some emerging interest in SPDX from Japan and Korea
    • Some discussion about how to encourage participation for folks who can't attend during the normal business hours -- encourage more discussion/collaboration on the email list and website. 

 

 

 

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20101209

Agenda/Minutes 2010 Dec 9

1. Beta program

2. User content -didn't get to this

3. Outreach and evangelism - talked a little about this

Participants

  • Kim Weins
  • Phil Odence
  • Phil Koltun
  • Tom Incorvia
  • Scott Lamons
  • Mark Radcliffe

Thoughts for Beta Program (for discussion)

Beta program

-Start with RC1  (Q1 sometime?)

-Need spec and license list available. PO - asked could we get started with license list incomplete?

-Ideally 3-5 trading partner pairs (assuming some will not complete it)

-They agree to designate at least one project where one partner will create an SPDX file and the other partner will receive and review it

-(they could do this in parallel with a “spreadsheet process”)

-They provide feedback on what worked, what didn’t, issues, questions

-SPDX group will provide support – available for ad-hoc and regular calls on technical or other issues

-Time period – feedback by Jun

-Want people willing to be quoted in announcement

-Try to get mix of use cases if possible (ex HP HW supplier and Linux distro, Mobile supply chain, Linux distro/upstream projects, consumer and supplier sides of supply chain)

 

-Where to find people

-SPDX members - Kim

-LF Member Council - Talk to Karen C or Rockett

-ELN - Mark Radcliffe

-Others we know of

 

To Dos

-Brainstorm list – divide and conquer to reach out

-Write up program info/email to solicit interest – Kim

-Presentation on beta program - Kim

-Set up conference call to present further & get organized

-Put together  “beta support team”

-Need a “beta program manager”

-Need training/doc/how to for the beta sites (these will be beta docs for final release)

-Will need a beta email list

-What do we discuss/do at OSBC (Mark has speaking slot and can mention it, work with Matt to get separate seminar)), LF Collab Summit, ELN

-Mark R - can talk at qtrly wine dinner and ask

Brainstorm List of possible participants to approach

  • HP - possibly with Motorola and/or distro partner (RH or Suse or Ubuntu) or vmWare - Scott
  • Canonical/Ubuntu (Kate?) - Kim
  • Motorola with other trading partner - Kim
  • Asus - ask Soren about this  - Mark R
  • Wind River - Phil O
  • MeeGo within LF - Phil K
  • Qualcomm - Mark R and Phil O
  • Nokia - ask Karen C - Kim
  • Freescale - Kim ask Kate
  • Fedora - Phil O
  • Apache - with one of the distros
  • BT - as an end user - Phil O
  • Alcatel Lucent - Mark R
  • Advocacy groups -  to endorse or participate
    • SFLC ( Bradley Kuhn, Karen Sandler - Kim),
      FSF (Eben) Mark
    • OSI - Mark R
  • Legal people -- Mark Radcliffe, Karen C, Heather Meeker
  • Service provider/tool vendors -- generating spdx or reading spdx
  • Mark Radcliffe - has personal lists

 

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 2011 09 01

Attendees

  • Michael Herzog
  • Phil Odence
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Steve Cropper
  • Scott Lamons

Notes

  • Web site content
    • Mapping of old site to new site is 90% complete
    • Content is 60-70% complete
    • Steve and Martin have a plan for how to migrate sandbox to live
    • We need to add some more content.
    • Team will set cutover date and notify people of it
  • Process to add licenses to list
    • Fedora has an additional couple of hundred licenses
    • Need to work with Spot Calloway to add these
    • Jilayne had carl with Tom Incorvia and Carl from OSI re Python and other issues to align list
      • OSI has board meeting Sept 15th -- may have some updates
    • Need to make sure that the licenses aren't variations that will be covered by templatizing
    • Jilayne to work with spot to do their list en masse
  • Reach out to key communities
    • Need to reach out to key communities to engage them
    • Communities have said they want tooling to create the SPDX file and gather the info
      • Some communities have standardized way to do license info and just want to transform it to SPDX
        • They may just need a toolkit
      • Other communities haven't done this at all and you need a product to get it from start
    • Need to define requirements by getting feeback from communites
      • Ask technical team for some ideas about approaches
      • Ask the communities what requirements they want for toolkit or tools
      • Talk to them about process and what we are looking for
    • Use the requirements to refine the tools requirements
    • To Do
      • Create deck to present to communities (15 minutes) - Michael Herzog - shoot for draft Sep 15
      • Have a tech/biz call
      • Reach out and set up meeting to present to few key communities
        • Linux distros - Debian/Fedora +
        • Linux kernel
        • Apache
        • Eclipse
      • 2nd tier -- Source Forge, GitHub
  • FAQs
    • Add to it when we get queries
    • How do we have a quick review cycle

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 2011 12 08

Attendees

  • Scott Lamons
  • Phil Odence
  • Mark Gisi
  • Pierre Lapointe
  • Gary O Neall
  • Kim Weins

Agenda

  • Web site
  • Community outreach
  • 2012 Goals

Notes

Web site

  • Pierre reported that sandbox for new site was up as of yesterday
  • Pierre and Steve will work to rebuild the structure -- goal to finish is Dec 16th
  • We need help to move content over and create content
  • Schedule (tentative pending Pierre and Steve)
    • Dec 16 - Sandbox strcuture completed (Pierre and Steve)
    • Dec 19-Jan 6 Content moved over to sandbox
    • Jan 9 - Cutover to new site
  • Content needed (per the mindmap)
    • We want to assign different people for different part of website.  I will create a different doc in Web Refresh section to track volunteers and responsibilities.

Community outreach

  • We believe that we are close to finalizing the new data license as CC0 (with a preamble)
  • Need to get an update from Michael Herzog on the pitch deck for communities
  • Once both of those are done, we can proceed to setting up meetings

2012 Goals

  • We are starting a process of putting together 2012 Goals for SPDX.  Each team is creating goals which we will then roll up.
  • Kim created a first pass on goals, and we got feedback and inpiut.  The draft of Business Team goals (with feedback) are below
  • Goals for 2012
    • Build out website and necessary content
      • Rollout new website – Q1
      • Infrastructure that’s reliable and recoverable
      • Build additional content as needed
      • Build out metrics – visitors, tool downloads, 
    • Outreach to communities
      • Goal: At least 1 major community announcing support
    • Outreach to companies
      • Goal: At least 10 companies adopting SPDX as a standard
    • Implement a License Add process for repo
      • Implement a workflow process for license
  • Tradeshows to Consider
    • LF
      • Android Builder/Embedded – Feb CA
      • Collab Summit – Apr CA
      • Enterprise Summit – May NY
      • LinuxCon Japan – Jun Yokohama
      • LinuxCon NA – Aug San Diego
      • LinuxCon Europe – Nov Barcelona
    • Others?
      • DebConf Jul 2012 Nicaragua
      • OSCON – Jul Portland -- 
      • ApacheCOn – Nov  -  Scott Lamons willing to speak
      • EclipseCon – Mar DC
      • FUDCon – Jan VA
    • Share the abstract with others
  • Budget Items
    • Website – Hosting
    • Web Design/Development
    • Tradeshows – LF – will LF subsidize?
    • Tradeshows – Other?


 

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110106

Agenda/Minutes 2011 Jan 06

1. Beta program - interested companies, next steps

2. User content - brainstorm list of content

3. Review Action Items

Participants

  • Kim Weins
  • Phil Koltun
  • Phil Odence
  • Pierre Lapointe
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Tom Incorvia
  • Kate Stewart
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Scott Lamons
  • Mark Radcliffe

Notes

  • Beta sites - reviewed list - 5 interested.  See doc on Business section
  • Talked a little about possible trading partners for HP
    • Phil O - to connect Wind River with HP
  • Kim to set up a call to describe the program to all the participants
  • Need to lay out in detail exactly what we want them to do, answer questions on tooling
  • Gary O'Neall reiterated that technical team can provide tooling to generate and read SPDX file from flat file or spreadsheet type format
  • Could also use that call to get feedback on requirements
  • Will schedule call one month out - at Feb 3rd meeting
  • Agenda for that call
    • SPDX overview - benefits, etc
    • Tooling
    • What they will need to do
    • Licensing of data in SPDX file
    • What will we do with the data - what will they need to share
    • Ask their requirements for tooling
    • Discuss any concerns about confidentiality
    • What resources are available (documentation, support, etc)
    • Marketing expectations/requests
  • Slides needed for call
    • Gary - Tooling, Phil O - Overview, Kim - Beta Program for meeting -- create slides for the call
    • We will review the slides next meeting
  • Beta site timing
    • How long will it take?
    • Probably will take weeks to a couple of months
    • Kim to include sample project plan in slides
  • Send invites to the meeting and to list in general - Kim
    • Beta sites might want to invite supply chain manager for that call or other
  • Ask Rocket to be on call to discuss legal issues
  • Mark R - will try to include SPDX and possibly any results to date in his OSBC talk


 

Action Items from last time

-Brainstorm list – divide and conquer to reach out - Done

-Write up program info/email to solicit interest – Kim - Done

-Presentation on beta program - Kim - Not done yet

-Set up conference call to present further & get organized - Kim to do

-Put together  “beta support team”

  • Kate, Kim, Gary, Jilayne have volunteered

-Need a “beta program manager”

  • Kim or ask John Ellis

-Need training/doc/how to for the beta sites (these will be beta docs for final release) - discuss on next call

-Will need a beta email list

-What do we discuss/do at OSBC (Mark has speaking slot and can mention it, work with Matt to get separate seminar)), LF Collab Summit, ELN

-Mark R - can talk at qtrly wine dinner and ask

Brainstorm List of possible participants to approach

  • HP - possibly with Motorola and/or distro partner (RH or Suse or Ubuntu) or vmWare - Scott - working on
  • Canonical/Ubuntu (Kate?) - Kim - Not ready yet
  • Motorola with other trading partner - Kim - Yes
  • Asus - ask Soren about this  - Mark R - haven't talked to them yet
  • Wind River - Phil O- Yes
  • MeeGo within LF - Phil K -Not ready yet
  • Qualcomm - Mark R and Phil O - haven't talked to them yet
  • Nokia - ask Karen C - Kim haven't talked to them yet
  • Freescale - Kim ask Ann Thornton
  • Fedora - Phil O - Yes
  • Apache - with one of the distros - Kate to see if she can find someone, Scott to reach out to Jim J
  • BT - as an end user - Phil O - contact is gone
  • Alcatel Lucent - Mark R haven't talked to them yet
  • Advocacy groups -  to endorse or participate
    • SFLC ( Bradley Kuhn, Karen Sandler - Kim), haven't talked to them yet
      FSF (Eben) Mark haven't talked to them yet
    • OSI - Mark R haven't talked to them yet
  • Legal people -- Mark Radcliffe, Karen C, Heather Meeker
  • Service provider/tool vendors -- generating spdx or reading spdx
  • Mark Radcliffe - has personal lists

 

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110120

Agenda/Minutes 2011 Jan 06

1. Beta program - review beta program slides

Participants

  • Kim Weins
  • Phil Koltun
  • Phil Odence
  • Pierre Lapointe
  • Scott Lamons
  • Scott Peterson

Notes

  • We reviewed 2 slide decks for our Beta Orientation meeting on Feb 3  (see attachments below)
    • Beta Program deck - by Kim
    • Tools deck - provided by Gary
  • Feedback
  •  
    • Kim will also create a short version of the SPDX overview as well, and pull all 3 topics into one preso
    • For the Beta preso --
      • add info about who will be on the teams for the Beta participants
      • add info about check-in meetings to Sample Beta Plan
      • Kim to follow up with legal team re licensing of tools and any privacy/NDA/Beta agreements needed
    • For Beta Orientation meeting on Feb 3rd, we will invite legal, technical, program mgmt people for each Beta participant
  • To Do List
    • Kim - send out invite
    • Kim - create/clean up combined deck

 

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110217

Agenda/Minutes 2011 Feb 17

1. Beta program update

2. Volunteers for beta coordinator

3. Beta materials

4. Product management question on tools reqts

Participants

  • Kim Weins
  • Phil Koltun
  • Phil Odence
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Mark Gisi
  • Esteban Rockett
  • Scott Lamons
  • Jilayne Lovejoy

Notes

  • We reviewed status of Beta sites.
    • 3 confirmed trading partner pairs
      • HP - WindRiver
      • Motorola - TI
      • Antelink - community project (OpenLogic will create SPDX file for Antelink)
    • Possibles - still determining
      • Mentor Graphics
      • ASUS
      • Alcatel-Lucent (as another trading partner for HP)
      • Fedora
  •  Beta coordinators
    • We asked for volunteers to be beta coordinators.  They will help project manage a particular trading partner pair and make sure beta is moving smoothly.  VOlunteers are:
      • Kim Weins
      • Phil Odence
      • Kirsten Newcomer
      • Gary O'Neall
    • We may need additional volunteers depending on the number of beta sites.  Let Kim know if you are interested
  • Beta materials
    • We discussed the materials that will be needed for Beta and who volunteered to work on them
      • Process overview (proposed methodology) - still need a volunteer
      • Training materials
        • SPDX overview - business - Kim
        • SPDX technical - ask technical team for a volunteer
      • Documentation on tools - Kirsten N to write, Scott L to help test/review
      • FAQ on using the spec
        • Kim and tech team for techncial stuff
      • Bug system
    • Timing - goal is to be done with materials be end of March.  Drafts are due Mar 17.  That will give last 2 weeks of Mar for review/edits
  • Question on tool requirements
    • Gary O'Neall asked beta participants (3 were on call) for preference of RDF vs tag-value format.  Beta people wanted to check with their technical folks, but general consensus was either that they didn't care which format or leaned toward RDF.
    • Kim forwarded questionnaire to Betas after the call to ask for add'l feedback

 

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110303

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Phil Odence
  • Kate Stewart
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Scott Lamons
  • Michael Herzog
  • Phil Koltun
  • Kirsten Newcomer

Process for Adding New Standard Licenses.

We did not finish discussion, so will continue at next meeting.  Notes so far are below.

  • Anyone can request license to be added through a web form (possibly Bugzilla).
  • Information
    • Person Name
    • Email
    • Organization - community/company
    • License name
    • Actual license text
    • URL for where they found license text
    • Comments -- why they want it
    • Example(s) of open source packages/files that use it
    • Why they want it -- is it their own license or is it something they have encountered in audits
    • Is it going thru OSI approval?
    • Other notes or we need to know
  • Process
    • First validation/vetting for complete/correct info - contact person who submitted it
    •  Decision making by group
      • Allow comments in a timeline
      • Start with an open ended time
      • Have business team make decision initially until we see what the volume is
        • Shoot for doing this first year unless it's getting out of hand
      • Way to batch it - handle at biz team meetings
      • Can have some where we decide to "defer" for now.
      • Business team will decide -- likely based on majority vote for people that attended the meeting (at least 5 people and 1 legal)
      • Publish the ones we will vote on 2 weeks in advance to full list.  Discussion/comments on biz list.
        • Set up a separate wiki page to keep the list tracked of what we are voting on when
    • Later -- Have a more formal committee that makes a decision - 5-7 people
      • Should have 2 legal spots on community
      • Might want at least one community spot
      • Nominations (including self nominations) make clear the requirements
      • Way to adjust if someone is not participating
    • Assignment of standard name
    • Data entered into repo and templatizing is done
    • Review/QA of the data in the repo
  • Suggested Criteria
    • Center of gravity is OSS license but will consider freeware or other licenses that are widely encountered.  For example would consider Sun Binary Licenses.  Things that share many/all of OSI attributes - but may have additional requirements
    • Not for purely commercial licenses (ex EULA, or Oracle license)
    • License must be publicly accessible
    • License that is seen across multiple projects or on a heavily used project
    • License that will be popular in future (eg new version of GPL, Apache)
  • Need a statement that we don't necessarily consider all these licenses to be open source - just trying to facilitate a way to refer to them.  Check how Fedora does this (talk to Spot)
  • Timeframe
    • Will need to set expectations for turnaround time

 

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110317

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Phil Odence
  • Kate Stewart
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Kamal Hassin
  • Mahshad Koohgoli
  • Esteban Rockett
  • Scott Lamons

BMW Questions -- We will add these to the FAQ in the Wiki

  • Q: Do you have to include every file in the SPDX file?
  • A: Yes -- although you can define the package to include whatever files you want and can have unknown info
  • Q: Is there a way to include notes on on how files are linked?
  • A:  There is a free form comment field that can be used for this

Kim to add these to FAQ in wiki and broadcast to various lists

Training

  • Business training materials -- Kim started with Beta Orientation deck -- will add stuff as needed
  • Technical training materials -- Kim to ping Peter W
  • Tools training materials -- Kristen has materials from Gary and will be working on it

 

Process for Adding New Standard Licenses.

We did not finish discussion, so will continue at next meeting.  Notes so far are below.

  • Anyone can request license to be added through a web form (possibly Bugzilla).
    • Protecode might be able to implement web form to integrate to Bugzilla
  • Information- some will be required fields
    • Person Name
    • Email
    • Organization - community/company
    • License name
    • Actual license text
    • URL for where they found license text
    • Comments -- why they want it
    • Example(s) of open source packages/files that use it
    • Why they want it -- is it their own license or is it something they have encountered in audits
    • Is it going thru OSI approval?
    • Other notes or we need to know
    • Make application as close to Wiki page as possibe
  • Process
    • First validation/vetting for complete/correct info - contact person who submitted it
    •  Decision making by group
      • Allow comments in a timeline
      • Start with an open ended time
      • Have business team make decision initially until we see what the volume is
        • Shoot for doing this first year unless it's getting out of hand
      • Way to batch it - handle at biz team meetings
      • Can have some where we decide to "defer" for now.
      • Business team will decide -- likely based on majority vote for people that attended the meeting (at least 5 people and 1 legal)
      • Publish the ones we will vote on 2 weeks in advance to full list.  Discussion/comments on biz list.
        • Set up a separate wiki page to keep the list tracked of what we are voting on when
    • Later -- Have a more formal committee that makes a decision - 5-7 people
      • Should have 2 legal spots on community
      • Might want at least one community spot
      • Nominations (including self nominations) make clear the requirements
      • Way to adjust if someone is not participating
    • Assignment of standard name
      • Have pilot propose a standard name (short and long) based on our rules
      • Review and agree on that when we vote
    • Data entered into repo and templatizing is done
      • Templatizing should be automated process
    • Review/QA of the data in the repo
      • Have a legal person look to make sure it's OK and nothing is broken
  • Suggested Criteria
    • Center of gravity is OSS license but will consider freeware or other licenses that are widely encountered.  For example would consider Sun Binary Licenses.  Things that share many/all of OSI attributes - but may have additional requirements
    • Not for purely commercial licenses (ex EULA, or Oracle license)
    • License must be publicly accessible
    • License that is seen across multiple projects or on a heavily used project
    • License that will be popular in future (eg new version of GPL, Apache)
  • Need a statement that we don't necessarily consider all these licenses to be open source - just trying to facilitate a way to refer to them.  Check how Fedora does this (talk to Spot)
  • Who does stuff
    • Could have one person "pilot" assigned to a license and have them follow it through process  all the way to finish to put in repo
    • List of volunteers willing to be pilots and rotate through that list -- show list on site
    • Assign the Bugzilla issue to someone (manually initially) -- Kim will assign names manually
    • Automatically send comments to mailing list when bugzilla form is updated
  • Timeframe
    • Will need to set expectations for turnaround time
    • Likely a 2-3 month period (rough target -- not a guarantee)
      • 2 weeks -- Time to vet
      • 2 weeks to comment (min)
      • 2 weeks in advance to schedule a vote
      • 2-4 weeks to enter in repo and QA after approval

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110331

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110414

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Phil Odence
  • Phil Koltun
  • Jim McPherson
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Pierre Lapointe
  • Esteban Rockett
  • Mark Gisi
  • Scott Lamons

Agenda --

  • LF Collab Summit
  • Beta program
    • Training materials
      • Final tweaks and changes being made - finish up by end of month
    • Assigned Beta coordinators
      • HP - Wind River -- Phil O and Kirsten
      • Motorola - TI - Gary O'Neall
      • Antelink - OpenLogic - Kim W
    • Kickoff for early May
    • Set up a mailing list for Support for Beta sites - Phil O to set up, Kim to provide list of names
  • New threads from Collab Summit
    • Yocto (or other build tools) integration - Yocto (Jack Manbeck, Mark Gisi to research and come back to team)
    • Community outreach - Distros, Apache & Eclipse
      • Kim to put together value prop & slide deck
      • Apache - Jim Jagielski - Scott Lamons to follow up
        • Might need to start with a few projects
        • Talk to Legal - Sam Ruby? chairman of legal committee
      • Eclipse - had a couple of particpants - Phil O to re-engage
      • Distros
        • Debian - Ask Kate?
        • Ubuntu  - Kate
        • Fedora - Tom "Spot" Calloway - Kate? or Phil O?
      • FSF/SFLC/FSFE - Rockett
    • Education & Communications for Launch
      • Web site refresh - Pierre, Kirsten
        • Do we need to go beyond Wiki?
        • Need to develop info architecture
        • Steve from Cisco can help
    •  
      • Standard document format
      • Broader Value prop/Positioning/messaging platform - work into presos and web sites - Phil O
      • Roadmap (near vs long-term)
      • Presentations for various audiences
      • Whitepapers (SPDX overview - needs to be refreshed, maybe add more)
      • Outreach - Kim
        • PR plan
        • Conferences
        • Tie into LF certification/training
        • Business/community & legal community

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110526 (v2)

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Pierre Lapointe
  • Steve Cropper
  • Kate Stewart
  • Pierre Lapointe
  • Scott Lamons
  • Mike Gisi
  • Phil Odence
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Esteban Rockett
  • Kamal Hassin

 

Agenda

  • Beta Updates
  • Web Site Review
  • Discuss upcoming events

 

Minutes

  • Beta Sites
    • OpenLogic-Antelink
      • Kickoff today
    • Windriver-HP
      • Started the Kickoff
      • Working through issues to get tools running on the Windriver platform
    • TI-Motorola
      • Had an initial call.  Jack is going to run point.
      • Identified one thread of Android to use in the Beta process
      • Jim Van Persom - circled back with Gary
      • Kickoff - scheduled for next week
    • Kate is looking at another potential Beta
      • Also talking to Daniel German re doing SPDX file for Linux kernel (a formal release) - using Ninka
      • Trying to prototype tools
    • Cisco - might want to get involved in Beta
      • Also talked to Jim Zemlin/Karen Copenhaver re LF getting involved in doing SPDX Beta for Linux kernel
      • Concerned about alignment between different SPDX files from different people
      • Issues re sample files on website
    • Discussion re SPDX for Linux kernel
      • Getting SPDX from copyright holder is great per Mark Gisi.  However, thinks, that it may be hard because of amount of work.
    • How do we handle jars that may have other stuff inside -- thought was handling as conjunctive licenses.  Could also handle as a separate SPDX file.
  • Web Site Re-design
    • Discussed with Steve and Martin re current technical setup for SPDX website.
    • It's one website with FOSSbazaar - shared users, db, etc- just different content
    • Uses Drupal 6
    • Martin will set up a sandbox for SPDX so they can experiment and determine what we want and what technology will work.
    • Currently Martin is taking care of SPDX and FossBazaar -- can do small changes.  If want bigger changes, need to get in touch with LF re technical resources to help with website
    • Content
      • Working on personas --- understand the types of people/profiles and their path
    • Phil O -- Offered help to make interim fixes to current website, based on design discussions so far, if needed.
    • Kim to try to re-org Wiki
    • Try to get highest priority
  • Events (to try to speak at)
    • LinuxCon NA -  Phil applied to have half hour at LinuxCon to talk re SPDX, Kate, Kim
    • LinuxCon Europe - possibly Kim or Phil O
    • LinuxCon Brazil
    • Possibly at Linux Plumbers as a BOF - depending on
    • Possibly other communit conferences, DebConf, ApacheCon, EclipseCon etc.

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110526

 

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Pierre Lapointe

 

 

Agenda

  • Beta Updates
  • Web Site Review
  • Discuss upcoming events

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110609

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Pierre Lapointe
  • Phil Odence
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Mark Gisi
  • Kate Stewart
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Steve Cropper

Agenda

  • Beta Updates
  • Web Site Review
  • Update on spec

 

Minutes

  • Beta Sites
    • Antelink - OpenLogic - OpenLogic is producing files.   On track to finish end of June.
      • Will test one with embedded SPDX and one without
    • WindRiver - HP  -  Got the tooling to work (some questions re error messages).  Sent the file over and HP was able to review for first package (30 files).  Now going to do zlib.  Then will do BusyBox and OpenSSL.
      • Some confusion about fitting things in the SPDX package licenses field (declared and concluded licenses for the package).  It's hard to say that there is a single license at the package level.  Mark thinks that declared license is what people "view" the package as.
      • According to Kate --at package licenses
        • Declared - what the project says (like in the Copying file)
        • All Licenses in Files -- Laundry list of any license detected in file
        • Concluded -- what the analyzer concludes - can have ands and ors
      • Clearly there is still a lot of confusion about these license fields at the package level.
      • Kate -asked everybody to read the latest spec to see if it is clear.
      • Steve Cropper:  They like to be able to look at root supplier and latest supplier for the code
      • Tool issues -- are there installability issues?  Gary needs to find out more about what Wind River issues are.  Wind River had to get someone involved to set up environment.  Gary thinks the tools aren't installable enough to be broadly used.  Maybe we can set it up on a web site?  Kim pointed out that this could require some security requirements.
    • Motorola - TI
      • Behind plan.  Gary hasn't gotten any logistical data and not sure what is happening, but there is some activity with the tools.
  • Update on spec 20110605 -- new draft of spec up on website -- needs review.
  • Web site redesign
    • Not much more done yet because team has been busy.  Sandbox is set up with Drupal.  Team is meeting next week.
  • Yocto Project
    • Mark talked to the project
    • They are building kernel + a bunch of packages (100s
    • They are interested because they are part of the family
    • They are not in a position to generate content
    • But they could take SPDX files associated with the packages used and incorporate it into the build and deliver it with the build.
    • Kim: Would it be valuable to be able to aggregate the individual SPDX files together.
    • They are looking for us to have content and then they can work with us.

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110623

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Kirsten Newcome
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Phil Koltun
  • Kamal Hassin
  • Scott Lamons
  • Rockett

Agenda

  • Beta Updates
  • Web Site Review
  • Launch process and activities

 

Minutes

  • Beta Sites
    • Antelink - OpenLogic -
      • OpenLogic has produced SPDX  and Antelink is parsing those files  
      • Will have formal feedback and report next week
    • Motorola - TI
      • Working on pursuing the exchange between Motorola and TI. 
    • WindRiver - HP
      •  Got the time package a week or two ago
        • Biggest issue was per file copyright info
        • Field is required but some people might not have data - could be manual effort
        • Maybe the copyright field shouldn't be required
      • Just got zlib - 200+ files - Scott is converting that to ss
        • Mark and Scott to review
      • Going to do a BusyBox package next
    • Kim to create a place where we can hold Beta feedback
    • Shoot for Jul 7 as "beta feedback" during normal business meeting - Kim to alert other teams
  • Web Site Redesign
    • Meeting last week
    • Used FreeMind to outline flow
    • Two different proposals created
    • Need to merge those -- schedule for next week (Wed)
    • Then Review that proposal with larger group at extended bus team meeting on Jul 7
  • Launch
    • Kim is reaching out to LF to talk about PR and Launch
    • Press release -- we will want quotes from community, beta site, LF, (maybe Eben?)
    • Reviewed punch list for 1.0 Launch
      • Beta review - Jul 7
      • PR/Launch plan
      • Press release development and quotes
      • Community outreach
      • Web site refresh - structure and content
      • FAQs/Docs
      • Launch presos

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110721

Attendees

  • Kim Weins, OpenLogic
  • Scott Lamons, HP
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Pierre Lapointe, nexB
  • Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation
  • Phil Odence, Black Duck
  • Mark Gisi, Wind River
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck

Minutes

  • Update on Launch Plans for LinuxCon
    • Booth Staffing at LinuxCon - we will have a booth that we will staff during breaks.  Kim to put together draft schedule.  The following people have volunteered
      • Kate Stewart
      • Phil Odence
      • Phil Koltun
      • Kim Weins
      • Esteban Rockett
      • Pierre LaPointe
      • Phil Robb (TENT)
    • BOF - Thurs eve.  If we get new people there, it will probably be more of an introductory discussion.  Otherwise we can talk about what's next beyond SPDX 1.0
    • Handout - Kim to create a handout that will go in attendee bags and we can give out at the booth
    • SPDX - Session - by Phil O and Rockett
    • Press release -- Draft to go out next week.  Need people to validate names and provide quotes
  • FAQ - got volunteers by section - recorded on FAQ Draft page
  • Website content
    • Sandbox is starting to be populated with structure and existing content
    • Learning Drupal
    • May need help on additional pieces of content
    • Will need to get volunteers to work on content

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 20110804

Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic

Pierre Lapointe, nexB

Gary O'Neall, Source Auditor

Phil Odence, Black Duck

Scott Lamons, HP

Phil Koltun, Linux Foundation

Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck

Steve Cropper, Cisco

 

Kim Weins on vacation, so Phil Odence held court

 

Press Release -

-       various people trying to get quotes; contact person with Kim out is Jen Cloer from Linux Foundation

-       no update on quotes from people on call

-       see email from Kim on 7/27 (went direct to people who were going to get quotes)

 

FAq's

-       different people have different sections:  need to have done by time press release goes out

  • Kim, Mark, Kate not on call for update
  • Jilayne (license) - no progress on license questions yet
  • Gary, Kirsten (tools) - no progress yet

 

Website

-       update from Kirsten: web team meeting and updating sandbox, not finished yet, want folks to start taking a look at sandbox (with understanding that it's a work in progress)

-       link for comments in the sandbox on Blogs & Discussions page and "Web Site Refresh Forum" link on left side - add comments there; if you have privilege, you can also edit pages for content

-       sandbox.spdx.org

  • see initials of people who are in charge of various sections on site (KN = Kirsten; PL = Pierre; SDC = Steve)
  • Steve added link to forum for feedback on main page for comments, to make that easier to find
  • Kirsten, Pierre, and Steve will pull over content from old site, but will also need working groups to add some content
  • Added calendar modules and other new features that will require new content
  • Navigation box will be added
  • Link to mind map still there if you want reference (but this link will go away eventually)

 

LinuxCon Vancouver:

-       Birds of a Feather session - probably more for informing new people than real working session, only 1 hour.  Very few people from technical team attending event, so not enough time to real working session. 

-       Booth participation - have a booth space, Kim putting together signage.  Need people to staff booth to talk to new people. Booth area open full-time throughout conference, important to have it staffed at breaks/meals in particular.  John Ellis sent out an email to coordinate this - if you can help out, respond to John's email

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 2012 01 05

Attendees

  • Phil Odence
  • Chuck Gaudreau
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Kim Weins
  • Mark Gisi
  • Steve Cropper

Agenda

  • Web site
  • Mark Radcliffe discussions
  • Community outreach
  • Events for 2012

Notes

Web site

  • Web team is getting hierarchy in place for new site
  • Most pages are accessible (but not visible)
  • Need to replicate some of that in the sandbox to try out instructions
  • Goal: Get cheat sheet out by General Team 1/12
  • LIkely have a couple weeks to make the changes

Software Supply Chain Compliance and SPDX Meeting

  • New idea for an "end user" focused meeting in the Bay Area to socialize ideas of SPDX
  • Possibly April 5 or 6 in Bay Area, possibly 9-2
  • Stage Setting on OSS Compliance - Mark R
  • The Challenges Today - Discussion
  • SPDX Primer
  • One or two end users talk (Cisco, HP, WindRiver)
  • SPDX Tooling
  • The New OSS Compliance Best Practice - Discusssion

Community Outreach

  • We believe that we have finalized the new data license as CC0 (with a preamble)
  • Jilayne to get preamble onto SPDX website and email Kim
  • Kim to email communities
  • Need to get an update from Michael Herzog on the pitch deck for communities
  • Once both of those are done, we can proceed to setting up meetings

Events for 2012

  • We have a 2012 events page in the Business section where w are tracking potential events to speak
  • We discussed a few upcoming events
    • LF Embedded Linux Conf -- Mark Gisi and Phil Odence will see if they can include SPDX in talks they are submitting.
    • EclipseCon - Mahshad/Chuck are trying to organize BOF at EclipseCon.

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 2012 01 19

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Chuck Gaudreau
  • Gary O'Neill
  • Scott Lamons
  • Jilayne Lovejoy

Agenda

  • Web Site
  • Update on CC0 "license" feedback
  • EclipseCon BOF
  • Software Supply Chain Summit
  • License List Process
  • Enterprise Adoption issues

Notes

  • Web site training
    • Steve Cropper and Pierre held a training session on moving stuff to the new site.
    • Kim took notes and will turn that into a how-to document and will send to everyone involved
  • Update on CC0 license
    • Kim sent email to Ian Skerrett at Eclipse, Robin Johnson at Gentoo, Spot at Fedora about the change in the data license from Public Data License to CC0
    • So far, I've hear back from Robin at Gentoo that he was happy about that.  HIs email note said:
    • I sent a follow up to Robin asking if he would work with us to get the license list expanded to cover his 252 (or possibly 614) licenses in Gentoo.
  • Eclipse BOF
    • Chuck and Mahshad from Protecode are working to organize BOF at EclipseCon
    • I suggested that they should plan for no more than 20 people. 
  • Software Supply Chain Summit
    • This would be a 1 day meeting in person with people involved in the software supply chain to discuss SPDX and OSS compliance in the supply chain
    • Targeting potentially April 6 (day after LF COllab Summit)
    • To be held in South Bay (possible at DLA or Cisco or HP facilities)
    • Topics would be about OSS compliance in the supply chain issues, SPDX issues and discussion
    • We want it to be not just presentation, but also discussion
    • We would target maybe 20 or so people from enterprises that use/distribute OSS
    • How to get people there
      • Current SPDX members to invite people
      • Mark Radcliffe will help market
      • Ask LF (Jim Z) to help
    • Kim to talk to LF to coordinate so we can finalize date/time/place
  • License List Process
    • We reviewed our previous notes for adding to license list and added a few more ideas and thoughts
    • Details at  http://www.spdx.org/wiki/process-adding-license-list-draft
    • In general it looks pretty good, but we also need legal team to review and give feedback
    • Our goal is to have something in place by end of Q2, so we will start taking these notes and working it into a more formal description and a "to do" list of the pieces we need to put into place to make it happen.
  • Process for companies to adopt 
    • We discussed how we move forward with company adoption. 
    • Scott Lamons talked through their process
      • Can start with procurement team to ask suppliers to provide SPDX
      • Will need to educate procurement team on SPDX (what/why)
      • Will need places on website to point suppliers to
      • HP has a standard spreadsheet format for proposal tracking of all OSS requests -- but it's not the SPDX format.
      • HP would need to change to SPDX format
        • HP Would need to be able to have extra fields that are company specific and have the tools ignore/add those.
      • They Will need tools to help them
        • Scott's idea is that you feed it software repositories to scan for licenses and then you can input the SPDX specific fields and create SPDX files
        • We discussed the fact that ultimately you want to tie all of these pieces together, but in the short term, suppliers could use their current processes for figuring out what OSS they are using and then use the exisitng tools to convert to SPDX format.
      • HP Could also ask their developers that are making internal requests to provide SPDX

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 2012 02 02

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Chuck Gaudreau
  • Pierre Lapointe
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Steve Cropper
  • Scott Lamons
  • Mark Gisi

Agenda

  • Web Site Content Cutover
  • EclipseCon BOF
  • Software Supply Chain Summit - Date and Place
  • Next Steps - License List process
  • Web Resources
  • SPDX 2.0 compatibility
  • Enterprise Adoption issues

Notes

  • Eclipse Con BOF
    • March 28 7pm
    • In DC area
    • On the schedule and organized
    • So far, Mashad and Guillaume will be there
    • How can it be promoted? - Kim to ask LF if they can promote in their newletter
  • Web site
    • Instructions went out
    • Discussed the various types of page and what type to use in various cicrumstances
    • Should our mailing lists all be forums?  We had a question about whether a forum would force us to log back in to respond to an email.  That could be a bit of a pain.
    • We could also think about using forums for the FAQ
  • Software Supply Chain Summit
    • This would be a 1 day meeting in person with people involved in the software supply chain to discuss SPDX and OSS compliance in the supply chain
      • Cisco is willing to host at their facilities in San Jose
      • Need to figure out how many people - 30-40
    • Agenda
      • Goals
        • Should be more education (101)
        • How to get on board & provide feedback
      • State of OSS Compliance Today
      • Intro to SPDX
      • Presentations by end users (at least 2, or a panel)
      • License List
      • Tools
      • What's going on with the spec now
      • Getting involved
      • Discussion
    • Who should we target to company?
      • Maybe 30-40 attendees
      • End user companies
      • Supply chain/Procurement people working with software for 3rd parties and vendors, Legal people, open source compliance people or OSRB, part of R&D team in similar orgs. Want some smaller software suppliers.
    • Targeting Friday April 6 (day after LF COllab Summit) - Steve to check on date and if we can get a room
    • Will need a lunch,breakfast and maybe networking snack
    • Spread the word to the tech team
  • License List Process
    • Volunteers?   Possibly Gary & Jilayne

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 2012 02 16

Attendees

  • Mark Gisi
  • Pierre Lapointe
  • Phil Odence
  • Kim Weins
  • Freddy Munoz
  • Chuck Gaudreaux
  • Gary O Neall
  • Scott Lamons
  • Kirsten Newcomer
  • Steve Cropper

Agenda

  • Web site
  • End User Summit Meeting April 6
    • Logistics
    • Cost
    • Agenda

 

Web site

  • Mark Gisi is all done with his migrations for the website (usage and FAQ)
  • Gary has done -- it's good enough now, but he's
  • Phil O will work on his today
  • Jilayne and Kim in progress
  • Let's shoot for by next Wed 2/22 to get content done
  • Once content is done, web team can work on navigation
  • Goal is

End User Meeting

  •  Friday April 6 in Bay Area
    • Location: Cisco 
    • 9-3 (last bit is networking)
    • Up to 60 people
  • Name
    • SPDX Forum: Managing Open Source Software Licenses with Suppliers and Customers
  • Agenda
    • Stage Setting on OSS Compliance - 40 minutes
      • Stats, quotes, what are companies doing today, define the problem - Mark Radcliffe
    • Discussion: The Challenges of OSS Compliance Today 30 mins
      • Discussion at tables and then present info to the group
    • SPDX Primer:  What is SPDX and How Can it Help - 40 mins
      • SPDX team
    • End User Panel: How SPDX fits into a Corporate Compliance Program -- 1 hrs
      • Cisco, HP, WindRiver
    • Getting Started with SPDX preso  40 minutes
      • SPDX structure
      • Spreadsheet
      • License List
      • SPDX Tooling
    • Discussion:  Challenges and Approaches to Implementing SPDX - 30 minutes
    • What's Next for SPDX - Interactive session - 30 minute
      • Preso on what's on the table and hot issues
      • Q&A /Discussion
    • Invitation to paticipate in SPDX
  • Target Invitees
    • People involved with OSS Compliance activities
      • compliance, procurement/supply chain, legal,
    • Embedded sw or ISVs
    • Include smaller software suppliers, not just bigger people
  • Invitations
    • LF lists  (mailing ahead of time, invite at conference)
    • Jim Zemlin (reach out to LF members)
    • Smaller people thru VCs (Gary)
    • Mark Radcliffe
    • SPDX members - invite suppliers and or customers
    • Bar associations
  • Could we webcast?  Might be a cost? - Steve will check into it

 

 

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 2012 03 01

Attendees

  • Mark Gisi
  • Phil Odence
  • Kim Weins
  • Chuck Gaudreaux
  • Gary O Neall
  • Scott Lamons
  • Jilayne Lovejoy

Agenda

  • Web site
  • SPDX Forum
  • Collab Summit

Web site

  • Mark Gisi, Gary and Phil O are done
  • Kim in progress
  • Jilayne needs to get someone on legal team to help
  • Not sure re tech section

SPDX Forum: April 6

  • Registration
    • LF has put up test registration page.  Kim and Phil to test.
    • Kim to add pages to the SPDX website with link to register
    • Once it's up, we'll notify people to register and invite others.
  • Agenda Discussion
    • We discussed the agenda based on feedback at the General Meeting.  See added notes below in the agenda.
    • We will capture feedback throughout, but will also discuss that feedback in the interactive "What's Next" session
    • We also have tenatative speakers listed below
    • Consensus is that we want to cover 2.0, but don't want to get done rathole of arguing about details of how to implement specific features in 2.0.  We will collect all feedback and feed that into the various workstreams
  • Updated Agenda
    • Stage Setting on OSS Compliance - 40 minutes
      • Stats, quotes, what are companies doing today, define the problem - Mark Radcliffe
    • Discussion: The Challenges of OSS Compliance Today 30 mins
      • Discussion at tables and then present info to the group
    • SPDX Primer:  What is SPDX and How Can it Help - 40 mins
      • Phil and Kate
      • will include info on what is in current spec and highlights of 2.0 and info on involving  OSS community
    • End User Panel: How SPDX fits into a Corporate Compliance Program -- 1 hrs
      • Cisco, HP, WindRiver, maybe MicroFocus (Tom Incorvia?)
    • Getting Started with SPDX preso  40 minutes (Gary O Neall and Jilayne)
      • SPDX structure
      • Spreadsheet
      • License List
      • SPDX Tooling
      • will include info on 2.0 that maybe relevant
    • Discussion:  Challenges and Approaches to Implementing SPDX - 30 minutes
    • What's Next for SPDX - Interactive session - 30 minute
      • Preso on what's on the table and hot issues
      • Q&A /Discussion
    • Invitation to paticipate in SPDX

 

Collab Summit (April 3-5)

  • We will have an SPDX overview session (presented by Mark Gisi) as part of the legal track on Wednesday.
    • Legal track is being organized by Bradley Kuhn
  • We may get an opportunity to be part of the keynote (still TBD)
  • We will have a room all day Thursday for our face-to-face meetings
  • We are trying to get a smaller room for the tech team for a half day on Wed for the tech team.  We're not sure if we will get this or not.  If we do, it will be at the same time as the Legal track on Wednesday -- so you would have to choose between the legal track or the tech team meeting.

 

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 2012 03 15

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Mark Gisi
  • Phil Odence
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Steve Cropper
  • Chuck Gadreaux
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Scott Lamons
  • Kirsten Newcomer

 

Agenda

  • Collab Summit
    • Schedule
      • Panel on Tuesday afternoon - Phil O organizing
      • Wed - Mark Gisi, SPDX Overview
      • Wed PM - room
      • Thurs - Workgroup
      • Biz team
        • SPDX Forum prep
        • Adoption
        • Process for license list
        • Would also like update on 1.1, 2.0 update from tech team - what is needed (not how)
        • Web site
  • SPDX Forum
    • Agenda
    • Invites for registration
      • LF lists  (mailing ahead of time, invite at conference) - Done
      • Jim Zemlin (reach out to LF members) - Kim
      • Smaller people thru VCs - Gary
      • Mark Radcliffe - Kim
      • SPDX members - invite suppliers and or customers
      • Bar associations - Jilayne
    • Handout?
    • Logistics
      • Lunch, room, flipchart
    • Transportation
  • Web site

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 2012 04 12

Attendees

  • Kim Weins
  • Michael Herzog nexB
  • Chuck Gadreaux
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Scott Lamons
  • Kirsten Newcomer 
  • Steve Cropper
  • Mark Gisi

Agenda

  • Turnover to Jack/Scott
  • Debrief on SPDX Forum
    • Contact info
    • Follow up email
  • Web site
  • v2 Process
  • Adoption
    • Communities
    • Companies
    • Tools

Minutes

  • SPDX Forum
    • Think the forum went really well -- good number of new folks especially on legal side
    • Gary O'Neall -- attracted large companies, bit
    • Really happy with volume and participation
    • Worked well to get new people involved.
    • Follow up
      • Kim to email to everyone that attended/registered as follow up
      • Send list of companies (not names) to spdx list and in follow up
      • save for invites for next year
      • send list to core team for access
      • need to post meeting times for each group on website and send agenda/reminder day before and include link
      • post notes from Kate onto web site
    • At General meeting -- need to discuss handling of emails - also discussion of users list
    • Might make sense for LF to add as a standard add-on day at Collab Summit or as a separate event
      • If needed could get a shuttle from SF hotel of collab summit to south bay
      • Still treat it as a separate event though and promote separately
      • COuld it attach to LinuxCon events (evening)
      • May be better to be in Silicon Valley for a couple of years
  • Web site
    • Kirsten has completed home page for new site
    • Not sure about rest of site
    • Still a fair number of empty things in new hierarchy
    • Think Steve/Martin/Pierre are following up
    • Want to make sure that existing pages move over
  • Adoption
    • Communities
      • Outreach to communities follow up from
        • We target 4 possible communities
        • Kernel - Phil O to follow up with Jim Zemlin
        • Uboot - Kate and Jack to reach out
        • BusyBox - Mark G to reach out
        • Samba - Scott L to follow up.  Scott has message in to Samba - Jeremey Allison
    • Companies
      • SPDX Forum was great for awareness, but need to figure out where to go from here.
      • How do we adapt into the corporate environment and mental model?  Existing technical teams in companies have existing approach (like tied to SCM at Juniper) so how do you fit in to that - both technically and process wise?
      • Could we document process use cases and share them in whitepaper or preso on web site?
      • How do we work with a few early adopters and get them going and share their strategies?
      • Tech team is moving toward a migration path (vs tight backward compatibility)
    • Tools
      • Gary O'Neall is prototyping how to have hosted tools on web somewhere
      • There is a license matching prototype that Peter has posed
      • Ninka is working to produce SPDX
      • Scott Lamons working with U of Nebraska-Omaha to get Fossology up and running
        • Gary O Neall working with them as well

 

Business Team Meeting Agenda/Minutes 2012 05 10

Attendees

 

  • Scott Lamons
  • Jilayne Lovejoy
  • Peter Williams
  • Phil Odence
  • Mark Gisi
  • Gary O'Neall
  • Chuck Gadreaux
  • Michael Herzog
  • Jack Manbeck
  • Steve Cropper
  • Pierre Lapointe

 

Agenda/Minutes

  • SPDXv2 Discussion (what role should the business team play?)
    • The team partially reviewed a draft presentation put together by Micheal with input from others on this topic. The draft document is attached to this page.
    • Slides up to number ten were reviewed with a concentration on the new vision and mission,
    • There were some comments on the new vision and mission with respect to wording but no fundamental objections.
    • The team will review a paired down presentation with just the new vision and mission. Micheal to distribute. Once the team is okay with the wording it will distribute to the other teams for review.
    • The target was to have the new slide draft of just the vision and mission for review by May 14th.
  • Web site
    • Very brief status update. Web team contnet owners should be done by May 31st and have their sections checked off as done.
  • Others Topics
    • No other topics were discussed.

Legal Team

The Legal Team meets every other Wednesday at 8am Pacific Time US / 11am Eastern Time US time during the same weeks as the General Meeting.  If you have any questions, email Jilayne Lovejoy at: jlovejoy@openlogic.com

  • You can sign up for the mailing list here
  • The next Legal Team meeting will be on Wednesday, May 30, 2012.

Legal Team - current issues (last updated May 16)

Current issues/topics (this is a general list and may not touch upon everything) -- updated May 16

1) Mission/Vision statement
A) Legal Work Group - revised version posted in 5/16 meeting minutes - to be finalized on 5/30 call

B) License List description and overview -revised version posted in 5/16 meeting minutes - to be finalized on 5/30 call 

2) Website updates and refresh
A) aligning language and updates on various parts of the current site:

  1. Specification refers to the license list as "Standard Short Names"  - should be consistently referred to as the "SPDX License List"; also, the description needs to be revised and one of the links is probably not correct
  2. License List info page http://spdx.org/wiki/spdx-license-list - updated as needed, Jilayne
  3. License List main page http://spdx.org/licenses/ - calls it the "SPDX Open Source License Registry" - needs to be changed to "SPDX License List"  - Gary or Martin? (add description (goal/vision) here too?)
  4. add something about how we are coordinating or aligning with other license lists? (e.g. OSI, FSF, Debian, etc.) - either in its own section or FAQ?

B) Website refresh - fill in pages, link over content ?? need update from Mark Gisi on this

3) License List 
A) License List updates for v1.16

  1. Add MPL 2.0 other header version (for time being to be consistent with GPL)
  2. finish license text review of .txt files - still some to do
  3. formatting/text issue for Cecill licenses in French
  4. add US Gov't works - add short identifier to list; see email from David Wheeler
  5. proposal to add some kind of short identifier for copyright notice only (and "all rights reserved"?" - Fedora has this, maybe adopt what they use?

B) OSI updates from emails (changes to v1.16) and then summarize outstanding issues  - Jilayne, in progress

C) Other issues (see issues column on latest License List download for details - to start covering with v1.16 update)

  1. GPL exceptions - we don't have them all, list some of the others and variations on text - can someone do some research on this issue?
  2. various other more issues - see spreadsheet

D) Community outreach and list coordination

  1. FSF license list match-up; found here: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/license-list.html -- licenses that need to be added? Jilayne has done initial pass - Paul to do further research and come up with list of those on FSF and not on SPDX for approval to be added or not
  2. Fedora license list -- Jilayne has begun discussion with Tom Calloway, needs follow-up
  3. Debian
  4. Gentoo

3) License Match Guidelines  - pick up where we left off and complete

4) Formatting and "master list" for License List (i.e. actual license text files)  
Currently the "master" consists of spreadsheet with list + individual .txt files for license text field = downloadable zip file.  This is then converted into html pages for website.  Peter, Gary, and Jilayne have had initial discussion on this issue; to be discussed further with more fleshed out proposal

A) PROPOSAL: License text files formatted in HTML instead of .txt files as default; can convert from there into text file with tool if people want that too;  Option to use HTML to indicate some of matching rules?

B) For back-end management of License List overall: proposal to use and GIT repository in background for management  - easier tracking of changes and gets it off Jilayne's desktop

4) Recommendations or guidance on how to best determine license for a particular file
how to identify the license for an open source project - ex. Within the file versus whether there's a copying file on top of the directory → provide guidance/suggstion (industry practice?) that license in the file is more determinate than the license in the directory

Should the legal group aggregate industry best practices and come up with a group of guidelines and provide some influence on that?

SPDX License List - Process for requesting new licenses to be added

Requirements to submit:

To request a new license to be added to the SPDX License List, please submit to the legal workstream via SPDX-legal at lists.spdx.org the following information:

  1. Please provide a proposed Full Name for the license, in line with the SPDX naming guidelines http://spdx.org/wiki/spdx-license-list
  2. Please provide a proposed License Identifier, in line with the SPDX naming guidelines
  3. Provide a functioning URL reference to the license text,  either from the license author or a or community recognized source for the license text  (License URL):
  4. Create and attach a formatted text file with the license text from the URL posted above.  Proofread license text file to ensure that:
    1. information has not been lost or modified
    2. formatting is clean and consistent with the License URL
    3. only appropriate headers and information are included in the text file [link to protocol]
  5. Indicate if the license is OSI approved [Yes/No].   See: http://www.opensource.org/licenses/alphabetical 
    1. If yes, provide link to OSI license, verify that it is the same text as supplied in #4 above.
  6. Briefly explain the need for this license to be included, including identifying at least one program that uses this license or a prior version of this license.
  7. Tools: Guidelines for the tools group to match this license [need to flesh this out]

Method of approval: 

  1. Legal Team meets every 2 weeks to review submissions of new licenses.  If volume of license submissions becomes too great for Legal Team, we would create a separate Subteam to handle these reviews.
  2. License submissions that meet requirements above reviewed and approved at next available Team/Subteam meeting.  If further information is required, Team/Subteam responds to requestor to re-submit.
  3. Publish recommended new license on the license list page as “proposed”, wait 2 weeks for review and comment then approval at next Legal Team/Subteam, following which the license gets posted as final.

SPDX License List

This page includes the most recent version of the SPDX License List by version number and in spreadsheet format.  Contents from this master spreadsheet are then published to: www.spdx.org/licenses

5 April 2012: new version of license list (v1.15) uploaded.  

Notable changes:

  • see notes in v1.15 changes column in spreadsheet for noted changes (or new issues)

 

Guidelines for SPDX License List nomenclature, fields, etc.:

The following information describes how each column/field is treated.

Full Name of License

  • Omit “the” before license full name for alphabetical sorting purposes
  • No commas in full name of license
  • Do not spell out “version” – use “v” or nothing to indicate license version (for space reasons)
  • Use lower case v and no period or space b/w v and the number
  • Remove any license abbreviations from parenthesis after full license name

License Identifier

  • Short identifier to be used to identify license match to licenses contained on the SPDX License List

Notes

  • Include date of release, if found, for licenses with multiple versions.  Use European date format: day – month – year 
  • Other: Only factual information should be included here, e.g. the license has been deprecated. Do not include information (or links to information) that includes any kind of interpretation or comment about the license (even if written by the license author).

OSI Approved?

  • Where license is OSI approved, mark "yes," otherwise leave blank

Source/url

  • Use url from (in order of priority): 
    • License author’s website 
    • OSI 
    • Sometimes both are included 
    • Other website that has text version of license 
  • Link to license in native language is used where specified (e.g. French for CeCILL). Link to English version where multiple official translations (e.g. EUPL)

Standard License Header

  • Should only include text intended to be put in the header of source files or other files as specified in the license or license appendix when specifically delineated o Indicate if there is any variation in the header (i.e. for files developed by a contributor versus when applying license to original work) 
  • Do not include NOTICE info intended for a separate notice file o Leave this field blank if there is no standard header as specifically defined in the license

Text

  • Active link to separate .txt file named by SPDX License Identifier that contains full license text as it appears on main url explanations of fields and outstanding issues and questions.

 

 

 

 

SPDX License List Match Guidelines

SPDX License List Match Guidelines

This documents provides guidelines for matching licenses to licenses found on the SPDX License List. There is no intent here to make a judgment or interpretation, but merely to ensure that when one SPDX user identifies a license as “BSD 3-clause,” for example, it is indeed the same license as what someone else identifies as “BSD 3-clause” and the same license as what is listed on the SPDX License List.

1. Whitespace

1.1 Purpose: By having a rule regarding whitespace, we avoid the possibility of a non-match due to different spacing of words, line breaks, or paragraphs

1.1.1 Guideline: All whitespace will be treated as a single blank space

2. Capitalization

2.1 Purpose: By having a rule regarding capitalization, we avoid the possibility of a non-match due to lower case or upper case letters in otherwise the same words

2.1.1 Guideline: All upper case and lower case letters will be treated as lower case letters

3. Punctuation

3.1 Purpose: Because punctuation can change the meaning of a sentence, punctuation needs to be included in the matching process

3.1.1 Guideline: Punctuation must be matched.

4. Bullets and Numbering

4.1 Purpose: By having a rule regarding bullets and number, we avoid the possibility of a non-match due to the otherwise same license using bullets instead of numbers for a list of clauses.

4.1.1 Guideline: Where a line starts with a bullet, numbering, or some form of a list item, ignore the list item.

5. Varietal Word Spelling

5.1 Purpose: English uses different spelling for some words. By identifying the spelling variations for words found or likely to be found in licenses, we avoid the possibility of a non-match due to the same word being spelled differently. This list is not meant to be an exhaustive list of all spelling variations, but meant to capture the words most likely to be found in open source software licenses.

5.1.1 Guideline: The words in the following columns are considered equivalent and interchangeable:

Column 1Column 2
1. Acknowledgement
2. Analog
3. Analyze
4. Artifact
5. Authorization
6. Authorized
7. Caliber
8. Canceled
9. Capitalizations
10. Catalog
11. Categorize
12. Center
13. Emphasized
14. Favor
15. Favorite
16. Fulfill
17. Fulfillment
18. Initialize
19. Judgement
20. Labeling
21. Labor
22. License
23. Maximize
24. Modeled
25. Modeling
26. Offense
27. Optimize
28. Organization
29. Organize
30. Practice
31. Program
32. Realize
33. Recognize
34. Signaling
35. Utilization
36. While
37. Wilfull
38. Noncommercial
39. Percent
1. Acknowledgment
2. Analogue
3. Analyse
4. Artefact
5. Authorisation
6. Authorised
7. Calibre
8. Cancelled
9. Capitalisations
10. Catalogue
11. Categorise
12. Centre
13. Emphasised
14. Favour
15. Favourite
16. Fulfil
17. Fulfilment
18. Initialise
19. Judgment
20. Labelling
21. Labour
22. Licence
23. Maximise
24. Modelled
25. Modelling
26. Offence
27. Optimise
28. Organisation
29. Organise
30. Practise
31. Programme
32. Realise
33. Recognise
34. Signalling
35. Utilisation
36. Whilst
37. Wilful
38. Non-commercial
39. Per cent

6. Copyright Symbol

6.1 Purpose: By having a rule regarding the use of “©”, “(c)”, or “copyright,” we avoid the possibility of a mismatch based on these variations.

6.1.1 Guideline: “©”, “(c)”, or “Copyright” will be considered equivalent and interchangeable


7. Copyright Notice

7.1 Purpose: To avoid a license mismatch merely because the copyright notice (usually found above the actual license text) is different. The copyright notice is important information to be recorded elsewhere in the SPDX file, but for the purposes of matching a license to the SPDX License List, it should be ignored because it is not part of the substantive license text.

7.1.1 Guideline: Ignore copyright notices.  A copyright notice consists of the following elements, for example: "2012 Copyright, John Doe. All rights reserved." or "(c) 2012 John Doe."

pick up here at 15 Feb 2012 Legal Workstream call

8. License Headers

8.1 Purpose: To identify standard headers that are used to indicate a particular license. These could be specific headers mandated by the license itself or common shorthand ways to indicate the license. (e.g. “This file is licensed under GPL v2.” can then be matched to GPL v2... (need to identify what theses might be and come up with a list.... TBD

8.1.1 Guideline:

9. Verbatim Text

9.1 Purpose: To ensure that when matching licenses to the SPDX License List, the substantive text of the license is the same balanced against disregarding parts of the text that do not alter the substantive text. A conservative approach is taken in regards to rules about replaceable text here.

9.1.1 Guideline: License text must be the same verbatim text (except for the rules stated here). The text must be in the same order, e.g., differently ordered paragraphs would not be considered a match.

9.1.2 Guideline: Certain oft-used licenses (i.e. BSD, Apache 1.1) have inline text that refers to the copyright holder or author generically. Sometimes the actual name of a company or individual is used, yet the rest of the license is exactly the same as a generic version. Where text is highlighted in the licenses below, that highlighted text can be ignored when determining a match. This rule only applies to the licenses and highlighted text identified below:

SPDX Metadata License: Preamble and CC0 1.0 Universal

SPDX Metadata is licensed under the CC0 1.0 Universal public domain dedication with the following preamble. A link to the license is included below. ***

Preamble

The SPDX specification requires populating the SPDX fields with certain data related to such fields. In addition, the SPDX specification also contains numerous fields where an SPDX author may provide relevant explanatory text. These data and explanatory information are the “SPDX-Metadata”. Without opining on the lawfulness of "database rights" (in jurisdictions where applicable), such explanatory text is copyrightable subject matter in most Berne Convention countries.

By using the SPDX specification, or any portion hereof, you hereby agree that any copyrightable work (as determined by your jurisdiction) in any SPDX-Metadata, including without limitation explanatory text, shall be subject to the terms of the Creative Commons CC0 1.0 Universal license (reproduced in its entirety below).

Further, for SPDX-Metadata not containing any copyrightable work, you hereby agree and acknowledge that the SPDX-Metadata is provided to you "as-is" and without any representations or warranties of any kind concerning the SPDX-Metadata, express, implied, statutory or otherwise, including without limitation warranties of title, merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, non-infringement, or the absence of latent or other defects, accuracy, or the present or absence of errors, whether or not discoverable, all to the greatest extent permissible under applicable law.

http://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/legalcode

SPDX Metadata License: Rationale for CC0

Overview

SPDX files represent a summary of license information extracted from software source code. The SPDX Legal working group evaluated different licenses that can be used to cover the data contained in a SPDX file. One challenge was that the working group did not want to imply that the data contained in a SPDX file is potentially copyright protected. On the other hand, in some jurisdictions, data could be considered intellectual property. In those jurisdictions the working group stride to provide a license that mitigates the risk of someone obtaining controlling IP rights over SPDX data. The following were the core requirements driving the license evaluation process. We sought a license that:

  • does not imply that SPDX data is intellectual property;
  • in jurisdictions that permit data to be intellectual property - prevents others from claiming controlling ownership over the data contained in a SPDX file;
  • will not hinder adoption of the SPDX format by the open source community;
  • minimizes further license proliferation in the open source community;
  • permits the exchange of SPDX files under confidentiality terms (potentially temporarily) for special situations that may require it.

After careful consideration the Creative Commons Zero 1.0 Universal license was chosen. The rationale for each of the license candidates considered can be found below.

License Candidates:

Public Domain Dedication and License (PDDL)

PDDL is the current designated license for SPDX files as required by the SPDX 1.0 specification. PDDL was initially chosen because it was a “data” license. That is, it was initially design to be used with data as opposed to software or other copyrightable works. The reception of PDDL as the SPDX file data license has been mixed and somewhat controversial at times.  A copy of the PDDL license can be found here: PDDL link.

  • Pros
    • Designed for licensing data.
    • Useful in jurisdictions where intellectual property rights are granted to data (bases).
    • Attempts to make data freely accessible (in a similar spirit that open source licenses do for software).
    • Permits the exchange of SPDX files under confidentiality terms.

 

  • Cons
    • Lengthy license (6 pages) – will take time for people to review and understand.
    • Yet another new license for open source community to review, understand and accept. Would likely add friction to SPDX adoption.
    • A major open source foundation pointed out it would be hard to get PDDL approved by their organization as well as other foundations. This is especially true when considering a license that is not familiar to the community (as is the case with PDDL).
    • Use of the license implies that SPDX data is copyright protected.

MIT Style SPDX Draft

The license text is based on the MIT open source license. A copy of the MIT Style license draft can be found in the appendix of this document.

  • Pros
    • Viewed more as a disclaimer notice than a data license. The intent is to view the SPDX file content as data as opposed to protected intellectual property.
    • Serves more as a license in jurisdictions where data is considered protectable intellectual property.
    • The license text is short and easy to understand.
    • The license is familiar to the open source community and would likely not add much friction to the adoption of SPDX.
    • Permits the exchange of SPDX files under confidentiality terms
    • Cons
      • The license is based on the MIT open source license which was designed to be used with software as opposed to data.
      • Requires attribution. Many different SPDX files used in a project or supply chain may potentially require the publication of many different attribution notices.

 

CC0 1.0 - Universal Public Domain Dedication license

Creative Commons (CC) is a non-profit organization devoted to expanding the range of creative works available for others to build upon legally and to share.  The organization has released several copyright-licenses known as “Creative Commons” licenses, free of charge to the public. One such license is the CC0 1.0 which allows one to contribute their work to the public domain. A copy of the PDDL license can be found here: CC0 1.0 link.

  • Pros
    • License text is short and easy to understand.
    • License is familiar to the open source community and therefore would likely not to add significant friction to the adoption of SPDX.
    • Achieves object of having the data be considered public domain in those jurisdictions where data can be protected as intellectual property.
    • Permits the exchange of SPDX files under confidentiality terms.
    • Cons
      • License was not designed to be used with data.
      • Use of the license implies that SPDX data is copyright protected.

 

No License Provided

One option is to take the position that no license applies.

  • Pros
    • Easy to understand. Does not add friction to adoption of SPDX.
    • Promotes the idea that the SPDX data is not intellectual property (e.g., not copyrightable).
    • Permits the exchange of SPDX files under confidentiality terms.
    • Cons

Does not prevent one from trying to obtain controlling rights in jurisdictions where data is potentially considered intellectual property.

Legal Team Meeting Minutes

Meeting Minutes for the Legal Team are posted here:

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2010-09-24

SPDX License Meeting Notes – 9/24/2010

Attendance
Kate Stewart
Kim Weins (OpenLogic
Dave McLoughlin (OpenLogic)
Peter Williams (OpenLogic)
Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)
Manny Wool (BlackDuck)
Mike Herzog (NexB)
Jeff Luszcz (Palamida)
Dan German

Notes:

  1. Kate opened with a review of the approach to use a table approach as proposed by Tom Calloway at LinuxCon for licenses with one link per license.  The group was in agreement.
  2. Kim asked If anyone had looked at layout from an RDF side to see if there were any issues, Peter responded that no one had reviewed it yet. Peter volunteered to review it when it was finalized.
  3. Kate proposed the next order of business was:
    1. setting up a couple examples and reviewing the layout
    2. look for volunteers to propagate the licenses in the wiki
  4. Kim noted that she thought there were 2 broader issues first
    1. Creating a set of licenses so we can know what the mapping looks like (assuming the need for a minimum set for release of the first spec)
    2. Creating a process for adding licenses on an interim basis after the initial minimum set is created
  5. Kim proposed a minimum initial set of licenses tied to the spec.  Mike H and others argued that a set of licenses should not be tied to a spec as a minimum requirement for using the spec.  The group was in agreement.
    1. Mike H proposed the list of licenses be an “appendix” to the spec and we strongly recommend people use the licenses included in the appendix.  The group strong agreed.  Kate commented, that if we create a standard set recognized by the group then the community will most likely get behind it an support.   Those conforming to SPDX should recognize the initial set published at least, but not limit to just the set ready at time of initial publishing.
  6. Versioning.  Group essentially agreed that the list itself would not have a version rather the version would change when there is a change in “vocabulary”
  7. Comments field.  The group discussed the concept of a comments field proposed by Tom Calloway.  The group agreed to not use the field for no factual information or opinion-based comments.
    1. Kate called for a volunteer to document guidelines for populating the comments field.
    2. Jilayne Lovejoy volunteered to take the task
  8. Kim proposed the concept of a subcommittee to manage licenses.  Responsibilities would include: discuss which licenses to add, fill out templates, “approve” licenses to add to queue, manage approval process to add licenses, move licenses into list when approved.  Note: group agreed that “approved” did not mean that a license met some minimum requirements, rather that it was appropriate for the list.
  9. Kim proposed 2 ideas for the subcommittee role/process, that need further discussion.
    1. Committee owns the complete process, they choose, approve and add licenses
    2. The group at large votes on licenses to add, the sub-committee approves and adds
  10. Kate volunteered to work with Tom Calloway to finalize template and work with the RDF group to make sure it will be able to link together.
  11. Jilayne volunteered to marshal the license list
  12. Group discussed and agreed to meet monthly to review license issues.

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2010-11-19

Participants

  • Kim Weins (OpenLogic)
  • Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)
  • Esteban Rockett (Motorola)
  • Kate Stewart (Canonical)
  • Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)

 

We spent the whole call discussing how to handle Python licensing.  Tom iIncorvia did a bunch of research on the Python license.  Essentially it was owned by 3 different groups prior to the Python Software Foundation - CWI, CNRI, BeOpen.  This happened as the primary author, Guido van Rossum, moved from company to company.

As the owner changed, the license changed, so there are several licenses that apply to different components of Python.  In addition, there appear to be tweaks to the license terms with each release, even when the owner did not change.

On the call, we determined that we should separate the Python licenses into separate licenses in the list.  However, we also felt that more research was required to see if different Python licenses might apply simultaneously to a single version.

Note:

After the call, I did further research to determine that there are, in fact, multiple licenses that can apply to any version of Python -- with older code under older licenses and newer code under the PSF license.

From the PSF website  http://www.python.org/psf/summary/

"(1) In the earlier days of Python, employee contracts and related law ensured that the organizations that released Python under the various licenses had the rights to the code that was added in each release. The open source licenses used by those organizations granted all the necessary rights to the world in general, which of course includes the PSF. The only significant right the PSF does not have to this code is to re-license it. This is the reason for the continued existence of the older licenses in the license stack. Since some of the organizations involved no longer exist, it is unlikely that the PSF could obtain relicensing rights in the future. Thus, the older licenses cannot be removed from the license stack."

We will revisit this topic at the next meeting.

 

 

 

 

Attachments: 

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2010-12-03

The meeting was attended by:

  • Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)
  • Kate Stewart (Canonical)
  • Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)
  • Esteban Rockett (Motorola)
  • Kim Weins (OpenLogic)

Discussion

Python

  • We revisited the issue of the Python license.  Tom had done some additional tracking down of licensing info on the Python website (see attached jpg).  Based on that, the new proposal is that we have 2 Python licenses in the list
  1. Python License Stack
    1. This consists of the entire stack of licenses that are needed for the Python language. The last language in the stack is Python Software Foundation license, which applies to the newer portions of Python.  Other licenses in the stack apply to earlier poritions of the code.  We noted that this "license stack" is referred to by the OSI as the Python Software Foundation (PSF) License.  This is not entirely correct, since the PSF license is one element of the license stack.
  2. Python Software Foundation License
    • This will encompass only the PSF license.  We are separating this out since other projects may use the PSF license without the rest of the Python License Stack
  • As a follow up, Tom volunteered to validate this approach with the legal person at the PSF (a contact Kate will provide).  He will also find out why the OSI also lists the Python CNRI License (ONE of the licenses in the Pthon License Stack) as a separate license on the list. 

Older licenses

  • Jilayne had pointed out that in some cases we had older versions of a license on our list, but were missing the earlier versions.  Examples included EUPL v1.0, MPL v1.0, NPL v1.0, other OSL versions, AFL, etc.   We decided to add those earlier versions to the list as well, unless we got into a situation where they were too numerous.

zlib/libpng license

  • The OSI site lists a zlib/libpng license.  However the text listed by OSI is the zlib license.  There is a separate libpng license as well with different terms.  We believe that these should be separate licenses in our list.  Jilayne is going to do further research, including reaching out to zlib developers and OSI to try and determine why they are together.  Once we get that info, back we will determine how to handle.

GPL exceptions

  • Jilayne has added several standard exceptions to the GPLv2 and GPLv3 listings.  If anyone knows of additional exceptions, they can provide these to Jilayne along with a link to the "canonical source" for the license on the web.

GPLv3 Section 7

  • Mark Radcliffe had brought up the issue of GPLv3 section 7 on the mailing list.  That section allows for other specific variations to be added to GPLv3.  The primary goal of this clause was to allow compatibility with other licenses, such as Apache.  However, theoretically someone could simply add these variations to the GPLv3.  No one on the call had ever seen these variations in the real world yet, so the proposal is to simply list GPLv3 for now.  Any variations would be handled as a "non standard license".  If we begin to see these licenses appearing in the real world, we can then determine how to handle them.  Jilayne will circulate this proposal to the mailing list for further comment.

Finalizing the license list

  • Prior to release of SPDX 1.0 Release Candidate (RC), we will need to get all of the licenses from this list into the license repository.  Here are the tasks
    1. Technical team to finalize the techncial design of that repo. 
    2. Set up and Implement the blank repo (technical team?)
    3. Load (automated hopefully) of the data from the license list into the repo
    4. Add any manual data (such as license template info or notes).
    5. Validation and verification of all data in the repo (at least 2 different people)
    6. Ready to go live
    7. Define and document update processes for adding new licenses
    8. Open process for addition of new licenses
  • Aside from the remaining items listed here, we are planning to close off addition of any new licenses to the list until after the license repo is up, unless we find an egregious item that is missing.  Once the repo is up with this base list, we can then open the process for adding new items.

Going forward

  • The remaining items associated with the list will now roll into the legal workstream and be handled in the legal meetings.
Attachments: 

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2010-12-15

 

Legal Worksteam Meeting Minutes - 20101215

 

SPDX Legal Worksteam Meeting Minutes – 15-December-2010

 

Attendees:

 

Esteban Rockett (Motorola)


Kate Stewart (Canonical)


Kim Weins (OpenLogic)

Phil Odence (Blackduck)

Amanda Brock (Canonical)

Andrew Sinclair (Canonical)

Karen Copenhaver (Linux Foundation)

Scott Peterson (HP)

Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)

Allison Randal (Python Software Foundation, The Perl Foundation, Canonical)

Mansour Ghomeshi (Motorola)

McCoy Smith (Intel)

Soeren Rabenstein (Asus)

Paul Madick (HP)

Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)
Andy Wilson (Intel)

Terry Ilardi (IBM)

Michael Herzog (NexB)

 

 

Minutes:

  1. Introductions - Since this was the kick-off meeting for the SPDX Legal Workstream, all attendees introduced themselves in a descriptive manner.  Many attendees were physically in a conference room at Choate et al. (Boston), others joined via the tele-conference.
  2. Bridge from Licensing Interim Workstream - Rockett and Kim provided an explanation of how this Legal Workstream was bridging over the work done in the prior Licensing Subteam, with thanks to Kate, Jilayne and Tom.
  3. Reviewed minutes/issues from last Licensing Subteam Meeting - The last Licensing Subteam Meeting Minutes were actively explained by Kate, Kim and Rockett.  Attendees were also encouraged to review and ask any further questions.  Lead by Jilayne, the Licensing Subteam's treatment of zlib/libpng was discussed, and generally agreed to be managed as two separate licenses.  Kim explained which GPL v3 exceptions were currently listed as separate entries on the SPDX standard license list.  
  4. Discussed Current License List & Review - Attendees were asked to review the current SPDX Standard License List.  There was some confusion over the URL for the active list.  Rockett to work with Phil and Martin to resolve.
  5. Discussed License Template Creation - Volunteers were requested to work on the License Template for the SPDX Standard Licenses.  Sorenson, Jilayne and Rockett volunteered to lead the effort.
  6. Discussed Temporary Freeze of License List (30 days) - A temporary freeze, e.g. 30 days, of the current working SPDX License List was proposed in order to allow for some cleanup, as well as license template creation (please see above).
  7. Creation of a Process/Method to Add Licenses - An interactive discussion on how to add licenses occurred.  Kim, Paul and Soeren volunteered to lead the effort in such a proposed method.  This discussion then expanded into "if use of the standard license acronyms would be required" to be used for SPDX.
  8. Next meeting was announced to be after the holidays in 2011; at the normal bi-weekly time slot.

up

 

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-01-12

Legal Worksteam Meeting Minutes - 20110112

 

SPDX Legal Worksteam Meeting Minutes – 12-January-2011


Attendees:

Esteban Rockett (Motorola)


Kate Stewart (Canonical)

Kim Weins (OpenLogic)

Peter Williams (OpenLogic)

Mark Gisi (WindRiver)

Paul Madick (HP)

Scott Peterson (HP)

Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)

Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)

Andy Wilson (Intel)

Scott Lamons (OpenLogic)

Michael Herzog (NexB)

Karen Copenhaver (Linux Foundation)

 

Minutes:

A.  Review of December Meeting Minutes - Team was asked to review December meeting minutes by 20-Jan-2011; for approval at meeting scheduled for 26-Jan-2011.

B. "Create Process/Method to Add Licenses" - Team agreed with moving the process/method to created/add new licenses (to the standard SPDX license list) to the SPDX Business Workstream.

C. SPDX Metadata License - Team agreed to pick a default license for the SPDX metadata, such default license to be agreed by this team and Linux Foundation Member counsel.  BSD-based/MIT-like was the general consensus.  Whether additional proprietary licenses would be allowed was tabled, pending the decision on the default metadata license.  Rockett and Karen Copenhaver to lead.

D. Required use of Standard License Acronyms - Michael Herzog proposed that this requirement be limited to those publishing SPDX metadata.  No objections from the team.

E. Issue raised from Tech Workstream on the need for a Legal Policy on "SPDX Not Validating License Recited" - This topic lead into a detailed discussion of "objective" verse "subjective" metadata.   A second meeting was scheduled for 14-Jan-2011 to conclude this issue.  See minutes from 14-Jan-2011 meeting.

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-01-14

 

Legal Worksteam Meeting Minutes - 20110114

 

SPDX Legal Worksteam Meeting Minutes – 14-January-2011

 

Attendees:

Esteban Rockett (Motorola)


Kate Stewart (Canonical)

Kim Weins (OpenLogic)

Peter Williams (OpenLogic)

Scott Peterson (HP)

Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)

Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)

Michael Herzog (NexB)

Phil Odence (BlackDuck)

 

Minutes:

 

- This meeting was a continuation of "Item E" from the regular Legal Workstream Meeting of 12-Jan-2011.

- Subject to refining terminology (where attendees will email terminology/minor revisions or do so on Bugzilla), attendees agreed to the following:

 

***

(minor edits consistent with meeting done below by Rockett)

 

Proposal:  section 5.3 (License(s)) of the spec will

become 3 fields:

 

5.3a Asserted/Concluded License

 

5.3a.1 Purpose: This field contains the license

governing the file if it can be determined.  If no license

information can be determined, the license is denoted as

"Unknown".   The licenses should use the standard short

form names.   See Appendix I for standardized license short

forms.  If a Asserted/Concluded License is not one of the

standardized license short forms, this field must contain a

reference to the full licenses text included in this SPDX

file in section 4.  If more than one license is asserted/concluded in

the file, then each should be listed.  If any of the

asserted/concluded licenses offer the recipient a choice of licenses,

then each of the choices will be declared as a "disjunctive"

license.

 

5.3a.2 Intent: Here, the intent is to have a uniform

method to refer to the license that is determined to

represent the file with specificity to eliminate any license

confusion.  For example, the 3 clause BSD would have a

different license identifier then the 4 clause BSD.

 

5.3a.3 Cardinality:  Mandatory, one.

 

5.3a.4 Tag: "LicenseAsserted:"

 

5.3a.5 RDF: TBD  (include Disjunctive form here)

 

5.3a.6 Data Format: <short form identifier in

Appendix I> | "FullLicense"-N

 

5.3a.7 Example:

LicenseAsserted: GPL-2.0

 

 

5.3b Detected License(s)

 

5.3b.1 Purpose: This field contains the license recited 

in the file, if any.  It will be explicit

from the file header or other information found in the

file's source code.    If no license information is found

it should be denoted as "NotSpecified".  If no license

information can be determined, the license is denoted as

"Unknown".   The licenses should use the standard short

form names.   See Appendix I for standardized license short

forms.  If a Detected License is not one of the

standardized license short forms, this field must contain a

reference to the full licenses text included in this SPDX

file in section 4.  If more than one license is detected in

the file, then each should be listed.  If any of the

detected licenses offer the recipient a choice of licenses,

then each of the choices will be declared as a "disjunctive"

license.

 

5.ba.2 Intent: Here, the intent is to have a uniform

method to refer to each license with specificity to

eliminate any license confusion.  For example, the 3 clause

BSD would have a different license identifier then the 4

clause BSD.

 

5.3b.3 Cardinality:  Mandatory, one or many.

 

5.3b.4 Tag: "LicenseDetected:"

 

5.3b.5 RDF: TBD (not including disjunctive form, if

multiple many should be specified )

 

5.3b.6 Data Format: <short form identifier in

Appendix I> | "FullLicense"-N

 

5.3b.7 Example:

LicenseDetected: GPL-2.0

LicenseDetected: FullLicense-2

 

 

5.3c License Comments

 

5.3c.1 Purpose: This field is a detailed description

of the analysis and any relevent background references that

went in to making the asserted license for a file, if the

asserted/concluded license does not match the detected license that

the person creating the SPDX file wants to share with the

reviewers.

 

5.3c.2 Intent:  Here, the intent is to provide

technical readers/reviewers with a detailed technical

explanation of how the asserted license was determined if it

does not match the detected license.

 

5.3c.3 Cardinality: Optional, single instance

 

5.3c.4 Tag: "LicenseComments:"

 

5.3c.5 RDF: TBD

 

5.3c.6 Data Format: free form text than can span

multiple lines, preceded with <text> and ending with

</text>.

 

5.3c.7 Example: LicenseComments: <text> The

asserted license was taken from the package level that the

file was included in.  </text>

***

 

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-01-26

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes – 26-January-2011

 

Attendees:

 

Esteban Rockett (Motorola)

Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)

Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)

Mark Gisi (WindRiver)

Steve Grandchamp (OpenLogic)

Andy Wilson (Intel)

Steve Mc (OpenLogic)

Paul Madick (HP)

Kate Stewart (Canonical)

Phil Odence (BlackDuck)

Michael Herzog (NexB)

 

 

Minutes:

- This meeting focused on revising the text of Section 5.3 consistent with the meeting of 14-January-2011.

- The text discussed is below.  

- Workstream members are requested to review and provided comments and/or bring comments to the next meeting scheduled for 9-February-2011.

***

 

Proposal:  Section 5.3 (License(s)) of the SPDX Specification will become 3 fields:

 

5.3a Concluded License(s)

 

5.3a.1 Purpose:  This field contains the license the reviewer has concluded as governing the file, if it can be determined.  The options to populate this field are limited to: (a) the SPDX standardized license short form identifier; this should be used when the concluded license is on the SPDX standardized license short list; (b) a verbatim copy of the concluded license when the concluded license is not on the SPDX standardized license short list (“non-standard license”); (c) “UNDETERMINED”; this should be used (i) if the reviewer has attempted to but cannot reach a reasonable objective determination of the concluded license, or (ii) if the reviewer is uncomfortable concluding a license, despite some license information being available; or (d) left blank; this should be used if the reviewer has made no attempt to arrive at a concluded license.  With respect to “a” and “b” above, if there is more than one concluded license, all should be recited.  If the recipient has a choice of multiple licenses, then each of the choices should be recited as a "disjunctive" license.  With respect to “c”, a written explanation must be provided in the License Comments field below.  Lastly, if the Conclude License(s) conflicts with the License Information in File, a written explanation must be provided in the License Comments field below.

 

5.3a.2 Intent:  Here, the intent is to have the reviewer analyze the License Information in File and other objective information, e.g., “COPYING FILE”, etc., together with the results from any scanning tools, to arrive at a reasonably objective conclusion as to what license is governing the file.

 

5.3a.3 Cardinality:  Mandatory, one or many.

 

5.3a.4 Tag: "LicenseConcluded:"

 

5.3a.5 RDF: TBD  (include Disjunctive form here)

 

5.3a.6 Data Format: <short form identifier in Appendix I> | "FullLicense"-N | UNDETERMINED | (left blank)

 

5.3a.7 Example:

 

LicenseConcluded: GPL-2.0

 

 

 

5.3b License Information in File

 

5.3b.1 Purpose: This field contains the license information actually recited in the file, if any.  Any license information not actually in the file, e.g., “COPYING FILE”, etc., should not be reflected in this field.  This information is most commonly found in the header of the file, although it may be in other areas of the actual file.  The options to populate this field are limited to: (a) the SPDX standardized license short form identifier; this should be used when the license is on the SPDX standardized license short list and has no ambiguous or superfluous text; (b) a verbatim copy of the license information the file when the license information in the file is not on the SPDX standardized license short list (“non-standard license”); (c) “NONE”; this should be used if the actual file contains no license information; or (d) left blank; this should be used if the reviewer has not examined the contents of the actual files.  With respect to “a” and “b” above, if license information for more than one license is recited in the file, all should be reflected in this field.  If the license information offers the recipient a choice of licenses, then each of the choices should be recited as a "disjunctive" licenses.

 

5.ba.2 Intent:  Here, the intent is to provide the reader with the license information actually in the file, as compared to the Concluded License field.

 

5.3b.3 Cardinality:  Mandatory, one or many.

 

5.3b.4 Tag: "LicenseInformation:" 

 

5.3b.5 RDF: TBD (not including disjunctive form, if multiple many should be specified )

 

5.3b.6 Data Format: <short form identifier in Appendix I> | "FullLicenseInformation"-N | NONE | (left blank)

 

5.3b.7 Example:

 

LicenseInformation: GPL-2.0

 

LicenseInformation: FullLicenseInformation

 

 

 

5.3c License Comments

 

5.3c.1 Purpose: This field is a detailed description of the analysis and any relevent background references that went in to arriving at the Concluded License(s) for a file.  If the Concluded License(s) does not match the License Information in File, such rationale must be recited by the reviewer in this field.  This field is also where an explanation must be recited if the reviewer placed “UNDETERMINED” as the Conclude License(s).

 

5.3c.2 Intent:  Here, the intent is to provide the reader with a detailed explanation of how the Concluded License(s) was determined if it does not match the License Information in File, is marked “UNDETERMINED”, or other helpful information for the reader relevant to determining the license of the file.

 

5.3c.3 Cardinality: Optional, single instance

 

5.3c.4 Tag: "LicenseComments:" 

 

5.3c.5 RDF: TBD

 

5.3c.6 Data Format: free form text than can span multiple lines, preceded with <text> and ending with </text>.

 

5.3c.7 Example: LicenseComments: <text> The Concluded License(s) was taken from the package level that the file was included in.  This information was found in the COPYING.txt file in the xyz directory. </text>

 

***

 

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-02-09

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes – 9-February-2011


Attendees:

Esteban Rockett (Motorola)
Karen Copenhaver (LF/Choate)

Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)
Kim Weins (OpenLogic)
Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)
Mark Gisi (WindRiver)
Kate Stewart (Canonical)
Phil Odence (BlackDuck)
Scott Peterson (HP)

Minutes:
- This meeting focused on finalizing the text of Section 5.3.  The final text is below.  
- Lastly, logistics for "housekeeping matters", namely the License Template, default license for the SPDX metadata, and suggested license for SPDX tools, were discussed.  More to come on those items in the meetings to follow.
- The next meeting is scheduled for 2-March-2011, when many will be in Boston for the Project Harmony meeting.

***

Final Draft:  Section 5.3 (License(s)) of the SPDX Specification will become 3 fields:


5.3a Concluded License(s)

5.3a.1 Purpose:  This field contains the license the reviewer has concluded as governing the file, if it can be determined.  The options to populate this field are limited to: (a) the SPDX standardized license short form identifier; this should be used when the concluded license is on the SPDX standardized license short list; (b) a verbatim copy of the concluded license when the concluded license is not on the SPDX standardized license short list (“non-standard license”); (c) “UNDETERMINED”; this should be used (i) if the reviewer has attempted to but cannot reach a reasonable objective determination of the concluded license, or (ii) if the reviewer is uncomfortable concluding a license, despite some license information being available; or (d) left blank; this should be used if the reviewer has made no attempt to arrive at a concluded license.  With respect to “a” and “b” above, if there is more than one concluded license, all should be recited.  If the recipient has a choice of multiple licenses, then each of the choices should be recited as a "disjunctive" license.  With respect to “c”, a written explanation must be provided in the License Comments field below.  Lastly, if the Conclude License(s) conflicts with the License Information in File, a written explanation must be provided in the License Comments field below.

5.3a.2 Intent:  Here, the intent is to have the reviewer analyze the License Information in File and other objective information, e.g., “COPYING FILE”, etc., together with the results from any scanning tools, to arrive at a reasonably objective conclusion as to what license is governing the file.

5.3a.3 Cardinality:  Mandatory, one or many.

5.3a.4 Tag: "LicenseConcluded:"

5.3a.5 RDF: TBD  (include Disjunctive form here)

5.3a.6 Data Format: <short form identifier in Appendix I> | "LicenseConcluded"-N | UNDETERMINED | (left blank)

5.3a.7 Example:

LicenseConcluded: GPL-2.0

LicenseConcluded: FullLicenseInformation


5.3b License Information in File

5.3b.1 Purpose: This field contains the license information actually recited in the file, if any.  Any license information not actually in the file, e.g., “COPYING FILE”, etc., should not be reflected in this field.  This information is most commonly found in the header of the file, although it may be in other areas of the actual file. The options to populate this field are limited to: (a) the SPDX standardized license short form identifier; this should be used when the license is on the SPDX standardized license short list and has no ambiguous or superfluous text; (b) a verbatim copy of the license information the file when the license information in the file is not on the SPDX standardized license short list (“non-standard license”); (c) “NONE”; this should be used if the actual file contains no license information; or (d) left blank; this should be used if the reviewer has not examined the contents of the actual files.  With respect to “a” and “b” above, if license information for more than one license is recited in the file, all should be reflected in this field.  If the license information offers the recipient a choice of licenses, then each of the choices should be recited as a "disjunctive" licenses.

5.ba.2 Intent:  Here, the intent is to provide the reader with the license information actually in the file, as compared to the Concluded License field.

5.3b.3 Cardinality:  Mandatory, one or many.

5.3b.4 Tag: "LicenseInfoInFile:"

5.3b.5 RDF: TBD (not including disjunctive form, if multiple many should be specified )

5.3b.6 Data Format: <short form identifier in Appendix I> | "LicenseInfoInFile"-N | NONE | (left blank)

5.3b.7 Example:

LicenseInfoInFile: GPL-2.0

LicenseInfoInFile: FullLicenseInformation


5.3c License Comments

5.3c.1 Purpose: This field is a detailed description of the analysis and any relevant background references that went in to arriving at the Concluded License(s) for a file.  If the Concluded License(s) does not match the License Information in File, such rationale must be recited by the reviewer in this field. This field is also where an explanation must be recited if the reviewer placed “UNDETERMINED” as the Conclude License(s).

5.3c.2 Intent:  Here, the intent is to provide the reader with a detailed explanation of how the Concluded License(s) was determined if it does not match the License Information in File, is marked “UNDETERMINED”, or other helpful information for the reader relevant to determining the license of the file.

5.3c.3 Cardinality: Optional, single instance

5.3c.4 Tag: "LicenseComments:"

5.3c.5 RDF: TBD

5.3c.6 Data Format: free form text than can span multiple lines, preceded with <text> and ending with </text>.

5.3c.7 Example: LicenseComments: <text> The Concluded License(s) was taken from the package level that the file was included in.  This information was found in the COPYING.txt file in the xyz directory. </text>


***

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-03-02

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes – 02-March-2011

 

Attendees:

Esteban Rockett (Motorola)

Karen Copenhaver (LF/Choate)

Kim Weins (OpenLogic)

Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)

Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)

Phil Odence (Blackduck)
Paul Madick (HP)

Kate Stewart (Canonical)

Michael Herzog (NexB)

Scott Peterson (HP)

 

**

- At Kate's suggestion, in revised Section 5.3, the following changes were agreed:  

(1) change "License Information in File" TAG VALUE from "License Information:" to "LicenseInfoInFile:"; and

(2) normalize "Standard and Non-Standard License Information" across all Section 5.3 fields.

- Other minor suggested revisions to the Section 5.3 "field names" were discussed, but then withdrawn.

***

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-03-09

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes – 09-March-2011

 

Attendees:

Esteban Rockett (Motorola)

Karen Copenhaver (LF/Choate)

Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)

Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)

Phil Odence (Blackduck)

Andy Wilson (Intel)

Michael Herzog (NexB)

Scott Peterson (HP)

 

**

- This meeting was limited to discussion of the below proposals:

- The Apache 2.0 license was proposed as the license for all tools created by the SPDX group, inclusive of shell scripts. 

- Further, the Apache 2.0 license was proposed as the suggested license to 3rd parties for any 3rd party desiring to open source a SPDX tool.

- All in attendance were in agreement to the above.  No objections.

***

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-03-23

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes – 23-March-2011

 

Attendees:

Esteban Rockett (Motorola)

Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)

Karen Copenhaver (LF/Choate)

Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)

Phil Odence (Blackduck)
Paul Madick (HP)

Kate Stewart (Canonical)

Michael Herzog (NexB)

Scott Peterson (HP)

 

**

 

Minutes:

- The group re-reported that the SPDX Tools License is concluded to be Apache 2.0.  Further, the SPDX team will recommend that any 3rd party desiring to open source SPDX tools, also license such 3rd party tools under the Apache 2.0 license.  No objections.

- Kate confirmed that revised section 5.3 was being placed into the SPDX Beta Specification.

- Discussions began on "whether there is a need for the Author/Creator" field.  

- A changelog approach to revisions of SPDX metadata was initially suggested by Kate.  Tom and others substantially added.

- The "Confidentiality Statement/Field" was discussed, and generally agreed, but no specific implementation(s) was been concluded.

- Update on the "Templatizing" effort was given.  See http://spdx.org/wiki/guidelines-templatizing-licenses

- It was suggested that we provide a public facing site of all known SPDX tools, when such tools are available.

***

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-04-13

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes – 13-April-2011

 

Attendees:

Esteban Rockett (Motorola)

Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)

Karen Copenhaver (LF/Choate)

Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)

Phil Odence (Blackduck)
Paul Madick (HP)

Kate Stewart (Canonical)

Michael Herzog (NexB)

Scott Peterson (HP)

Andy Wilson (Intel)

 

**

 

Minutes:

- Reports from FSFE Conference (Amsterdam) and Linux Foundation Summit (San Francisco) were given by workstream representatives.  Comments, reactions, and support from all events was extremely positive.  Most notably, Eben Moglen, Mark Radcliff, and Bradley Kuhn have also given their support for SPDX.

- The 3 big issues for the next few months were then opened for discussion.  Those issues are:

(1) The "licensing/legal terms/disclaimer" for the SPDX meta-data;

(2) Method to revise SPDX metadata, including the option of using a changelog; and

(3) Confidentiality-state of SPDX metadata. 

- Discussion on all 3 of the above began.  

- Karen and Rockett introduced the team to the Open Data Commons PDDL 1.0 (http://www.opendatacommons.org/licenses/pddl/1.0/) as a potential candidate to resolve #1 above.

- Discussion of the above topics to be continued at the next meeting.

***

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-04-20

 

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes – 20-April-2011

 

Attendees:

Esteban Rockett (Motorola)

Jilayne Lovejoy (OpenLogic)

Karen Copenhaver (LF/Choate)

Tom Incorvia (Microfocus)

Phil Odence (Blackduck)

Paul Madick (HP)

Kate Stewart (Canonical)

Michael Herzog (NexB)

Scott Peterson (HP)

Andy Wilson (Intel)

 

**

 

Minutes:

- The group continued to drive on the below key issues:

(1) The "licensing/legal terms/disclaimer" for the SPDX meta-data;

(2) Method to revise SPDX metadata, including the option of using a changelog; and

(3) Confidentiality-state of SPDX metadata. 

- For #3 above, the group concluded that both a mandatory "radio-button" style confidentiality feature should be included in the specification, with an optional open text field for additional text, if needed.

- For #2, the group began discussing the Open Data Commons PDDL 1.0 (http://www.opendatacommons.org/licenses/pddl/1.0/), and other alternative approaches.  Creative Commons was re-visited and explained that CC is problematic if the author/creator can be anonymous as previously agreed.

***

 

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-08-10

SPDX Legal Team Minutes - 10-August-2011 

Attendees:

Esteban Rockett, Motorola

Kim Weins, OpenLogic

Peter Williams, OpenLogic

Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck

Bill Schneiller, Black Duck

Tom Incorvia, Microfocus

Jack Manbeck

Terry Ilardi, IBM

Adam Cohn, Cisco

Kate Stewart, Canonical

Jack Manbeck, TI 

Michael Herzog, NexB

Gary O'Neal, Source Auditor

Jordan Hatcher, ARM

Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic

Agenda:

- focus on review and comments to the below draft SPDX Trademark license

- further discussion re: confidentiality of spec as between users

-- Rockett circulated the proposed trademark license text prior to meeting, copied here:

 

---

 

SPDX Trademark License

 

The SPDX and Software Package Data Exchange trademarks (collectively, SPDX Trademarks) are owned by the SPDX Workgroup, which is sponsored by the Linux Foundation (LF).  LF holds the SPDX Trademarks in trust for the SPDX Workgroup.  The SPDX Workgroup hereby grants you a royalty-free, non-exclusive, non-assignable, non-transferable, non-sublicensable, world-wide license to use its SPDX Trademarks in connection with files containing software licensing information if you: 

(i) solely use the SPDX Trademarks in connection with files containing all of the SPDX Mandatory Fields as defined in the applicable version of the SPDX specification; 

(ii) solely uses the SPDX Trademarks in connection with files that do not utilize additional fields, unless such additional fields are ‚ÄúOptional Fields‚Äù as defined in the applicable version of the SPDX specification; 

(iii) recite the applicable SPDX Specification version in, or with, your use of any of the SPDX Trademarks; and 

(iv) fully comply with (a) the SDPX Specification and (b) the license (Creative Commons Attribution License 3.0 (also known as CC-BY-3.0)) under which the SPDX Specification is offered in its entirety. 

 

This SPDX TM License shall automatically be revoked in perpetuity if you fail to comply with any of the above requirements.  A revoked SPDX TM License may only be restored by (i) you submitting a petition for restoration to the Legal Team of the SPDX Workgroup (Legal Team), (ii) attending any required meetings for inquiry in the circumstances, and (iii) a consensus of the Legal Team to restore your license.

--- 

MEETING:

- Rockett went through the trademark license and gave an overview of the what/why of each part 

-- CC-BY-3.0 version issue: (raised via email prior to meeting) CC licenses currently have ports to various jurisdictions, so you need to identify the jurisdiction type.  I'm not sure what we are using, but if it is the Unported (raw) version, then suggest we slightly tweak it and change the reference to " Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Unported License"

- DECISION:  add "Unported" to designation in spec; 

-- Discussion about meaning of compliance with CC license: current license only requires attribution (but still could sell it) 

- Discussion on whether we want to allow selling it - okay b/c might be case where spec is built into a tool or larger product

-- Clarification: CC applies to spec itself, whereas PddL covers the SPDX file itself 

- DECISION:  Should add to (iv)(a) - the SPDX Specification authored/published by the SPDX Working Group and provide url location of spec

-- Also need to specify where and how to do the attribution (CC license assumes author will designate this) and include this info in the spec (and trademark license?)

- Give a couple versions of this for full compliance versus based-on-SPDX scenario?

- DECISION:  Rockett to make a cut on this and circulate to Legal and Technical and then let people comment with goal of closing on this during General Call tomorrow

-- Section (ii) issue: (raised via email prior to meeting) This requirement provides no value and does significant harm to future prospects of SPDX.  It will stifle innovation by making experimentation with new fields and types of data illegal.  It also will drive people out of the SPDX community if they have business requirements that not meet by the current version of SPDX.  In both of these cases we should actively encourage people to extend SPDX to their needs.  We can use information resulting from such experimentation to guide improvements in future versions.  Some might be concerned that allowing data other than that in the specification will cause technical problems with interoperability butthis is not a problem.  RDF is designed to support safe and easy extension so SPDX data encoded in RDF will be readable by any compliant SPDX consumer regardless of any extra "fields" that are included.  The syntax of tag format does not allow any ad hoc extensions at all so consumers of the tag format are also safe.

- Discussion/concerns/comments raised: 

-- most standard groups allow people to add other fields

-- what about tag values and interoperability ‚Üí nothing enforceable and could have potential diversions

-- some of extensions that could be added could veer into "making an interpretation" that we have tried to avoid and these fields could be added without review

-- but anyone who added a field, doesn't mean field gets added to the spec

-- if add field, then person getting SPDX file may assume its part of spec

-- Currently, users can put other ideas into various existing free form comment fields 

- Want to allow extensibility over time - how to do this? May be that optional fields will grow faster than mandatory fields.  Want ability to have user defined fields ‚Üí how to do this requires later more in depth discussion‚Ķ

- the boundaries of change are spec issues, not trademark license discussion - trademark license need only be flexible enough to refer to spec and quality guidelines therein, while balancing trademark law concern with quality control

- Fields in spec now are "mandatory" or "optional" - can be interpreted different ways, but by being specific, could be limiting, if add other language to allow room for adding other fields in future with less confusion

-- DECISION:  put an "out" in clause (ii) - "as defined in applicable version of the SPDX‚Ķ or as extensions as defined‚Ķ" - Rockett to draft something and table larger discussion of whether, and how to change spec to allow additional fields (what, if anything, and how much and how you can modify it)

-- Interplay of confidentiality and SPDX: idea of labelling SPDX file as confidential raises concern that that labelling would only impact the parties to the NDA and downstream recipients would still see the label and shouldn't have to be concerned under PddL.  Downstream recipients may treat it as confidential or not.

- No confidentiality field at all right now (was previously and just decided to drop this field) - no place to enter this in section 2, SPDX Information.  Parties would use a separate confidentiality agreement to achieve this goal, i.e. outside wrapper, you come up with this on your own, not part of SPDX spec or file itself

- How do we allow parties to have confidentiality, but non-parties not see the label?

-- DECISION:  Defer to technical team to propose solutions for next version of spec?

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-08-24

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 24-August-2011 

Attendees:

Esteban Rockett, Motorola Mobility
Kim Wiens, OpenLogic
Michael Herzog, NexB
Phil Odence, BlackDuck
Mark Gisi, WindRiver
Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
Nichlos (protocode)
Paul Maddock, HP
Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
Karen Copenhaver, Choate
Adam Cohen, Cisco

  1. Linux Summit Vancouver Summary was presented.
  2. SPDX Official launch went well.
  3. BOF revealed issues with PDDL acceptance, because it is not another license for project to have to be concerned about.  Alternative suggestions were entertained.  Karen agreed to draft a modified MIT license as a potential alternative, and circulate before next meeting.

Update on how LinuxCon went - announcement on Wednesday; session on Thursday and birds of a feather on Thursday evening

  • Announcement and press release on Wednesday with quotes, etc.
  • Informational session on Thursday went well, no major difficult questions
  • hot issues: how will we provide metadata and licensing of metadata (PddL) at BOF
    • issue described as how metadata can be used while keeping it in public domain
    • concerns stem from European database law
    • should we be concerned with this?
    • Still need ability to be confidentiality, while preparing and potentially 
    • At BOF: core team and active members, but also some peripheral from community/developer side - got negative reaction to idea of PddL 
      • from perspective of community developer - new license I'm not familiar with, don't care about licensing, rebeling as a result
      • feedback from professor, and importance of attribution and PddL doesn't allow attribution
    • original thing we were trying to avoid, was database law to claim rights in an SPDX file and no one else can use it. Avoid this by using trademark license to enforce use of PddL.  But nefarious actors can still circumvent
      • is this really a concern?
  • Is this really a risk overall, i.e. do we need a license at all
    • Confidentiality is bigger issue
    • Reality that next year at LinuxCon, issue will probably be open data; we have opportunity to start clean pipeline and data can be re-used any way you want
      • Idea is if I get an SPDX that this license applies to the data
      • If want to drive this up to project level, they don't understand the data laws and will ask why isn't this the CC license
        • Little bit of a battle b/w CC license, but CC has not issued a license yet that deals with the data issue
      • If we only had PddL as default, could result in SPDX files under other licenses and more confusion
      • What if we used one of the public domain CC licenses, how concerned are we with the EU data laws
      • Also still need a disclaimer - example, MIT license - familiar and leaves open to adopt something later; easier to get buy-in
        • Have to use "to the extent that there are any rights‚Ķ" b/c don't want to acknowledge that there are any rights
        • Simple approach of using (modified) MIT, step in right direction
          • Have to accept reality that software - data, not same thing
        • Karen to write something up and circulate
        • Need to make decision, do it immediately, and stick with it? (or at least try)
          • Only way to get absoluteness is to prevent use of SPDX trademark at all unless used in line with trademark license
          • As long as we allow others to use specification in non-compliant form, increases matter of percentage, but never 100 %
          • Could spin out v1.1 release quickly and have this be only change
          • Can we also tackle confidentiality issue at same time?
      • Karen to circulate proposal - some things to consider/include:
        • Spec under CC-BY 3.0 clarification
        • Exempt any copyrightable materials included in SPDX (i.e. license text) ; can use field names to exempt
        • This is really a disclaimer
        • No mention of comments copyright-able-ness?
        • Is this consistent with previous PddL approach around confidentiality
        • Seems like this MIT-style would make this even easier?
        • Technical team will be asked to look at pending proposal for proposed confidentiality field (as discussed earlier) and hope to wrap that up together
  • Legal call next week (instead of two weeks) to review what Karen circulates and try to wrap this up

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-09-07

 

SPDX Legal Workstream Minutes - 7-September-2011

Attendees:

  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola Mobility
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Mark Gisi, WindRiver
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Kisten Newcomer, BlackDuck
  • Kim Wiens, OpenLogic
  • Jordan Hatcher, ARM

- The Modified MIT license (prepared by Karen Copenhaver) was discussed at length.

- The agreed that adoption of SPDX was more important than safeguarding against european database statues.

- CC-0 was re-introduce as a candidate for the metadata license. The group agreed to re-visit at the next bi-weekly meeting.

 

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-09-21

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 21 Sept 2011

Esteban Rockett, Motorola
Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
Kim Wiens, OpenLogic
Terry Ilardi, IBM
Jordan Hatcher, ARM
Mark Gisi, Wind River
Adam Cohn, Cisco
Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
Kate Stewart, Canonical
Mansour Ghomeshi, Motorola
Michael Herzog, NexB

Linux.org still down; spdx emails also do not seem to be working…

(1) Discussion on "Modified MIT/CC-0/PDDL"; with populating Mark Gisi's spreadsheet and reminder from Karen on "why we initially avoided CC-0"

http://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/

http://opendatacommons.org/licenses/pddl/1.0/

  • Karen circulated a modified MIT license with comments as an option
  • issues came up at Vancouver birds of a feather discussion re: hesitation about using a new/unfamiliar license (PddL)
  • Mark Gisi maintaining a tracking document with pros and cons re: various license options so can see how we came to the final decision
  • Why not CC-Zero?
    • Karen had raised concern by merely using CC-Zero might indicate there is copyright protection in data or an endorsement/agreement with European data laws o maybe we can diffuse this concern with some introductory language? E.g. "to the extent there are any rights… (description of rights)…"
    • will it imply that we believe data is copyrightable and that could create other repercussions?
    • CC-Zero does cover European laws, no gap in coverage; maybe makes more sense to present a legal tool around this, instead of debating; if take position of someone who receives the database and don't give them a license (to avoid) then they may have to assume they have to get © clearence, so as practical matter, better to give license up front
      • Preface license with statement that comments and anything else that may be copyrightable according to local law - CC-Zero (or whatever) applies
      • i.e. "I'm not sure what's all in there, but whatever it is, I'm giving it to you under public domain" 
    • o would CC-Zero appease the feedback at the Vancouver birds of a feather
      • more brand recognition for CC, so people more familiar with products by them
      • CC-Zero is shorter than PDDL is longer and not used as commonly, thus making CC-Zero more palatable even if PDDL does the same thing
      • Maybe good to go to various foundation and community guys at BOF and ask if this would work

--> Rockett, Karen, Adam, Jordan, Kim → to prepare the preamble and get that to legal group for review in a week, then Kim can bring this to foundation/community people to get feedback (or buy-in); with goal of closing on this issue by two weeks/next legal meeting

(2) Discuss "Confidentiality" treatments.

  • Re: CC-Zero allowing confidentiality provisions without conflict?
  • 3 states:
    • no confidentiality at all
    • confidential for a certain period of time
    • confidential
    • issue more about SPDX trademark; ex. Motorola will use SPDX throughout, but if can't keep it confidential, then will still use it, but just won't call it "SPDX"
  • strong reaction against tying trademark to this; engineers had negative reaction 
    • concern was around ability to make changes and contribute it back and still be SPDX (mostly)
      • need to give people a proscribed way to add fields, customize it, address extensibility - if we gave some explicit way to do this, might it alleviate some of these concerns?
      • Always said we'd deal with extensibility with next version of spec 
    • maybe raise confidentiality separately than compliance/trademark issue o working on technical proposal to separate… ??
  • putting aside how marking of file is done, how about an open-ended field to site confidentiality? 
    • Open-ended description/option seems fine to allow vendors to mark as needed
  • Adam to get more feedback on what exactly was the concern around this

(3) Discuss finishing license "templatizing"

  • how do you know that two license texts that look the same are actually the same; Kate had sent link summarizing where we were on this thus far.
    • Normalizing to case and spacing; no swapping paragraphs; no changing punctuation; replacement of "copyright holder" or "author" fields, etc.
    • Rockett, Jilayne, Kate - to dust that list off, make sure it makes sense and distribute to group for review and comment by rest of group

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-10-05

SPDX Legal Workstream Meeting Minutes

5 October 2011

Esteban Rockett, Motorola

Adam Cohn, Cisco

Karen Copenhaver, Choate Hall

Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic

Kirsten Newcomer, Black Duck

Peter Williams, OpenLogic

Mark Gisi, Wind River

Tom Incorvia, Microfocus

 

I)          LInux website update: coming online again slowly, but SPDX site still not up. Issues:

  • we've been sending people there and not up; tools not accessible, etc. 
    • What are our backup mechanisms if this happened again? No backup solution right now, but John Ellis and Martin M. working on this
  • email lists also down - Phil suggested to create google groups to preserve email lists, he is working on that now
    • Kate is also setting up IRC

II)              Update on Discussion w/ Breakout Group on CC-0 & Draft Preamble

  • circulated below draft of preamble for CC-0 for review by group.  Rockett to take it to Eben Moglen next for his input
  • companies more concerned with "disclaimer" that even though put info in here, no responsibility for reliance on info downstream, so may need language as such. Could use disclaimer of warranties from GPL v3 because it was an attempt to address international perspective for this
  • or could say in preamble, "to the extent there is any IP rights at all (whether database rights) in any jurisdiction, it's covered by CC-0…" and "regardless of whether there is IP coverage, the disclaimer paragraph applies to all contributions"
  • maybe good to talk to Eben and get his feedback and go from there
  • See Mark's "rationale" document for a good summarization of the five key goals/concerns here
    • Goal of this document is to stand by itself as an explanation and to show the comprehensive process that was undertaken to make this decision (will be posted)

** Draft SPDX CC-0 Preamble **
Compliance with the SPDX specification includes populating the SPDX fields therein with data related to such fields ("SPDX-Metadata").

The SPDX specification contains numerous fields where an SPDX author may provide relevant explanatory text in SPDX-Metadata.

Without opining on the lawfulness of "database rights" (in jurisdictions where applicable), such explanatory text is copyrightable subject matter in most Berne Convention countries.

By using the SPDX specification, or any portion hereof, you hereby agree that any copyright rights (as determined by your jurisdiction) in any SPDX-Metadata, including without limitation explanatory text, shall be subject to the terms of the below recited Creative Commons CC0 1.0 Universal license (reproduced in its entirety below).

III)            European OpenSource & Free Software Law Event (EOLE) http://eolevent.eu/enon Nov 4 in Barcelona

Malcom Bain might be going - Karen to reach out to him, could get him up to speed easily even though he has not been involved

IV)            Update on Discussion w/Breakout Group on Templatizing

 Jilayne sent around draft document setting forth guidelines (if you didn't get this, let someone know to forward)

Outstanding issues: "BSD" license issue regarding where/how to allow replaceable text and how/what to allow matching on for headers alone

-        Jilayne and Rockett to draw up straw mans on these issues and distribute for feedback at next meeting

-        Distribute to tech group at this point as well for feedback there

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-10-19

SPDX Legal Workstream Meeting Minutes - 19 October 2011

  • Esteben Rockett, Motorola
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Terry Ilardi, IBM
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Karen Copenhaver, Choate Hall/LF

update on the Linux Foundation websites - no word on change as to timing for it being back up, so should be any day now.

update on outstanding to-do's:

  • Rockett to get legal workstream Google Group going
  • Jilayne to get BSD templatizing examples together and send to group
  • Rockett to send CC Zero preamble to Eben (Karen to help coordinate)
  • Karen to talk to Malcolm Bain about SPDX presentation at the EOLE event in Barcelona in early November

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-11-16

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 16 November 2011

Esteban Rockett, Motorola

Karen Copenhaver, Choate Hall

Tom Incorvia, Microfocus

Paul Madick, HP

Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic

 

Data license update: Rockett still trying to schedule with Eben re: any concerns about CC-Zero and his opinion on the preamble we have drafted

- seeing some disengagement as a result of this issue; probably want to run it by Fedora and some of the Cisco guys who objected before full-sale announcement as well.

 

1)  Now that the website is back up - are we comfortable we have a back-up?

  • need to know how LF is going to address potential failure and feel comfortable with that plan
  • have redirect, i.e. second backup; relying on this to give documents to client
  • need to have conversation with Mike or Jim from LF; can they give the same support as given to the kernel?Also ask, did they have a mirroring function that will be applicable to SPDX and if not, then do we want to do that?Are we part of mirroring plan?What is timing to trigger? (ideally, don't want down-time to be more than 4 hours); if all sites go down, does this include the mirror as well (mirrors went down as well this time?? how were the mirrors structured before?) need to know this as well.
  • need to get conversation going; if LF has a backup, do we want a backup to the backup?
  • want Jim to be part of call, as well as Mike, they have already heard from Karen, but need to hear from members - e.g. Tom's example/what is based on this site and the reliance on it by members - Karen can help coordinate and workgroup needs to be prepared to present scenario

2) Communication channel - do we want communications to be separate than server?  And if so, what channel?

  • have list in alternate place, so we can access list - copying it off-line would probably be enough for a backup
  • we have an IRC channel on Freenode.  not much traffic now. probably pretty robust in terms of reliability, but need to educate people on how to use it
  • do technical or business teams have a recommendation (what are they doing?) Would be good to have a consistent solution across all four mailing groups --> discuss in general meeting tomorrow
  • what are our requirements (as legal team)?
    • -would prefer wherever communication is held, so that it's seamless and efficient
    • be able to continue to communicate whether or not the server went out or not
    • links still work
    • ability to know which issues are open and pending in Bugzilla important to legal team? may be under-used by legal team, but should continue with that; best place for revision tracking?  helpful for things that aren't dealt with right away for logging stuff 
  • --> legal team will track on whatever the technical team goes with, no additional requirements from us
  • templatizing tool will also need to be available at same rate as licenses and spec, etc.

Action items:

- schedule talk with Jim and Mike re: mirroring/back-up

- communications rqmts - discuss at General Meeting tomorrow

- continue using Bugzilla for text documents - people to re-familiarize and/or use more

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2011-12-14

SPDX Legal Workstream Meeting Minutes - 14 December 2011

attendees:

  •  Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Paul Madick
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic

Phil still trying to schedule debrief with Linux Foundation re: outage and mitigation going forward; to discuss further at next all-hands meeting

legal group to-dos for 2012:

  1. get updated preamble + CC-Zero license to community
  2. update meeting minutes on website
  3. update license list and continue work with OSI re: Python licenses and other issues
  4. templatizing guidelines
  5. re-opt-in for larger list
  6. spec revision - change in SPDX license (CC-Zero w/preamble)

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2012-01-11

SPDX Legal Workstream Meeting Minutes - 11 January 2012

  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Mark Gisi, Windriver
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic

(started late due to miscommunication b/w Rockett and Jilayne re: who was leading call, apologies to anyone who joined and then dropped off from waiting)
TOPICS:
I)  new data license - CC-Zero + preamble
Mark has a document explaining the rationale for the data license discussions of late last year, which he will update now that we have decided.  This will be posted in the legal section of the website, once the new site is up.
ACTION ITEM: Jilayne to get latest version (with any minor edits) to Mark; to Kim; and post on new site
ACTION ITEM: Mark to update/complete rationale document and post on new site

II)Templatizing Licenses Jilayne previously sent latest version of guidelines.  feedback on that:

  • guidelines state to ignore bullets v. numbering v. lettering for sub-parts of license;  however, this is not going to work b/c some licenses (e.g. Eclipse) have references to the numbered sections in other parts of the license
    • what about BSD?  sometimes uses bullets, sometimes numbers for clauses, wouldn't want to consider such a "different" license for this reason only.  Can we make this part of template for just BSD example (because need to templatize BSD anyway?) are there other license where this would be a factor?  Technological/tool considerations here?
  • British v. American spelling list - Tom pointed out that in some cases it's not clear which is which nor does it matter as concern is equivalency (not etymology) --> change list to equivalents

ACTION ITEM:  Jilayne to update templatizing guidelines as per above notes/observations
ACTION ITEM:  GROUP to review and further discussion needed at next meeting

III)  License List
no progress, but next version in the works still;  Tom suggested a review of shortnames and licenses as long as we are in process
ACTION ITEM: Jilayne to circle back with OSI re: outstanding issues and get list uploaded

IV) Other
A) License approval process - we need to get up to date on this.  Where is the latest iteration?  Needs to be vetted, finalized, and posted on website
** Jilayne spoke to Kim; latest iteration is thought to be somewhere in business team minutes, so she will look for and to be discussed at next general and business team meetings;  

B) License v. license notice
discussed issue when generating SPDX file of identifying a license via a license notice versus the license itself.  That is, we do not want license notices to be added to the license list as a license - how to decide when a notice means XYZ license where XYZ license does not have a standard notice/header

  • do we need guidelines around this?
  • do we need a separate field in the spec for this information?
  • how do you handle the structure of this in the data? how do you enable reconstruction of what was in file?  is this non-standard notice simply put in the comments section?
  • further, what about notices of a disjunctive license scenario?

ACTION ITEM: Michael to come up with a couple examples for further discussion 

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2012-01-25

SPDX Legal Workstream Meeting Minutes - 25 January 2012

In attendance:

  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Tom Incoriva, Microfocus
  • Mark Gisi, Windriver
  • Phil Odence, Black Duck
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Mansour Ghomeshi, Motorola
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Michael Herzog, NexB

AGENDA

I - update on CC-0 Preamble

  • changed "copyrightable material" to "copyrightable work" in second and third paragraphs. 

ACTION ITEM: Jilayne to update this on SPDX wiki page with preamble

II - Review draft License List Match Guidelines (templatizing)

went through guideline document by section;  change focus from normalizing on guidelines - to just offering guidelines and let tools makers implement

White Space

  • if one sentence moves to another paragraph, it would be treated the same;  does this matter, can we find a use case where this would matter? could treat paragraph break as different than other whitespace breaks
  • seems okay to treat all white space the same; leave as is in guidelines

Capitalization - okay as is

Puncuation - okay as is

Bullets and Numbering

  • as to bullets/numbers, just say ignore these
  • this would require flagging this text within licenses that have references 
  • can we ignore the bullet/number/letter, but not "lose" that info (so you still see it later), otherwise it would be unreadable - really internal details for tools anyway
  • can we just start here and see how it goes?  Licenses that have internal references are less likely to have changes with numbering anyway
  • start here, and modify later if needed

Varietal Word Spelling

  • decision to re-word description re: British/American spelling to just equivalent spelling since geography is a non-issue
  • are there any words where there may be 3 different spelling? list only has two columns
    • Can't think of any example, but would be same - not 
  • what about if a word is misspelled?  - slippery slope to try and deal with this; if misspelled consistently in license, then will just match on misspelling;  
    • Can watch to see if this comes up/examples

Copyright Symbol

  • okay as is - just say all three options are equivalent

Copyright notice

  • copyright notice line guideline:  is the copyright notice at the top of BSD really part of the license?
  • License is something that should be fixed; where does license notice fall in this?
  • Copyright notice applies to file; but license is the actual text, not the notice (which may say you have to reproduce the copyright notice)
  • Should we then strip the copyright notice out altogether in our license list?
  • Copyright notice for license itself is distinct, so keep - but most cases it would not be part of license itself
  • How does this impact our license list - e.g. "GPL or later" where there isn't really an "or later" license, but is really just a notice
  • Then raises question of how to deal with preambles and epilogue?

→ next time pick up here with discussion and may tie into conversation re: headers

ACTION ITEM: update License List Match Guidelines and post on wiki page on spdx.org (current page posted is outdated)


Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2012-02-08

SPDX Legal Workstream Meeting Minutes - 8 February 2012

attending:

  • Paul Madick, 
  • Mark Gisi, WindRiver
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Esteban  Rockett, Motorola
  • Tom Incorvia, MicroFocus
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Kate Stewart, Canonical

AGENDA:

i - License List Match Guidelines - pickup at #7 Copyright Notice guideline:


see http://spdx.org/wiki/spdx-license-list-match-guidelines for updated guidelines. No more Word document.

  • is the copyright notice "part" of the license?
    • yes in the case of BSD and MIT, i.e. is BSD 3-clause shows up multiple times with different copyright notices, we want it to match to BSD 3-clause 
      • in this case, copytihgt notice not part of license in terms of matching
      • remove copyright notice from license text field in our license list and move it??
    • no in the case of Apache or GPL where there is a copyright notice for the license itself?
    • where someone leaves the <copyright holder> insertable text in the license - does that make it a "different" notice
    • if there is no copyright notice where there usually is one, is that a match?
  • can we simply say ignore copyright notice, include example, 
    • don't take out copyright notices in license text on license list
    • or different rules for different license? - hard for implementation
    • if a license has its own copyright notice (i.e. Apache 2.0) and its ignored would this be bad?
  • --> guideline for copyright notice, ignore, but then question is whether we then need to go through the entire license list and delineate where that begins and ends

  

  • notice issue - the notice is not a license, in case of BSD, license is contained in the notice, but whereas GPL notice may be different forms and also may indicate "or later" or not - but still same GPL license (to discuss more in depth later)
  • does spec differentiate b/w notice and copyright holder well enough?  may need to be more specific about how we discuss copyright holders in spec
    • what about when there are different copyright holders for different licenses within a file
  • --> these issues to be further discussed at next meeting (items #8 and #9 on license list match guidelines page)

 

II - License List format issue

on last business call the issue of several license text being too long for the character limit in Excel then resulting in that license text missing in the html pages was discussed and how to remedy this so that all info was in one place.  Need to have a downloadable (spreadsheet) format for people who want to download the license list for their own purposes.  Eventually we will transition to the html pages being the "original" and have some kind of tool to generate a downloadable file, but in the meantime, the spreadsheet is the "original" and the html files are created from that.

Gary, Bill, and Jilayne had a call on Monday about various options.  proposal to move the license text into separate text files named according to the short identifiers and then the spreadsheet would have a link to the text file. spreadsheet and text files would be one downloadable tar ball.  

Update and discussion of this issues at legal meeting:

  • should the separate files be .txt files or the html files? if html files, kind of creates circular situation
  • to be discussed at general meeting tomorrow.

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2012-02-22

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 22 Feb 2012

  • Paul Madick, HP
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Esteban Rockett, Motorola
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic

AGENDA:

1) agenda for April 6 SPDX Summit

  • legal team - "scared" people away last time, what can we do to avoid that, especially make sure to cover standard license text
    • make sure to cover goal and concept of License List; as a resource 
    • who will be there: Rockett, Michael (hopefully), Adam (yes), Tom (no)
    • tooling part - important to include future roadmap for tooling
  • agenda seems to be broken down into two types of audiences: 1) what is it, how do I get started; 2) what is it, not interested in it now, but want to get involved and know what it's going to look like in the future
    • concern that audience won't know what group they are in; suggestion to mix it up and not segment along these lines so distinctly

2) License List

  • License .txt file review (see license list page for .zip download with spreadsheet and all .txt files): need to check license text in newly formed .txt files (some numbering got stripped out when cut and pasted into the spreadsheet and made into text files; remove any coding items, i.e. astericks or hashes at beginning of line); email Jilayne revised .txt files if changes made or notice that everything was good.  If issues that need discussion, bring to next meeting.
    • Paul - lines 2-12
    • Adam - lines 13-19, 23-27 (Cecill licenses)
    • Peter - 28-34, 60-64
    • Jilayne - 35-59 (Creative Common license set)
    • Michael - 65-77
    • Rockett - 78-90
    • Phil Odence - 91-101
    • Tom - BSD license research

 

  • License list issues: (see green text in last column in spreadsheet)
    • BSD license - Tom to investigate
    • "or later" - really same license, but differentiation is within header; may have additional license choices going forward when "or later" - more information for reviewer than actual license terms
      • choice is made when package is used - discussion re: disjunctive license notice generally
      • should we have disjunctive license set? disjunctive part is really notice
      • do we have a field for license header or notice: extracted license for that info (whether full license text or notice or header) - how do we extract those three pieces of information?
      • do we want to have SPDX to build a database of common license notices (if not now, then at some point)? hard to do in spreadsheet, but from tooling perspective pretty easy
      • continuum of information from headers: just "standard" license headers as currently defined; expand to common references to particular licenses; expand to common disjunctive license notices
        • we are at the first step now - where do we go from here and how to proceed?

for next call: To-do items in License List are either GPL or later issue, GPL + exception question or other smaller issues.  Next time, we will try to dispense with the smaller (easier) issues on list first to get those out of the way.  GPL "or later" issues ties to license match discussion, so probably best to discuss all together.

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2012-03-07

SPDX Legal Team - meeting minutes for 7 March 2012

  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Colin Wright, McKesson
  • Mark Gisi, Windriver
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Karen Copenhaver, Choate Hall
  • Luis Villa, Greenberg Taurig

Agenda:

  1. Update on various feedback
  2. to-do's on the hopper - including priority items to get done before April 6 SPDX Forum in San Jose

("assignments" and action items in all caps)

1) License List is getting more attention as seen by recent correspondance by persons outside the group looking to use the license list as a reference/standard/resource for referring to licenses.  Take-away of this is the the License List is shaping up to be an "entry point" from SPDX generally, i.e. easier to adopt names, as many organizations have a need to have a standard way to refer to licenses. from there may lead to adoption of spec.  Sub-text - even higher priority/pressure to resolve outstanding issues and create guidelines for matching, etc. so we can move to a more stable maintenence role.   

  • Notably: Phil, Karen, and Jilayne had a call with David Wheeler from IDA regarding having the license list include a way to identify U.S. Gov't works and the legal reality that that represents.  David is going to send some standard headers, so this will be something to add to the list and configure in the near future.  
    • will entail a new short identifier, possibly an explanation and reference to relevant U.S. statutes and may include multiple headers that "point" to this same designation.
    • JILAYNE AND KAREN TO FOLLOW-UP AND GET PROPOSAL GOING FOR THIS

2) To-dos:

  • finish license text review
    • got licenses back from Adam, Phil, Paul, Peter; Michael and Rockett still working on theirs.  There were many changes/updates, so good we did this!
    • goal to have this DONE by next call - about 60 more licenses to assign. volunteers for next round listed below.  if anyone else can assist, please tell Jilayne asap!! see http://spdx.org/wiki/legal-team-meeting-minutes-2012-02-22 for description of process
      • COLIN  - lines 102 thru 113
      • ADAM  - lines 114 thru 125
      • PHIL - lines 126 thru 137
  • OSI license list issues - Karl Fogel responded (email went to group)
    • JILAYNE TO FOLLOW-UP SEE IF WE CAN GET ISSUES SORTED BY APRIL 6TH FORUM
  • resolve other License List issues among group: (see further discussion below)
    • BSD Licenses overview - Tom sent email to group prior to meeting for discussion, see for reference
      • recommendation to ADD: BSD 4-Clause specific to the U. of California in order to accomodate the scenario where a original 4-clause license is retroactively turned into a 3-clause as per July 22, 1999 notice from William Hoskins, Directore of Office of Tech Licensing, UC-Berkeley
        • in contrast, a match to the "plain" BSD 4-clause will not carry this retroactive change and just refer to the full 4 clause license
        • add to license list along with the notice in the Notes field and an explanation as needed
        • DECISION BY GROUP: Yes to adding this license
      • text variations such as "copyright holder" v. "copyright owner" - equivalent? can we handle via equivalent words list or need to deal with more broadly in matching guidelines? also need to consider where "or contributors" is present or not
        • under US law, "copyright holder" v. "copyright owner" can be considered the same, but would want European perspective on this - PENDING someone on call who can speak to this
        • generally, these issues need to be dealt with via the license match guidelines for when to "ignore" some of this text - TBD
      • Review of current naming of various BSD licenses - okay as is, no change recommended
      • FreeBSD and NetBSD both have an extra line at end or beginning.  under matching guidelines this would be considered a different license (than standard BSD).  Due to there both being prominent projects, should these two licenses be added as separate?
        • TOM TO SEND EMAIL TO LIST TO DESCRIBE SCENARIO AND DISCUSS AT NEXT MEETING
    • also discussed concept of buckets for types of licenses, i.e. attribution v. permissive - bunch of ideas around this, as well as acknowledgement that this may go beyond scope of SPDX?  
      • Mark to submit proposal for review by group as not enough time to discuss now
    • MPL 2.0 exhibits discussion (including discussion of GPL only or or later) - Luis Villa joined call to assist with explanation and guidance
      • Luis gave an overview of the MPL v2.0 exhibits and rationale behind (also on previous email thread)
      • discussed in tangent with GPL only v. or later issue - currently have these as separate line items on License List - everyone agrees that capturing that distinction is key/wanted, but how best to do so?  how we have it currently or one license line item with the options of different headers?
        • suggested to have some kind of modifiers, i.e license is GPL v2 and modfied with an "or later" or "only" (or even "exception") designator
        • different list for headers? that inter-operates with License List?
        • legal team needs to decide WHAT needs to be identified then go to technical team to determine HOW to implement
        • suggested futher discussion on next call and set aside time during workgroup meeting on Thursday, April 5 at Linux Collab Summit to flesh this issue out a bit more.
    • GPL exceptions - how do we "define" the actua license text (for the license list itself, as well as matching guidelines: should it be the license itself plus the exception text or the exception text only?)
  • license matching guidelines - finish/pickup where left off a couple calls ago. still need to cover the headers/notices matching issue and replaceable text (template) issues as the big remaining items - gets intertwined with License List issues
  • website migration - no progress on this and legal team is now weak link - need someone to take on this task and get done asap.  May also need to re-think navigation for legal portion as well as additional pages/information but for now, just need to get stuff copied/moved into new format.
    • MARK TO TAKE LEAD WITH THIS (MAY ENGAGE PIERRE FOR HELP, IF NEEDED)
  • Process for adding new licenses to list
    • currently with business team, but does it make sense to have it go back to legal team or a sub-group thereof
    • current process discussed is outlined here:  http://spdx.org/wiki/process-adding-license-list-draft
    • ideally need to review this and be able to describe at SPDX Forum on April 6

 

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2012-03-21

SPDX Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 21 March 2012

in attendance:

  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Tom Incorvia, Microfocus
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco
  • Mark Gisi, Windriver
  • David Wheeler, IDA
  • Paul Madick, HP

I - new conference dial-in number.  Some people still dialing into the old number.  

  • Jilayne needs to send new invite --> DONE: invite sent to spdx-legal list, but not sure that will work... ?? 
  • NOTE: no meeting April 5 due to Linux Collab Summit going on.  Jilayne on holiday on April 18, so someone else will need to lead the call on that date, most likely.  

II - Upcoming events

  • Linux Collab Summit, San Fran, April 3-5, Tuesday - Thursday
    • Keynote panel on SPDX on Tuesday afternoon at 2:45
    • Tech team working group on Wednesday afternoon
    • All teams working group on Thursday afternoon (Phil O coordinating that schedule now: items submitted for discussion on that agenda for legal team:
      • license list addition process
      • license matching guidelines - finish
      • different headers for one license issue (MPL 2.0; GPL only v. or later, etc.) which also touches matching guidelines
        • discussion re: prioritizing these; all agreed license list addition process is crucial to get hammered out.  
        • point made that we don't need a formal process, but some process that is clearly identified
        • benefit of putting some of the "burden" on person making request in terms of providing necessary information and some kind of rationale for why the license should be on the list
        • some background on how we got here - i.e. "draft" of process that was somewhat forward thinking and describes a more formal process that might include a web form for submittal, etc.; ownership of business team (see: http://spdx.org/wiki/process-adding-license-list-draft)
        • all agreed that legal team is really where this belongs (at least as first point of contact) and no one seemed to think the business team was going to object to the legal team taking it back.
        • logical starting point is to describe the process as it is now, i.e. email to legal group, discussion, addition (or rejection). we can always modify/update as needed along the way
        • can we simply take care of this via email/list serve? (and then not have to spend tiem on it at the working group on 4/5?)
        • Adam to write up process as it goes currently;  will circulate this to Biz and Legal groups and if no objections, post as current process on site, etc.
  • SPDX Forum, San Jose, April 6, Friday
  • Who will be where?
    • Jilayne Peter, Adam, Mark at both; Paul at Thursday only; David, Tom not able to make either


III - Website refresh update from Mark

  • Mark has completed the task of moving all the old/existing website pages to the corresponding pages on the new site, with the exception of:
    • the License List which is generated separately.  Gary is aware of this issue/need to migrate over to new site
    • 3 pages listed on new site that we do not have content for:
  1. list of legal-related conferences/activities
  2. list of roles of people
  3. key activities/issues page
not going to worry about 1 and 2 for now, but 3 could be used for listing items to be discussed on thursday, April 5 at the Linux Collab Summit SPDX working session.  
  • Jilayne to create this page on old/existing site and let Mark know, so he can map it to new site
  • check with Kim re: timing

IV - License List - various items

  • Re-affirmed decision from last week to ADD license: BSD-4-Clause-UC (see Tom's email sent just before meeting for summary)
    • License to be added to list for v1.15
  • Discussed Tom's proposal to add two BSD-ish licenses: NetBSD and FreeBSD
    • these (legally speaking) are different licenses due to an extra sentence or clause at the start or end of the license text
    • Decided to add both to list as separate licenses; 
    • Tom to circulate naming proposals for full name and short identifier
      •  should full name be "NetBSD" becuase that's what it is called "in the wild" or should we follow SPDX naming convention and call it something like, "BSD 3-clause (NetBSD)" which would have the benefit of showing all BSD-like licenses on list near each other for alphabetical purposes?? on the other hand, would someone be more likely to look/expect to find it under NetBSD?? - to be discussed further
  • "copyright holder" versus "copyright owner"
    • wanted to get European perspective on whether these two things can be equated
    • Jilayne to email European Legal Network for feedback --> email sent
  • coordinating and aligning SPDX License List with other lists (Fedora, Debian, OSI, FSF)
    • OSI - already has adopted naming and short identifiers, but some follow-up needs to be done.  no word from then on when that will happen, but open-issues notated in spreadsheet version of License List
    • Fedora and Debian - we have talked to, but getting back in touch now would be good
      • Jilayne to reach out to Tom at Fedora and chase down contact from previous email string re: Debian
    • FSF "license list" as per this page: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/license-list.html
      • Jilayne thought this was considered/checked when License list made, but will check
  • License List text review - want to have this DONE by a week from tomorrow (3/29) so all text will have been checked and revisions included in v1.15 upload scheduled for sometime before the Forum on 4/6
    • Jilayne to follow up with people who have not completed their homework...
  • AGPL full name has "v3" instead of "v3.0" as all other GPL licenses naming do - fix this
  • brought up general issue of the licenst list field protocols which is posted here: http://spdx.org/wiki/spdx-license-list
    • needs to be updated a bit, as a few things are missing

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2012-04-05 (LF Collab Summit)

SPDX Legal Work Group meeting minutes - 5 April 2012

 

Linux Foundation Collab Summit - SPDX face-to-face

Thursday, April 5, 2012

 

1) Different headers for the same license issue

How to capture in License List where the same license text has different "meanings' indicated by different headers.  Key examples: MPL v2.0 (Exhibit A or Exhibit A & B); L/GPL licenses ("or later" or "only").  Complete agreement that this information needs to be captured. Question is how to capture/implement?

  • A)PROPOSAL 1:  leave 'as is' on license list now which is that these scenarios are captured as a different "line item" (with distinct license name and identifier) for each header scenario that can change the meaning of the license (e.g. GPL-2.0; GPL-2.0+) 
  • i)Pros:
    • a)Fedora and Fossology already uses similar short names as we have now (i.e. GPLv2 or GPLv2+)
    • b)Predictable and specifically identified, which is intrinsic to goal of license list
  • ii)Cons:
    • a)Won't match other lists
  • iii)Other considerations:
    • a)if we stay with this route, propose that short identifier says "only" in it? 
      • (1)But then, what about when you aren't sure - which short identifier do you use?  Default to "or later?"  Is more intuitive to use "GPL-2.0" plain?
  • B)PROPOSAL 2: license list is just the licenses themselves.  Headers or alternative exhibits are captured on a separate list that then modifies the license list.  
  • i)e.g. On the master license list, GPL v2 would be just that GPL-2.0 (without indicating "or later" or "only"), then the separate list would have the headers variations of the "or later" text present or removed.  The short identifier could then be modified by a sub-set of identifier or identifier extension, such as "GPL-2.0" + "or later" or "GPL-v2.0" + "only" - likewise for MPL and its exhibits.  Presumably, each scenario would have it's own extension modifier
    • a)potential problems - more to keep track of and more complicated.  Is the net result all the different than Proposal 1? 

DISCUSSION:

  • vigorous discussion around pros and cons of #1 and #2 
  • variation proposed that combined both proposals
  • major problem/drawback with proposal #2 and any variation thereof is potential for explosion of scenarios where modifiers could be used in non-conformant way causing ambiguity or confusion which goes against goal of license list 
  • advantage of current scenario - it's simple (even if lengthy) and has rigidity needed; but some clarification needed

DECISION

 leave as is = separate "line items" for GPL v2 only and GPL v2 or later

 

TO-DOs

  • add in Notes field for all GNU licenses that short identifier "GPL-2.0" = GPL v2 only and vice versa 
    • (Jilayne to do for next version of license list)
  • add other MPL 2.0 scenarios for Exhibit B (see Luis email and meeting minutes) 
    • (Jilayne to do for next version of license list)
  • need to come up with list of all licenses that fall into this category (same license text appearing more than once on license list) and determine the "default" if SPDX file creator only files license with no delineating header or other information
    • (Jilayne or someone else? to come up with list and then discuss on one of next legal calls)

 

OTHER RELATED DISCUSSION

  • C)GPL exceptions 
  • i)how to display license text?  Should it be the entire GPL license + exception; or just the header and exception; or just match on the exception text?  
  • a)Did not discuss
  • ii)How does this interplay with proposals above? If #1, then as is on list, but still need to answer above questions, if #2, then could treat exceptions as part of modifier/extension list? 
  • a)Also leave as is in terms of separate line items
  • b)acknowledgement that SPDX license list does not have all exceptions and will need to add more (research needed on this to identify holes)
  • c)could we come up with a system of separate license modifiers that could be added on modularly to a "GPL-2.0"? 

 

  • D)Standard headers for licenses
  • i)Currently this field only shows up on license list spreadsheet, but not on spdx.org license pages;  need to add this field including ability to indicate there isn't a standard header, as is the case for most licenses 
    • a) (Jilayne and Gary to begin working on)
  • ii)need to review license list, to make sure standard headers are correct; remove or indicate "replaceable" text; check if any are missing 
    • a)(Karen C. and Bill to start this task)

 

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2012-04-18

SPDX Legal Work Group- Meeting Minutes - 18 April 2012

Attendees:

  • Mark Gisi, Windriver
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Paul Madick, HP
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Adam Cohn, Cisco

The meeting discussion was focused on the SPDX "license list".

1. The attendees agreed that the proposed process for adding new licenses to the list should be forwarded to the wider team for review.   That proposal is attached below.

2 We also discussed, but did not resolve:

  • how license submissions should handle so-called "license headers" (AKA, "notices"), and
  • how license submissions should handle headers/modifiers which permit multiple license options, such as "license version X or later," or where an option is given to a user to pick and choose among different licenses.

After some robust discussion of these points, it was agreed that we needed greater cross-team consensus on what problems, exactly, the license list is designed to solve.  There is high-level agreement of the benefit of having a canonical list of key licenses, but when it comes down to making specific tradeoff decisions such as those above,  it would be helpful to have additional guiding principles.  The attendees agreed that these guiding principles should not be owned by the legal team, but should be agreed across the three teams.

The attendees also agreed that it would be valuable to start collecting “use cases” that serve as examples of real life scenarios in which SPDX will have to function.  For example, if a product has several nested components, some of which are licensed under GPLv3, and some of which are marked with a license header allowing choice between MIT and GPLV2 or later, the SPDX license list needs to both capture this information and enable the user to take action and pass along an SPDX accurately reflecting these choices to the next link in the chain.   

Summary: 

  • Legal team will circulate the proposed process for submitting new licenses for input from the other teams (see below)
  • Initiate discussion in the general meeting on creating new “guiding principles” to assist and guide all teams.  Attendees today agreed to come prepared to next meeting with ideas for guiding principles to start discussion.
  • Legal team to start collecting use cases and add them to the list being compiled by the technical team.

============================================

Proposed process for submitting new licenses

============================================

·         Submit via SPDX-legal email address.

·         Provide a functioning URL reference to the license text,  either from the license author or a or community recognized source for the license text  (License URL):

·         Create and attach a formatted text file with the license text from the URL posted above

·         Proofread license text file to ensure that:

o   information has not been lost or modified

o   formatting is clean and consistent with the License URL

o   only appropriate headers and information are included in the text file [link to protocol]

·         Indicate if the license is OSI approved [Yes/No].    If yes, provide link to OSI license, verify that it is the same text as supplied in #1 above.

·         Briefly explain the need for this license to be included, including identifying at least one program that uses this license or a prior version of this license.

·         Please provide a proposed Full Name for the license, in line with the SPDX naming guidelines [LINK]

·         Please provide a proposed License Identifier, in line with the SPDX naming guidelines

·         Tools: Guidelines for the tools group to match this license [need to flesh this out]

Method of approval:

1.       Legal Team meets every 2 weeks to review submissions of new licenses.  If volume of license submissions becomes too great for Legal Team, we would create a separate Subteam to handle these reviews.

2.       License submissions that meet requirements above reviewed and approved at next available Team/Subteam meeting.  If further information is required, Team/Subteam responds to requestor to re-submit.

3.       Publish recommended new license on the license list page as “proposed”, wait 2 weeks for review and comment then approval at next Legal Team/Subteam, following which the license gets posted as final.

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2012-05-01

SPDX Legal Work Group Meeting Minutes - 1 May 2012

Attendees:

  • David Wheeler
  • Mark Gisi
  • Michael Herzog
  • Peter Williams
  • Paul Madick
  • Tom Incorvia
  • Kevin Fleming
  • Adam Cohn

1) Discuss status of Adding Licenses process

  • decided to post proposal from 4/18 meeting on website and send to general mailing list for review and mention during tomorrow's General Meeting call (JILAYNE  to do)

2) somewhat related and mildly circuitous discussion regarding license headers/notices, the standard header field on the license list

  • suggestion floated to simply drop this field from the license list
  • another suggestion to change to "yes/no" - as in, yes, the license includes a suggested standard header, or no, it does not.  rationale being that where there is a standard header, it is merely cut and pasted from part of the license text anyway, so this is duplicitous
  • in meantime, may need to clarify/revise description of this field here - http://www.spdx.org/wiki/spdx-license-list
  • value of having standard header field is for identification purposes, an additional way to definitively identify it's Foo License besides matching on the entire license text (this is probably inline with license author's intent of including it!)
  • all agreed there are many "non-standard" headers in the wild, but trying to track those or create that list is another project that we can't do (at least not right now)

3) statements on vision for: a) SPDX work groups, b) legal group specifically, and c) license list more specifically.  Adam proposed the following as to the first - did not have time to discuss, but would like to do so and then distribute to other groups.  need to draft items for b and c.

Adam's proposed text:

"To enable any party in the software supply chain, from the original author to the final end user, to accurately communicate and understand the licensing information for any piece of copyrightable material that such party may create, alter, pass on, or receive, and to make such information available in a consistent, understandable, and re-usable fashion, with the aim of facilitating license and other policy compliance."

TASKS FOR NEXT CALL:

  1. Review Adam's proposed text to discuss on next call - ALL
  2. draft vision/goals statement for legal group, distribute to group, so we can discuss on next call - PAUL
  3. draft vision/goals statement for license list, distribute to group, so we can discuss on next call  - JILAYNE
  4. review current to-do list (see: http://www.spdx.org/wiki/legal-team-current-issues-last-updated-april-6 ) and note anything that's missing (need to go over and prioritize on subsequent call) - ALL

Legal Team Meeting Minutes - 2012-05-16

SPDX Legal Work Group Meeting Minutes - 16 May 2012

Attendees:

  • Jilayne Lovejoy, OpenLogic
  • Peter Williams, OpenLogic
  • Michael Herzog, NexB
  • Mark Gisi, WindRiver
  • Paul Madick, HP
  • Jason, Cisco
  • Tom Incorvia, Micro Focus

Agenda:

1. SPDX total vision: review Adam's proposed text to discuss on next call - done on Business Team call last week - any need to further discuss here, or leave to that next call?

--> did not discuss, leaving it to business calls (and general group) at this point

2. Legal Group vision/description: draft vision/goals statement for legal group and discuss -
PAUL's proposed text:

"The SPDX Legal Team supports the SPDX working groups by providing recommendations to the SPDX working groups regarding licensing issues for the specification itself; providing input that will result in increased legal certainty of the licensing attributes of open source projects; maintain the SPDX License List; and to promote the SPDX specification to the legal community at-large."

  • "increased legal certainty of the licensing attributes of open source projects" - what is this trying to say? Seems to - when attorneys using this info to license a project in a certain way, these are the kind of things lawyers will be looking at to determine the license
    • "provide certainty as to what licenses are for identification purposes" 
    • "increased certainty of the licensing origins of open source projects"
    • "increased certainty about how open source projects license their project" 
    • "increased certainty of the licensing of open source projects"
    • "increased certainty as to being able to identify the licensing info for open source projects"
    • how about just delete the phrase altogether? - Got inward looking, concrete (License List) and outward looking - what else is there? 
    • Going forward: re-send with revisions and meeting notes; send to general group and then vet at next legal call

REVISED VERSION:

"The SPDX Legal Team supports the SPDX working groups by providing recommendations to the SPDX working groups regarding licensing issues for the specification itself; providing input that will result in increased legal certainty of the licensing attributes of open source projects; maintain the SPDX License List; and to promote the SPDX specification to the legal community at-large."

  • Other tangent dicussion to this:
    • how to identify the license for an open source project - ex. Within the file versus whether there's a copying file on top of the directory → license in the file is more determinate than the license in the directory o notion of license at package level and at file level - SPDX producer takes liberties to determine this o but this isn't what the legal is doing, is it? Should we? Should the legal group come up with a group of guidelines and provide some influence on that? 
  • --> add to to-do list for discussion at later date

3. SPDX License List description: draft vision/goals statement for license list and discuss - JILAYNE's proposed text:

"The SPDX License List is a list of commonly found open source software licenses for the purposes of being able to easily and efficiently identify such licenses in an SPDX document. The SPDX License List includes a standardized short identifier and full name for each license, as well as other basic information. By providing a short identifier, SPDX creators (as well as others beyond SPDX) can efficiently refer to a license without having to redundantly reproduce the full license. The SPDX website (spdx.org) maintains the full text of each license on the SPDX License List. In keeping with the overall goal of the SPDX project, no interpretation of the licenses has been made and the SPDX Licenses List endeavors to only provide a factual list of licenses and short identifiers that can be consistently relied upon by users of the list."

  • add "vetted license text" to second sentence
  • add something about canonical reference, i.e. consistent and reliable maintained url for each license
  • remove last sentence as it's more of a counterpoint - good info to have, but probably belongs more in the FAQ section; can't cover every scenario in statement, better to keep it a statement of what it is (not what it isn't)
  • also probably don't need spdx.org website sentence
  • Going forward: re-send with revisions and meeting notes; send to general group and then vet at next legal call

REVISED VERSION:

"The SPDX License List is a list of commonly found open source software licenses for the purposes of being able to easily and efficiently identify such licenses in an SPDX document. The SPDX License List includes a standardized short identifier, full name for each license, vetted license text, other basic information, and a canonical permanent URL. By providing a short identifier, users can efficiently refer to a license without having to redundantly reproduce the full license."

4. Review current to-do list: - Jilayne updated last night, see http://spdx.org/wiki/legal-team-current-issues-last-updated-may-15 - anything missing? prioritization?

  • license list to-do's - some stuff in progress; will need to deal with "issues" on their, but probably easier to do that once v1.16 is uploaded (goal to have done by next call..??)
  • Website updates and refresh - started listing areas that need work on current site, other things?
    • should we have something on website re: how we are dealing with other license lists and efforts involved around that?  or on website FAQ as we deal with those along the way 
    • refresh/tracking over to new pages - need update from MARK as to where we are on that and what needs to be done
  • Coordinating with other license lists
    • FSF list needs someone else to go through, may not necessarily add all the licenses they have on list (why licenses are on their list may be different reasons - i.e. for compatibility - not commonly used); come up with list of what we don't have versus what they have and then decide as group as to what to add - 
      • PAUL (Jilayne to send him work to date on that)
    • Fedora list - Jilayne has to do to look into that more and follow up 
    • Gentoo and Debian - will need others to take lead on these

TO-DO'S and NEXT CALL 5/30:

  1. Send revised Legal Work Group mission statement to group - JILAYNE (Review, finalize, and post next call - ALL)
  2. Send revised SPDX License List descriptive statement to group for review - JILAYNE (Review, finalize, and post next call - ALL)
  3. FSF License list - needs to finish going through and make list of license on FSF list, but not on SPDX list and decide on whether to add to SPDX list - PAUL (Jilayne started going through, will send Paul info) 
  4. update to-do list as per discussions on this call - JILAYNE

SPDX Forum: Managing Open Source Software Licenses with Suppliers and Customers

 

SPDX Forum: Managing Open Source Licenses with Suppliers and Customers

April 6, 2012

San Jose, CA

The SPDX Forum is a one-day forum that will help companies learn how to streamline their open source license compliance processes.  The forum will bring together procurement, supply chain, legal and technical staff at companies that use open source technologies in their products to discuss challenges and best practices for complying with open source licenses across the software supply chain.  

We will also discuss how the SPDX(TM) (Software Package Data Exchange) standard, developed by a workgroup of the Linux Foundation, can help companies to improve and streamline compliance efforts.

Topics covered will include:

  • State of open source compliance
  • Discussion groups on challenges and best practices for open source compliance
  • How SPDX can help

Full agenda

Register now

The SPDX Forum is hosted by the SPDX Workgroup of the Linux Foundation.  The SPDX Workgroup is an industry group that is developing a standard that enables companies to share information about open source licenses with suppliers and customers.  The SPDX Workgroup includes members from over 20 companies, including Alcatel-Lucent, Antelink, Black Duck Software, Canonical, Cisco, HP, Micro Focus, Motorola Mobility, nexB Inc, OpenLogic, Palamida, Protecode, Source Auditor, Texas Instruments and Wind River. 

When

April 6, 2012

9:00am to 3:00pm

Where

The SPDX Forum will be hosted by Cisco
10 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, California 95134
United States

Building O
First Floor
Chess Meeting Room

Register

There is no charge for attendance.  You must register to attend.  Register now.

Questions?

Have questions about the SPDX Forum, please contact Kim Weins kim.weins@openlogic.com

 

SPDX Forum Agenda

SPDX Forum Agenda

  • 9:00-9:15 Welcome & Intro (Kim Weins)
  • 9:15-10:00 Setting the Stage on OSS Compliance (Mark Radcliffe)
  • 10:00-10:30 Discussion: The Challenges of OSS Compliance Today (All)
  • 10:30-10:45 Break
  • 10:45-11:45 SPDX Primer:  What is SPDX and How Can it Help (Phil Odence and Kirsten Newcomer)
  • 11:45-12:00 Morning wrap up, prep for discussion
  • 12:00-12:15 Break/Grab Lunch
  • 12:15-1:45 Discussion: Challenges and Approaches to Implementing SPDX led by SPDX End Users
    • Cisco, HP, WindRiver, maybe MicroFocus
  • 1:45-2:00 Break
  • 2:00-2:20 Getting Started with SPDX  (Gary O Neall and Jilayne Lovejoy)
    • Using the Tools
    • Using the License List
  • 2:20-3:00 Wrap up (All)
    • Summary of what's planned beyond 1.0
    • Feedback from participants
    • Review/Prioritize feedback from throughout the day
    • Q&A /Discussion
    • Invitation to participate

Website Content Assignments

We are splitting up the work to migrate content to our new website.  If you want to volunteer, please feel free to add your name next to one of the items.

  • Intro to SPDX
    • Background -- Phil O
    • Membership - Jack Manbeck
    • How to Participate - Jack Manbeck
    • Roles & Responsibilities - Jack Manbeck
  • Documentation
    • Current Specification - Kate Stewart
    • Usage Guidelines – Mark Gisi
    • FAQs – Mark Gisi
    • Archive Specs
    • Whitepapers/Tutorials/Other Content - Kim
    • Beta Collateral - Kim
    • Launch Collateral - Kim
  • Tools -- Gary
  • Current Activities
    • Beta Test  Kim
    • SPDX Launch - Kim
  • WorkGroups
    • General - Phil O
    • Technical -
    • Legal - Mark Gisi
    • Business - Kim
    • Website Refresh - Web Team
  • Calendar
  • Blogs & Discussion
  • Finding your way around this site

Website Refresh

This is the working area for the Website Refresh team.

The web team meets weekly on Wednesdays at 19:00 GMT (12:00 Noon Pacific Time, 3:00 PM Eastern Time).

Toll-free dial-in number (U.S. and Canada): (877) 435-0230

International dial-in number: (253) 336-6732

Conference code: 7438902829.

URL: http://blackducksoftware.adobeconnect.com/r59605444/

Goals & Assumptions

This team has been formed to review current website content and navigation with an eye towards readiness for SPDX specification GA.

Based on initial feedback, the team is currently focused on a top-down view, with an emphasis on new visitors.

We've also asked individual work teams to take a first pass at consolidating their Participation wikis.

The team will use a sandbox web-site to test out ideas asking for feedback from the broader group as we go.

http://sandbox.spdx.org/

New feature requests or other feedback can be added by going to this wiki:

Click here Web Site Refresh Comments and Feedback

Collected Feedback

We've organized the feedback collected to date by the following categories:

  • Information Architecture
  • Visual
  • Navigation
  • Technology

Information Architecture

  • Hard to figure out who, what, when
  • Not organized for different users
  • Proposed usage categories: Participate, Learn, Use
  • Mockup feedback/question: Where does LEARN button take you?
    • Perhaps to About SPDX?
    • Learn sub-topics should include: History, Overview, Using the spec, 3 minute webinar
  • Mockup feedback/question: Developing the Spec link: where does this take you?
    • Perhaps this link is replaced by Participation link/button.
  • Mockup feedback/question: Outreach support link: what should be here? Who's the user?
  • Mockup feedback/question: Where does PARTICIPATE button take you?
    • To Participation pages
  • Mockup feedback/question: Provide one-to-one mapping of big buttons to top level links
  • build for both business user and engineer
  • identify types of tasks
  • buttons for returning users

Visual

  • too much text
  • add graphics, perhaps recorded video
  • need big buttons to draw attention to main areas/flow
  • reformat existing blue bar to have more links and bigger text
  • Compare what we're doing with other sites
    • Focus on Linux Foundation site rather than doing a lot of research across many sites since LF is sponsor

Navigation

  • drop down menus (navigable) for top buttons allow users to learn more about what's available without having to navigate to another section first
  • provide multiple navigation paths to same content

Technology

  • Suggest wiki be used for collaboration pages but not other pages
  • Stick with Linux Foundation technology and standards
  • What permissions control is appropriate for working areas?

 

SPDX Home page mockups (first attempt)

2011-05-03: Strawman mockups for priming the pump.

SPDXweb1.png shows a proposed new layout for the home page
SPDXweb2.png shows proposed drop down items for the main links on the home page

Mockups for additioinal pages you navigate to by the big buttons won't be done until we have some initial feedback on these mockups.
    Learn
    Use
    Participate

2011-05-12: Reviewed mockups with Biz Team. Great discussion, lots of input. Decided that best approach going forward will be to use a sandbox website to test out ideas so that folks can actually navigate links and explore.

Sandbox can be found here: http://sandbox.spdx.org/

 

SPDX web site mind maps

The website refresh team has put together a proposed information map for the SPDX web site refresh initiative.

We've decided to capture this using FreeMind, a free tool for creating mind maps. You can find information about Free Mind here: http://freemind.sourceforge.net/wiki/index.php/Main_Page

Below, you'll find two PDF versions of the mind map we've created.

Version 1 shows the SPDX Home Page with 9 proposed child pages that would be available from the Home page. Many of those child pages have additional children. Open it up, and take a look!

Version 2 shows the same mind map, but with one more level displayed. This final level, in small, black, italic text, is used to indicate child nodes that, on the actual web site, would be links to another node. The text tells you which node the link points to.

Note: The mind map does not show page layout or graphics placeholders, but is simply intended to show the flow of information and likely links.

Feedback on this proposed map is most welcome.

If you'd like to provide your feedback in FreeMind, send me an email (knewcomer@blackducksoftware.com) and I'll send the .mm version of the mind map, since I can't post it here.

Next steps:

  • Collect Feedback
  • Implement in sandbox

First feedback session is being hosted by the Business team on Thursday, July 7th. We'll be happy to host additional sessions upon request.

Volunteers Needed! Once we have something close-to-consensus, we'll proceed to implement in the SPDX web site sandbox that Martin Michlmayr was kind enough to create. We're looking for volunteers who might know Drupal or are willing to learn to help with the implementation. We're also looking for volunteers to create content that might not already be present on ths site. If you're interested in helping, please send email to knewcomer@blackducksoftware.com.

Website Team Meeting Minutes

2011-04-28 WebTeam Minutes

Attendees:

Pierre, LaPointe, Kirsten Newcomer

Discussion
Initial focus is on reworking the Home page for spdx.org; we'll tackle other pages after that. Discussion points covered items such as format, navigation, work group wiki pages, and analytics.

Format & Navigation

The http://www.linuxfoundation.org/ home page provides a possible model we might want to follow.
There are at least 3 major categories that need to be easy to access from the home page:

  • Participate
  • Beta
  • Learn/Use -- not clear yet whether this should be category or two

We might use the kind of format shown on linuxfoundation.org for "Attend a Linux Event," "Enroll in Linux Training," and "Read a Publication."


Having drop downs for the links across the top of the page (as is done on linuxfoundation.org) would help to provide additional info as to what's available on those pages so that users don't have to navigate there first to figure out what's available.


The contents of the blue bar at the bottom of spdx.org should use larger fonts and might also have more links to help folks find more items.


The navigation links that appear on the right hand side should be moved to the left (assuming we decide to keep them)

Work group wiki pages

Working group wiki pages: We will reach out to the leads for each working group and ask them to gather feedback from their groups as to:

  • Most relevant/used areas
  • What parts of the current structure works well for their working group
  • What parts could be better organized
  • Is it time to group some of the existing links for easier navigation

Analytics

It would be helpful to have analytics on use/page visits of the existing spdx.org web pages

Action Items

  • Create initial mock-up for a new spdx.org Home page -- Kirsten
  • Contact Martin M. to find out about analytics for the existing web pages -- Pierre
  • Collect feedback from the Legal team on the Legal Team area -- Michael from NexB
  • Collect feedback from the Technical team on the Technical Team area -- Kirsten
  • Talk to Phil Odence about getting feedback on the area for the General Meeting -- Kirsten
  • Talk with Kim about getting feedback from the Business team on the Business Team area -- no owner
  • Schedule a regular check-in call -- Kirsten

 

2011-05-18 WebTeam Meeting Minutes

Attendees:

Steve Cropper, Pierre LaPointe, Kirsten Newcomer

Topics:

Discuss feedback from Biz Team on initial set of mockups.

Based on detailed input and number of questions about where links on mockups would take you, we determined that a sandbox website would server better for presenting ideas and collecting feedback. This approach also allows us to understand what's technically possible using the web site tools available to us.

We also decided that storyboards or user scenarios would be helpful, and identified the following personas:

  • Persona1: New to SPDX
  • Persona2: Already using SPDX and have questions
  • Persona3: Workgroup member
  • Persona4: Press

We agreed to use Mindmap as the format: http://freemind.sourceforge.net/wiki/index.php/Main_Page

Once we have an initial set of story boards, the web team will review to look for common patterns, refine the scenarios and then share more broadly and/or implement in sandbox for feedback loop.

We came up with the following set of questions to use for collecting feedback:

  • Is the current organization sufficient?
  • Are there elements missing?
  • Would they like some guidance on structure?
  • How easy is it to find what you need? (new vs. returning)
  • Do you think the collaboration area will need periodic reorganization?

Feedback collected to date is available here: http://www.spdx.org/wiki/collected-feedback

New Action Items:

  • Storyboard for persona1: New to SPDX (include returning scenario) -- Steve
  • Storyboard for persona2: Already using SPDX and have questions (include returning scenario) -- Kirsten
  • Storyboard for persona3: Workgroup member (include returning scenario) -- Pierre
  • Storyboard for persona4: Press (include returning scenario) -- ask Phil / Kim to help

Open Action Items:

  • Collect feedback from the Legal team on the Legal Team area -- Michael from NexB
  • Talk to Phil Odence about getting feedback on the area for the General Meeting -- Kirsten
  • Talk with Kim about getting feedback from the Business team on the Business Team area -- no owner
  • Schedule a regular check-in call -- Kirsten

Completed Action Items:

  • Initial mock-up for a new spdx.org Home page created and reviewed with Biz Team -- Kirsten
  • Contact Martin M. to find out about analytics for the existing web pages; scheduled for 5/25  -- Pierre
  • Collect feedback from the Technical team on the Technical Team area -- Kirsten